Handleiding Korg Kross 2 (pagina 34 van 152) (Engels)

707348

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/152

Pagina verder

About this manual

The manuals and how to use them

The KROSS comes with the following manuals.

• Quick Start Guide (printed)

The manuals listed below can be downloaded from the Korg

website.

• Operation Guide (PDF) (this document)

• Parameter Guide (PDF)

• Voice Name List (PDF)

• Quick Start Guide (PDF)

You can also watch video manuals on the Korg website.

• Video manual

http://www.korg.com/

Quick Start Guide

This provides a simple explanation of the KROSS’s functions.

To begin, please read the Quick Start Guide.

Operation Guide (this document)

Put simply, the Operation Guide is designed to answer the

question, “How do I do this?”

It explains the names and functions of each part of the KROSS,

basic operation, an overview of each mode, how to edit sounds,

record on the sequencer, and so on. This guide also explains the

basics of effects, the Arpeggiator, Drum Track, and Drum Kits.

Finally, it also contains a troubleshooting guide as well as

supplemental information such as a list of specifications.

Parameter Guide

The Parameter Guide is designed to answer the question,

“What does this do?”

Organized by mode and page, the Parameter Guide includes

information on each and every parameter in the KROSS.

Voice Name List

The Voice Name List lists all of the sounds and setups that are

in the KROSS when it is shipped from the factory, including

Programs, Combinations, Multisamples, Drumsamples, Drum

Kits, Arpeggio Patterns, Drum Track Patterns, Demo Songs,

and Template Songs.

PDF versions

The KROSS PDF manuals are designed for easy navigation

and searching. They include extensive PDF contents

information, which generally appears on the side of the

window in your PDF reader and lets you jump quickly to a

specific section. All cross-references are hyper-links, so that

clicking on them automatically takes you to the source of the

reference.

Video Manual

This video illustrates the main functionality of the KROSS.

Conventions in this manual

References to the KROSS

The KROSS is available in 88-key, and 61-key models. The

manuals refer to all models without distinction as “the

KROSS.”

Abbreviations for the manuals: PG

In the documentation, references to the manuals are

abbreviated as follows.

PG: Parameter Guide

Symbols , , Note, Tips

These symbols respectively indicate a caution, a MIDI-related

explanation, a supplementary note, or a tip.

Example screen displays

The parameter values shown in the example screens of this

manual are only for explanatory purposes, and may not

necessary match the values that appear on the LCD screen of

your instrument.

MIDI-related explanations

CC# is an abbreviation for Control Change Number.

In explanations of MIDI messages, numbers in square brackets

[ ] always indicate hexadecimal numbers.

What is ?

(Resonant structure and Electronic circuit Modeling

System) is Korg’s proprietary technology for digitally

recreating the numerous factors that produce and influence a

sound, ranging from the sound-production mechanisms of

acoustic instruments and electric/electronic musical

instruments, to the resonances of an instrument body or

speaker cabinet, the sound field in which the instrument is

played, the propagation route of the sound, the electrical and

acoustic response of mics and speakers, and the changes

produced by vacuum tubes and transistors.

* All product names and company names are the trademarks

or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Thank you for purchasing the Korg KROSS SYNTHESIZER WORKSTATION. To help you get the most out of

your new instrument, please read.

iii

Table of Contents

About this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

Introduction to the KROSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

Front and rear panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Items in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Basic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

About the KROSS’s modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Basic operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Turning the power on/off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Connecting the AC adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Turning the power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Turning the power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Using batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Audio connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Connecting foot controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Using an SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Connecting the KROSS to a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Connecting MIDI devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Playing and editing Programs . . . . . . . . . . 27

Playing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Selecting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Program categories and numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Using Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Performing with the arpeggiator, drum track or step sequencer. . . . . 28

Quick Layer/Split function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Quick Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Quick Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Combination settings made by Quick Layer/Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Easy program editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Using the Tone Adjust and EG Adjust functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Adjusting the volume balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Using REALTIME CONTROLS to adjust the sound or effects . . . . . . . . . . 32

Comparing the unedited sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Saving your edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Detailed Editing with Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Before you start editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

An overview of the edit pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Basic oscillator settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Creating time-varying changes (LFO and EG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Diverse modulation settings (AMS and AMS mixer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Controlling Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Using Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Using the Amp section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Making controller assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Arpeggiator settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Drum Track settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Using the step sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Automatically importing a Program into Sequence mode. . . . . . . . . . .44

Playing and editing Combinations . . . . . . . 45

Playing combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Selecting Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Combination categories and numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Using controllers to modify the sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Performing with the arpeggiator, drum track or step sequencer . . . . .46

Editing a combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Summary of the edit pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

A suggested approach for editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Comparing with the sound before you started editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Changing the program of each timbre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Adjusting the mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Using the Tone Adjust and EG Adjust functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Saving a Combination you’ve edited. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Using REALTIME CONTROLS to adjust the sound or effects . . . . . . . . . .49

Layers, Splits, and Velocity Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Status settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

MIDI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Changing the program settings to match the combination. . . . . . . . . .51

Arpeggiator settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Drum Track settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Using the step sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Automatically importing a combination into Sequence mode . . . . . . .52

Favorites function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

What is the Favorites function? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Using the Favorites function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Recalling a favorite sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Registering a sound in Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Convenient ways to use favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Specifying a program change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Table of Contents

Saving your Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

About the KROSS’s Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Sequencer mode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Playing back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Playback methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Preparations for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Recording MIDI in real time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Performing with the arpeggiator drum track or step sequencer. . . . . .62

Recording your pad sampler performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Recording System Exclusive events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Song editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Saving your MIDI song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Using Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

An overview of the KROSS’s effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Effect I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Effects in each mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Routing and effect settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Effect settings for a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Effect settings for a combination or song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Effect settings for audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Dynamic modulation (Dmod). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Arpeggiator function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Using the arpeggiator while you play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Using the arpeggiator in Program mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Arpeggio pattern selection and operation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Using the arpeggiator in Combination mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Arpeggiator settings in Combination and Sequencer modes . . . . . . . .76

Linking the arpeggiator to programs or combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Creating a user arpeggio pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

About user arpeggio patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Editing a user arpeggio pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Regarding arpeggiator synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

“Key Sync.” parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Drum Track function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Performing with the Drum Track function . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Using the Drum Track function in Program mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Using the Drum Track function in Combination mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Drum Track function settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Drum Track function settings in Program mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Drum Track function settings in Combination mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Drum Track function settings in Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Synchronizing the Drum Track function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

The Trigger “Sync” parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Synchronization with song stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Slave operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Master operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Step sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Performing with the step sequencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Playback and settings in Program mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Step sequencer settings in Combination mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Step sequencer settings in Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Using the step sequencer with Favorites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Synchronizing the step sequencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Pad Sampler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Performing with the pad sampler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Recording samples (sampling). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Editing a sample. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Playing samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

MIDI transmission and reception for the pad sampler function. . . . . . 97

Using samples in other ways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Exporting a sample. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Audio recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

An overview of the audio recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

About the audio recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

AUDIO RECORDER SETUP window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Recording and playing audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Recording the performance of the KROSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Recording external audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Playing back an audio song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Multi-track recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Preparing a new audio song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Convenient functions for playback and recording. . . . 104

Returning to the state before or after recording (Undo/Redo). . . . . . 104

Specifying how recording will start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Table of Contents

Loop playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Pad audio play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Importing or exporting WAVE files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Adjusting the volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

SD card-related messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Pad audio play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Performing with the pad audio play function. . . . . . . . 109

Specifying an audio song and assigning the song to a pad. . . . . . . . . 109

Using the pads to play back audio songs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Using Drum Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Drum Kit Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Before you start editing… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Editing a Drum Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Overall settings for the KROSS, and saving/

loading data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

How Global/Media mode is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Global setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Basic settings for the KROSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

MIDI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Pedal and other controller settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Creating and selecting scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Data used by the KROSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Saving data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Saving data on the KROSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Writing to internal memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Editing names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Saving to SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Loading data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Data that can be loaded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Loading data from SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Media utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Formatting SD card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Setting the current time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Restoring the factory settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Loading the preloaded data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Initializing the user bank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Initializing the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Updating the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Problems at start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Basic operation (screen and functions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Audio input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Programs and Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Sequencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Arpeggiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Drum Track function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Drum Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Step sequencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Pad sampler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Audio recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Damper pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Connections with a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Error and confirmation messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Operating requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Table of Contents

Introduction to the KROSS

Front and rear panels

Front panel

1. Keyboard

The KROSS 61-key has a 61-note keyboard (velocity sensitive,

aftertouch not supported).

The KROSS 88-key has a 88-note natural weighted hammer-

action (NH) keyboard (velocity sensitive, aftertouch not

supported).

When playing these keyboards, your playing strength (velocity)

can affect aspects of the sound such as the volume and the EG

speed, allowing you to vary the character of the attack. (see pages

31 and 43)

You can also set keyboard tracking settings so that the sound will

change as you move across the keyboard, for example by

becoming brighter as you play higher notes. (see page 42)

2. Controllers

SW1, SW2 buttons

You can assign various functions to the SW1 and SW2 buttons

for each program, combination, or song. You can use these

buttons to control program parameters via AMS (Alternate

Modulation), or effect parameters via Dmod (Dynamic

Modulation).

They can also transpose the keyboard by octaves, turn

portamento on/off, or lock the Pitch Bend position.

Each button can work as either a

Toggle

Momentary

button.

Toggle

mode, the assigned function is switched between on

and off each time the button is pressed. In

Momentary

mode,

the assigned function is active on only as long as you hold down

the button.

In Program mode, you can check the assignments of SW1 and

SW2 on the PROG> MAIN page.

For details, please see “SW (Switch assignment) information” on

page 28.

When you write a Program or Combination, the on/off status of

the SW1 and SW2 buttons is saved.

Please see “Setting the functions of SW1 and SW2” on page 44.

Pitch bend wheel (left)

Move this wheel forward or backward to control the pitch. The

center is the normal position, where there is no pitch change.

When you take your hand off of the pitch bend wheel, it will

return to the center position.

The amount of pitch change can be specified individually for

each program’s oscillator, combination timbre, and song track.

You can also use the pitch bend lock function of the SW1 or SW2

buttons to lock the pitch so that it will stay at the position of the

wheel immediately before the button was released.

Modulation wheel (right)

Move this wheel away from yourself to control various program

parameters or effect parameters. If the wheel is moved all the way

732

8 11

910

12 13 14 15

KROSS 61-key

* The battery compartment of the

KROSS 61-key is located on the

bottom panel.

9 10

13 14

KROSS 88-key

Introduction to the KROSS

toward yourself, the effect will be zero. The modulation wheel

will stay in its position when you release it, and the effect will

continue.

The function that is controlled by the wheel is assigned by the

program parameters or effect parameters. Although different

effects are assigned for different programs and combinations, a

vibrato effect which cyclically varies the pitch is typically

assigned to the modulation wheel.

3. VOLUME knob

This knob adjusts the volume of the OUTPUT L/MONO, R

outputs, as well as the volume of the headphone jack. (see

page 17)

4. ARP (Arpeggiator) button

This button turns the arpeggiator on/off. The button will be lit up

if the arpeggiator is on. (see page 73)

5. DRUM TRACK button

This button turns the Drum Track function on or off. This button

also indicates the operating state of the drum track.

Unlit: off, Blinking: waiting for trigger, Lit: on (see page 83)

6. REALTIME CONTROLS

When you're playing a program or combination,you can use these

to adjust the sound or the effects, or to make simple edits. Here

you can also turn the external audio input on/off, adjust the

vocoder function, and adjust the tempo of the arpeggiator or

sequencer.

For details on operating each parameter and on saving your

changes, see PG p.311.

Note:

REALTIME CONTROLS can be used when the SELECT

LED is lit. They cannot be used when the LED is unlit.

SELECT button, SELECT LED

This selects the functions that are controlled by the SWITCH

button, KNOB 1 button, and KNOB 2 button. Each time you

press the button, the functions being controlled are switched, and

the SELECT LED is lit.

The functions controlled by the SELECT button are saved for

each program, combination, or song.

SWITCH button, SWITCH LED

Each time you press this button, the function selected by the

SELECT button turns on or off. If the function selected by the

SELECT button is on, the SWITCH LED is brightly lit. The

SWITCH LED is dimly lit for functions that are not selected by

the SELECT button, letting you see the on/off status of those

functions. The TAP LED blinks according to the tempo setting.

When you operate the button, the parameter name and value of

the selected function appears in the display for a time.

Tips:

If you long-press the SELECT button, a list of the selected

functions appears. After a time, you return to the previous page or

window.

Note:

Display indications return to the previous page or window

after a certain time has passed.

KNOB1 knob, KNOB2 knob

Turn these knobs to edit the functions selected by the SELECT

button. If you edit a setting and then use the SELECT button to

select another function, the state or value edited by the KNOB 1

and 2 knobs is preserved. However, be aware that if you re-select

the program etc., the program-related knob values are reset to the

center position.

Tips:

When you operate a knob, the function and value that you

operated are shown. After a time, you return to the previous page

or window.

Note:

Display indications return to the previous page or window

after a certain time has passed.

7. Modes

Press one of these buttons to enter the corresponding mode. The

KROSS has four operating modes. The currently selected mode

button will be lit up. (see “Selecting modes” on page 12)

PROG button

This button selects Program mode. Programs are basic sounds; in

Program mode you can play and edit programs.

COMBI button

This button selects Combination mode. Combinations are sets of

programs with split or layer settings; you can use a combination to

create sounds that are more complex than a program. In

Combination mode you can play and edit combinations.

SEQ button ( )

This button selects Sequencer mode. In this mode you can record,

play, and edit MIDI songs.

By pressing the EXIT button ( ) and the SEQ button

( ), selects Global/Media mode. In this mode you can

adjust overall settings for the KROSS, edit drum kits and

arpeggio patterns, and save or load data using an SD card.

8. CATEGORY dial, LED

Use this dial to select the sound category of the program or

combination.

9. Quick layer/split

Here you can easily create layered or split sounds using two

programs.

Select the first sound in Program mode; then press this button. In

the dialog box that appears, select the second sound and specify

its volume; then confirm the settings.

Choose LAYER if you want the two sounds to play together

across the entire keyboard; choose SPLIT if you want the two

sounds to play separately in the high and regions of the keyboard.

Note:

A layer or split sound that you create can be saved as a

combination.

Tips:

If you want to adjust more sophisticated settings in order to

obtain more complex sounds, use Combination mode.

LAYER/SPLIT button

When you press the LAYER/SPLIT button, the QUICK LAYER

dialog box or the QUICK SPLIT dialog box appears.

In the QUICK LAYER dialog box, pressing the PAGE+

(



SPLIT) button opens the QUICK SPLIT dialog box. In the

QUICK SPLIT dialog box, pressing the PAGE- (LAYER



)

button opens the QUICK LAYER dialog box.

QUICK LAYER DIALOG

A program of the strings category is layered with the currently

selected program. Select a program to layer, and adjust the

volume and octave settings. By pressing the MENU (WRITE)

button you can save the settings to a user combination bank. (see

page 29)

Front and rear panels Front panel

QUICK SPLIT DIALOG

The currently selected program is assigned to the high range and

a program of the bass category is assigned to the low range.

Select the split program, swap the high and low programs if

desired, and adjust settings such as the split point, volume, and

octave. By pressing the MENU (WRITE) button you can save the

settings to a user combination bank. (see page 30)

10. AUDIO REC (Audio recorder)

Here is where you can control the audio recorder, which lets you

record and play back your KROSS performance or signal from an

external audio input. You can execute functions such as play,

stop, or record, and adjust various settings for the recorder.

To control the audio recorder, use the AUDIO REC

(play/pause) button and the four buttons below the AUDIO

RECORDER SETUP window.

In order to use the audio recorder, you’ll need a SD card

(separately sold).

(play/pause) button ( )

This is a dedicated button that executes the recorder playback (or

record) and pause functions. In any mode, this button lets you

immediately play (or record) or pause. The state of the light and

color of the button indicates the operating status of the recorder.

If you hold down the EXIT button ( ) and press the

(play/pause) button ( ), the AUDIO

RECORDER SETUP window appears.

11. Display

This shows the parameters and settings of the KROSS, as well as

a variety of other information.

Pages:

Each screen of parameters or information is called a

“page.” To edit or adjust the settings of the KROSS, you’ll access

the page that contains the desired parameter, and then change its

value.

Dialog box:

The screen that appears when you need to perform a

command function, confirm a result, or recall a temporary

function is called a “dialog box.”

For more about various objects that you’ll see in pages and dialog

boxes, please see page 7.

Adjusting the display contrast

To adjust the contrast of the display, hold down the EXIT button

and turn the VALUE dial. You can also adjust the display contrast

in the Global/Media mode PREF 1 page. (see page 117)

12. Functions / Page controller

You’ll use these buttons to access pages in the display, and to

select or execute functions that provide convenient commands in

each page. The functions of the four buttons will change

according to the page or dialog box that’s currently shown.

FUNCTION button

This button shows a function list containing convenient

commands on each page.

PAGE– button

PAGE+ button

Use these two buttons to move between pages in order to select

the page that you want to see. The page name or tab that’s

displayed on the upper part of the page indicates the currently

shown page.

MENU button

This button displays the page menu for each mode, allowing you

to select a page.

Operations while a dialog box is shown

While a dialog box is shown, the function of these four buttons

will change so that you can perform tasks that are appropriate for

that dialog box. The functions assigned to the buttons are shown

in the bottom of the display.

For example, suppose that you’re in Program mode and press the

FUNCTION button to access the function list.

The functions that are assigned to the four buttons are shown in

the bottom of the dialog box.

If you press the CLOSE (actually FUNCTION) button, the dialog

box will close and you’ll return to the previous page.

Press the



(actually PAGE–) button or



(actually PAGE+)

button to select a function.

Press the OK (actually MENU) button to open or execute the

selected function.

For example if you select Write Program and press the MENU

(OK) button, the WRITE PROGRAM dialog box will appear.

Here, the FUNCTION (CANCEL) and MENU (OK) functions

are assigned to the two buttons.

13. Value Controller

Use these to edit in the display. You’ll use these to move the

cursor and select parameters, to edit values, and also to execute or

cancel commands.

VALUE dial

Edit the value of the parameter (edit cell) where the cursor is

located.

Tips:

You can adjust the contrast of the display by holding down

the EXIT button ( ) and turning the VALUE dial.

EXIT button ( )

Use this button to cancel the execution of a function or the change

in a parameter value, or to close a dialog box.

You’ll also use this to move to the first page (such as the MAIN

page) within the mode.

Unlit: Stopped

Lit green: Playing

Blinking green: Playback is paused

Lit red: Recording

Blinking red: Recording is paused

Blinking orange: Recording is paused

(waiting for Auto input)

Introduction to the KROSS

By using the EXIT button together with another button, you can

perform the following functions.

ENTER button

Use this button to perform a function, select an radio button, or to

turn a check box on/off.

When you select a parameter and press the ENTER button, you’ll

be able to use the



cursor buttons to edit the value. After

you’ve edited the value, press the ENTER button to confirm the

change.

When you press the ENTER button on the MAIN page of

Program or Combination mode, a sound select list will appear.

◄►▲▼ Cursor buttons

Use these buttons to move the cursor in the display. Move the

cursor up/down/left/right to select the parameter that you want to

edit.

If the page contains more parameters than can be shown on a

single screen, a



symbol is shown to the left of the screen,

and you’ll be able to scroll the page up/down. (see “j: Scroll” on

page 8)

You can also use the



buttons to increment or decrement the

value in steps of 1. (see “ENTER button and ▲▼ cursor buttons”

on page 13)

14. SEQUENCER

You’ll use these buttons in Sequencer mode to record and play

back MIDI.

(REC) button ( )

Pressing this button will enter record-ready mode. Once you’re in

record-ready mode (shown by the button’s light), you can begin

recording by pressing the SEQUENCER (start/stop)

button. For details, please see “Recording MIDI in real time” on

page 61.

By pressing this (REC) button in Program mode or

Combination mode, you can instantly access the Auto Song Setup

function which lets you start recording immediately. (see

page 60)

Hold down the EXIT button( ) and press the (REC)

button ( ) to instantly move the song playback position

to the specified location. By default, this will be the first beat of

the first measure. You can also specify a desired location by using

a function command.

(start/stop) button

This button starts or stops recording and playback.

15. Pad section

1-16 Pad

Use pads 1-16 to control the step sequencer, favorites, sampler,

and audio play.

You can switch the function of pads 1-16 by pressing the

ACTIVE button( ) that corresponds to each function,

making it light. By pressing an ACTIVE button ( )

together with the EXIT button ( ), you can access the

setup page for each function.

STEP SEQ (Step Sequencer)

The

step sequencer

lets you easily create drum loop patterns by

using pads 1–16 to turn the notes on/off that are played by the

kick, snare, and hi-hat etc.

ACTIVE button ( )

This button indicates and changes the on/off status of the step

sequencer. If this is lit, you can use pads 1-16 to control the step

sequencer. (see page 89)

When you hold down the EXIT button ( ) and press this

button, the STEP SEQ EDIT page for Program, Combination, or

Sequencer mode will appear, allowing you to turn steps on/off

and to specify the pattern's resolution, length, and the sound used

for each tone.

Note:

If the favorites select screen is shown, holding down the

EXIT button ( ) and pressing this button does not show

the STEP SEQ EDIT page.

While the STEP SEQ EDIT page is shown, you can hold down

the ACTIVE button and press pads 1-13 to select the tone (e.g.,

kick, snare, accent) that will be controlled by pads 1-16.

By holding down the ACTIVE button and pressing a key, you can

select the sound (instrument) that’s actually played by each tone.

(see page 90)

RUN button

When you press the RUN button (the button will be lit), the step

sequencer will begin playing. You’ll hear the drum loop pattern

that’s specified by pads 1–16.

When you press the RUN button once again (the button will be

unlit), the step sequencer will stop playing.

FAVORITES

The

Favorites function

lets you use pads 1–16 to instantly

recall frequently-used programs, combinations, or audio songs

for the audio recorder to play. You can use this function to

during a live performance in the order that they will be needed.

Button or dial used

with EXIT

Functions

SEQ button ( )

Selects Global/Media mode.

If while in Global/Media mode you

once again press the EXIT button

()

and SEQ button

( ), you'll jump to the MEDIA

>FILE page.

AUDIO REC

(play/pause) button

(

)

Opens the AUDIO RECORDER

SETUP window.

SEQUENCER

(REC) button

(

)

In Sequencer mode, moves to the

previously-specified playback start

position. (see page 56)

STEP SEQ ACTIVE

button (

)

Opens the STEP SEQ EDIT page.

FAVORITE ACTIVE

button (

)

Enters the Add to Favorite registration-

ready state.

SAMPLER ACTIVE

button (

)

Opens the SAMPLER SETUP

window.

SAMPLER HOLD

button (

)

Puts the pad sampler in mute mode

AUDIO PLAY ACTIVE

button (

)

Opens the AUDIO PLAY SETUP

window.

VALUE dial Adjusts the contrast. (see above)

REALTIME

CONTROLS SELECT

button

Selects the parameter to be controlled

in reverse order.

BANK SELECT button

Selects favorites, pad sampler, and pad

audio play banks in reverse order.

Front and rear panels Front panel

ACTIVE button ( )

Use this button to turn the Favorites function on/off, or to register

sounds. (see page 53)

To recall a sound that you've registered, turn this button on, and

then use the BANK SELECT button and pads 1-16.

To register a sound, select that program or combination; then hold

down the EXIT button ( ) and press the FAVORITES

ACTIVE button ( ), and finally use the BANK SELECT

button and pads 1-16.

SAMPLER (Pad Sampler)

The pad sampler function lets you use pads 1-16 to play or

perform samples that you recorded from the performance of the

KROSS or from an external audio input. You can also edit the

samples. Up to four stereo samples can be played simultaneously.

(see page 93)

Note:

When using the pad sampler function, we recommend that

you use an SD card. You can use the card to automatically save or

load sample data.

ACTIVE button ( )

This button makes the pad sampler active, or displays the SETUP

page when used with the EXIT button ( ). In the

SAMPLER SETUP window, this lets you check and edit the

assignments of samples to pads, prepare for sampling, and edit

the recorded samples.

HOLD button ( )

By pressing this simultaneously with a pad, you can hold the

pressed state of that pad. By using this with the EXIT button

( ), you can temporarily mute the currently-sounding

pads.

AUDIO PLAY (Pad Audio Play)

ACTIVE button ( )

This button makes the pad audio play function active, or displays

the SETUP page when used with the EXIT button ( ). In

the AUDIO PLAY SETUP window, this lets you check and edit

the assignments of audio songs to pads, import WAVE files, and

adjust the volume.

BANK SELECT

BANK SELECT button, BANK LED A-H

Use this button to select the displayed zone of the step sequencer,

or to switch banks of favorites, pad sampler, or pad audio play.

Tips:

When selecting a bank, pressing the EXIT button

( ) and BANK SELECT button lets you select banks in

reverse order. (Except for the step sequencer)

If the step sequencer is on (with the STEP SEQ button lit), pads

1–16 will show the on/off status of each step. You can use pads

1–16 to turn each step on/off.

A:Step1-16, B:Step17-32, C:Step33-48, D:Step49-64

If the Favorites function is on (FAVORITES button lit), this

button selects the Favorites bank. Use pads 1–16 to select the

following Favorites.

Bank A 1–16, bank B 1–16, bank C 1–16, bank D 1–16,

bank E 1–16, bank F 1–16, bank G 1–16, bank H 1–16

When the pad sampler function is on (SAMPLER ACTIVE

button lit), this selects sampler banks. You can use pads 1-16 to

perform the following sample operations.

Bank A 1–16, bank B 1–16, bank C 1–16, bank D 1–16,

bank E 1–16, bank F 1–16, bank G 1–16, bank H 1–16

When the pad audio play function is on (AUDIO PLAY ACTIVE

button lit), you can select the audio play bank. You can use pads

1-16 to perform the following audio song operations.

Bank A 1–16, bank B 1–16, bank C 1–16, bank D 1–16,

bank E 1–16, bank F 1–16, bank G 1–16, bank H 1–16

16. Battery compartment

The KROSS can be powered by batteries that you install here.

(see page 19)

The battery compartment of the KROSS 61-key is located on the

bottom panel.

17. Compartment (KROSS 88-key only)

The compartment can store small items such as a USB cable or

AC adapter.

You can open the lid in the same way as you open the battery

compartment cover. (→ p.19)

Introduction to the KROSS

Rear panel

1. Power supply

Be sure to see the “Turning the power on/off” section on page 17

and follow the correct procedure described there.

Note:

The KROSS has an auto power-off function that

automatically turns off the power when the keyboard or front

panel buttons have not been used for a certain length of time.

With the factory settings, this is set to 4 hours. (see “Auto power-

off function” on page 18)

(Power) button

To turn the power on or off, hold down the power button. (see

page 17)

DC 9V jack

The included AC adapter is connected here. (see page 17)

Connections must be made with the power turned off.

Please be aware that careless operation may damage

your speaker system or cause malfunctions.

Cord hook

Use this to secure the cord of the included AC adapter. After

connecting the AC adapter, loop the cord around the hook that’s

located on rear panel so that the cord won’t get pulled out

inadvertently. Leave enough slack on the plug end so that you can

disconnect it if you want to. (see page 17)

Be careful not to bend the base of the plug any more

than necessary.

2. Audio output

OUTPUT L/MONO, R jacks

These are stereo audio outputs. For stereo connections, use the L/

MONO and R jacks. For mono connections, use the L/MONO

jack. Use the VOLUME knob to adjust the volume. (see

“Connecting your output devices” on page 21)

(Headphone) jack

Connect the 1/8" stereo mini-phone plug of your headphones

here. This jack outputs the same signal as the OUTPUT L/

MONO and R jacks.

The headphone volume is controlled by the VOLUME knob.

Note:

The headphone jack of the KROSS 88-key model is located

on the front of the unit at the left.

3. Audio input

This jack lets you input audio from an external source; the audio

can be recorded on the audio recorder or pad sampler, or sent

through the internal effects and output via the OUTPUT jacks.

To adjust the input gain (Gain) etc., use REALTIME

CONTROLS - AUDIO IN 1 - KNOB1:GAIN.(You can also

adjust these settings in the AUDIO IN page of each mode.)

The input gain (Gain) can be saved as a global setting

(G-SET). (see “Global audio input settings (G-SET) and

individual settings” on page 22)

Note:

The input signals from the MIC IN jack and the LINE IN

jack cannot be used simultaneously. To select the input that will

be used, choose the REALTIME CONTROLS setting AUDIO IN

2 and use the SWITCH (MIC/LINE) button.

For more about connections and settings, please see “Connecting

your input devices” on page 21.

MIC IN jack (1/4" phone type)

This is a 1/4" phone jack. You can connect a dynamic mic, an

active-type guitar, or a guitar effect unit.

Note:

This jack does not support condenser mics or other mics that

require phantom power or plug-in power. Such types of mic must

be connected via a mic preamp or appropriate device.

LINE IN jack (stereo mini type)

This is an 1/8" stereo mini phone jack. Connect it to the output

jack of your audio device or external audio source.

4. USB

port

(USB B type, for connecting to computer)

You can connect your computer to this port. Note data and other

performance data, as well as sound settings, can be transmitted

and received via MIDI between a computer and the KROSS;

audio data can also be transmitted and received. (→ p.25)

12 367 45

The headphone jack of the KROSS

88-key model is located on the front

of the unit on the left.

12 367 45

Front and rear panels Items in the display

5. SD card

SD card slot

You can insert an SD card here. An SD card can be used to store

KROSS sounds and song data. (see page 25)

Since the SD card is accessed directly when you use the

audio recorder to play or record, an SD card is required

in order to use this functionality.

Note:

When using the pad sampler function, we recommend that

you use an SD card. You can use the card to automatically save or

load sample data.

6. MIDI

MIDI IN connector

MIDI OUT connector

MIDI lets you connect the KROSS to a computer or other MIDI

devices, for sending and receiving note data, controller gestures,

sound settings, and so on. (see page 26)

7. Foot controllers

DAMPER jack

An optional DS-1H (damper pedal) can be connected to this jack.

If the optional DS-1H is connected, it will function as a half-

damper pedal. If another switch-type pedal is connected, it will

function as a damper switch.

The DS-1H half-damper pedal allows a finer degree of control

compared to a switch-type pedal. Set the pedal polarity so that the

pedal will function correctly. (see “Connecting a damper pedal”

on page 23)

ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack

An on/off-type foot switch such as the optional PS-1 or PS-3

(pedal switch) can be connected to this jack. You can use a foot

switch to apply modulation to sounds or effects, to set the tap

tempo, or to start/stop the sequencer or to punch-in/out.

The function of the assignable switch is specified by Global/

Media mode settings in the G-INPUT/CTRL> FOOT page, just

as for the assignable pedal. (see “Connecting a foot switch” on

page 23)

ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack

An optional EXP-2 (foot controller), XVP-10 or XVP-20

(expression pedal) can be connected to this jack. You can use a

pedal to apply modulation to sounds or effects, or to adjust the

overall volume.

The function of the assignable pedal is specified by Global/Media

mode settings in the G-INPUT/CTRL> FOOT page. (see

“Connecting a foot pedal” on page 24)

8. KORG Logo Light

The LED of the KORG logo will light. You can specify the color

of the LED illumination, and whether it is lit or unlit.

(→ PG p.159)

Items in the display

a: Mode/Page title

This indicates the current page within the selected mode.

From the left, this shows the initial letter of the mode name and

the page name.

b: Page tabs

Most pages are divided into multiple tabs.

Use the PAGE+/– buttons to select the tab that you want to see.

c: Parameters

The parameters for various settings are shown in the display.

Use the ◄►▲▼ cursor buttons to select a parameter.

d: Edit cell

Some of the parameters or parameter values will be highlighted

when you use the ◄►▲▼ cursor buttons. This is called the

edit

cell

, and the highlighted item will be available for editing.

Other methods can also be used to adjust parameters that are

indicated by the following icons.

e: Popup button

If you use the cursor buttons to select a parameter indicated by

this button (making it the edit cell) and press the ENTER button,

a popup menu shows the available parameter values.

To enter a value for the parameter, use the ▲▼ cursor buttons.

f: Radio buttons

If you use the cursor buttons to select a parameter with this type

of button (i.e., making it the edit cell) and press the ENTER

button, you then can choose one of multiple options.

You can also use the cursor buttons to select a parameter (making

it the edit cell) and use the VALUE dial to select the value.

g: Toggle

If a parameter with this symbol is selected (i.e., when it is the edit

cell), pressing the ENTER button will switch the function or turn

it on/off each time you press the ENTER button.

b: Page tabs a: Mode/Page title

d: Edit cell

g: Toggle

h: Check box

c: Parameters

e: Popup button

f: Radio buttons

Introduction to the KROSS

h: Check box

By selecting a check box parameter and pressing the ENTER

button or turning the VALUE dial, you can select or clear the

check box.

You can enable or disable a parameter or function by selecting or

clearing the check box. The parameter or function is enabled if

the check box is selected, and disabled if it is cleared.

i: Category select icon

For parameters indicated by this icon, you can use the

CATEGORY dial or the VALUE dial to select the category or

number.

j: Scroll

Use this to see parameter values that cannot be shown in a single

screen. Additional parameters exist in the direction of the black

indicator.

k: Function list

The function list will appear when you press the FUNCTION

button. The functions that are shown will depend on the page

that’s selected.

The functions shown on the bottom of the dialog box are assigned

to the four buttons. (see page 3)

l: Function dialog box

When you select a function, you’ll see a dialog box where you

can adjust the settings that are needed to execute the command.

The dialog box that appears will depend on the command that you

selected. Some commands such as Solo Setting do not display a

dialog box.

* Text edit

When you select a parameter indicated by this icon and press the

ENTER button, a text edit window will appear.

In this screen you can rename text (such as the name of a

program, combination, or song). (see “Editing names” on

page 124)

* MENU (OK) button, FUNCTION (CANCEL) button

To execute a function, press the OK button. To cancel without

executing, press the CANCEL button.

* DONE button, COPY button, INSERT button

There are also buttons such as DONE, COPY, and INSERT which

perform an action when pressed, like the OK button and

CANCEL button explained in “* Function dialog box.”

h: Check box

j: Scroll

k: Function list

l: Function dialog box

Text edit icon

FUNCTION (CANCEL) button MENU (OK) button

Basic Information About the KROSS’s modes

Basic Information

About the KROSS’s modes

The KROSS has four modes

The KROSS has numerous functions that let you play and edit

programs or combinations, record and play back sequence data,

and manage media. These functions are grouped into “

modes

.”

The KROSS has four modes.

Program mode

Programs are the basic sounds of KROSS.

In Program mode, you can:

• Select and play Programs.

• Use one arpeggiator in your performance.

• Play back Drum Track patterns while you perform using

a Program.

• You can use the step sequencer to easily create drum

loop patterns. You can play a program while a drum

pattern plays back. You can also perform simultaneously

with the arpeggiator and drum track.

• Edit Programs

You can use the Tone Adjust function to easily edit the

program.

You can use the quick layer/split function to easily layer

two programs or create split sounds.

You can adjust the parameters and settings of the

oscillators, filters, amps, EGs, LFOs, effects, arpeggiator,

drum track, etc.

You can use up to five insert effects, and two master

effects.

Plus, you can create drum programs using drum kits (as

created in Global/Media mode).

Combination mode

Combinations are sets of up to 16 programs that can be played

simultaneously, letting you create sounds that are more complex

than a single Program. In Combination mode, you can:

• Select and play Combinations.

• Use multiple timbres to play arpeggio patterns generated

by two arpeggiators.

• Use one timbre for the drum track pattern, and play back

a drum pattern while you perform.

• Use the step sequencer to easily create drum loop

patterns. You can play a combination while a drum

pattern plays back. You can also perform simultaneously

with the arpeggiator and drum track.

• Use the KROSS as a 16-track multi-timbral tone

generator.

• Edit Combinations

You can use the tone adjust function to easily edit the

program of each timbre.

You can assign Programs to each of the 16 Timbres, each

with separate volume, pan, and keyboard and velocity

zones; adjust settings for effects, arpeggiator, drum track,

step sequencer.

Plus, you can use up to five insert effects, and two master

effects.

Sequencer mode

Sequencer mode lets you record, playback, and edit MIDI tracks.

You c an:

• Use the sixteen-track MIDI sequencer to record and play

back songs.

• Record a single MIDI track, one at a time, or record as

many as all sixteen tracks simultaneously. You can also

record system exclusive messages.

• Record and play back the pad sampler performance.

• Use multiple tracks to record and play back

performances generated by two arpeggiators.

• Use one track for the drum track pattern, and play back

or record a drum pattern.

• Use the step sequencer to easily create drum patterns.

• Edit songs

• Use the KROSS as a 16-part multi-timbral sound

module.

• GM/GM2 playback is also supported.

• Use the Tone Adjust function to easily edit the program

of each track.

• Use up to five insert effects, and two master effects.

Global/Media mode

Here is where you can save/load data on an SD card. You can also

adjust overall settings for the entire KROSS, and edit drum kits

and arpeggio patterns.

You c an:

• Adjust settings that affect the entire KROSS, such as

master tune and global MIDI channel.

• Create user scales

• Create drum kits using drumsamples.

• Create user arpeggio patterns.

• Set the function of the assignable pedals and assignable

buttons.

• Transmit MIDI System Exclusive data dumps.

• Save and load Programs, Combinations, MIDI Songs,

and Global setup data.

• Format the SD card.

• Export and import sequences to and from SMF (Standard

MIDI Files)

Other functions

In addition to its four modes, the KROSS provides various

functions that are convenient for performance and practice: audio

recorder, pad audio play, pad sampler, and favorites.

AUDIO RECORDER

There's an independent audio recorder that can record an audio

signal from an external mic or line input, or USB audio input, or

the audio of the program, combination, or sequencer

playback.The sequencer and audio recorder are not able to

synchronize. (see page 99)

PAD AUDIO PLAY

Using this function, audio songs that you recorded or audio files

that were imported from an external source can be assigned to the

pads and recalled easily for playback.

Introduction to the KROSS

PAD SAMPLER

Using this function, external input audio or phrases that you

perform can be recorded and saved as sample data, and assigned

to pads 1-16 for playback. Up to four samples can play back

simultaneously, while you use pad operations to play samples as

one-shot or as a loop. Control the data filer function (save and

load MIDI exclusive data).

Favorites function

You can register programs or combinations to pads 1-16 and

recall them instantly regardless of the mode you're in.

Basic Information About the KROSS’s modes

Relational diagram of the KROSS’s modes

IFX 1

IFX 5

MFX 1

MFX 2

Insert / Master Eect

TRACK 1

TRACK 8

TRACK 2

TRACK 3

TRACK 4

TRACK 5

TRACK 6

TRACK 7

PROGRAM

TRACK 9

TRACK 16

TRACK 10

TRACK 11

TRACK 12

TRACK 13

TRACK 14

TRACK 15

PROGRAM

IFX 1

IFX 5

MFX 1

MFX 2

Insert / Master Eect

TIMBRE 1

TIMBRE 8

TIMBRE 2

TIMBRE 3

TIMBRE 4

TIMBRE 5

TIMBRE 6

TIMBRE 7

PROGRAM

TIMBRE 9

TIMBRE 16

TIMBRE 10

TIMBRE 11

TIMBRE 12

TIMBRE 13

TIMBRE 14

TIMBRE 15

PROGRAM

IFX 1

IFX 5

MFX 1

MFX 2

Insert / Master Eect

MIDI TRACK 1...16

PCG / SNG / SMF

WAV

Drum Track

DRUMS PROGRAM

Step Sequencer

STEP SEQ PROGRAM

ARPEGGIO PA TTERN

Preset Pattern: Up - Random

Preload/User Pattern

OSC 1

PITCH1

FILTER1 AMP1

OSC 2

Multisample 1

Drum Kit

Multisample 2

Multisample 3

Multisample 4

PITCH2

FILTER2 AMP2

Multisample 1

Multisample 2

Multisample 3

Multisample 4

Key Assign

DRUM KIT

GLOBAL MODE

PROGRAM MODE

COMBINATION MODE

SEQUENCER MODE

DRUM TRACK PATTERN

MEDIA MODE

ARPEGGIO PATTERN

Arpeggiator

Drum Track

Step Sequencer

Arpeggiator

Preset Drum Track Pattern

Arpeggiator

FAVORITES

Audio Recorder

Drumsample 1

Drumsample 2

Drumsample 3

Drumsample 4

SAMPLER

STEP SEQ

AUDIO PLAY

SD Card

Pad Sampler

Drum Track

Step Sequencer

Pad Sampler

16 Pads

.KEP (EX-PCM)

Introduction to the KROSS

Basic operations

After you’ve turned on the KROSS, here’s how to perform basic

operations, such as selecting modes and pages.

Selecting modes

In order to use a particular function on the KROSS, you must first

select the appropriate mode.

• Press one of the front panel mode buttons to enter the

corresponding mode.

For a summary of each mode, please see the “About the

KROSS’s modes” section on page 9.

Note:

The mode that’s currently selected is shown by the mode

switch that’s lit up.

Selecting pages and tabs

One screen of displayed information is called a “page.” To access

the page you want, you can use the PAGE– and PAGE+ buttons,

or you can press the MENU button and choose from the page

menu.

• Make sure that the desired mode is selected.

For this explanation we’ll use Combination mode as an

example.

Using the PAGE+/– buttons to move between pages

• You can move between pages by pressing the PAGE+ or

PAGE– button.

Using the page menu to access different pages

The page menu shows a list of the pages and tabs within each

mode. Select the desired page and tab from this list.

1. Press the MENU button.

The page menu will appear.

The page where you were immediately before pressing

the PAGE button is indicated by a diamond-shaped

symbol to the left.

2. Press the PAGE+ button or the PAGE+ button to

select a page.

As an example here, select C-ZONE/DELAY.

3. Press the FUNCTION (TABS) button.

The “tabs of” (TABS OF) page will appear.

4. Press the PAGE+ button or the PAGE– button to

select a tab.

As an example here, select KEY ZONE.

5. Press the MENU (OK) button.

The C-ZONE/DELAY> KEY ZONE page will appear.

Note:

If you select a page from the page menu (rather than from

the “tabs of” menu), the page for the previously-selected tab will

appear.

Using the MENU button + PAGE+/- buttons to move

between pages

• Hold down the MENU button and press the PAGE+

(PAGE–) button.

In Combination mode, this lets you move in units of

pages; e.g., COMBI ↔ C-INPUT/CTRL ↔ C-Tone ADJ

↔ C-TIMBRE ↔ ... etc. Each time, the page of the most

recently selected tab will be selected.

Using the EXIT button to move between pages

• Pressing this button will take you back to the MAIN

page of the current mode. Each time you press the

button, you’ll move between pages in the following way.

Program, Combination, and Sequencer mode: the MAIN

page of each mode.

Global/Media mode: the BASIC page in Global/Media

mode  the MAIN page in the previously-selected mode

among program, conbination and sequencer.

• When a dialog box is open, this button cancels the

settings that were made in the dialog box and closes the

dialog box, just like pressing the Cancel button.

• If a popup menu is open, pressing EXIT closes the menu.

Selecting a parameter and editing the value

1. Use the ◄►▲▼ cursor buttons to select the

parameter that you want to edit.

2. If you select an edit cell, the display will be

highlighted. Edit the value.

The way that the value will change depends on the type

of parameter or object. (see “Items in the display” on

page 7)

• The value in the edit cell can be edited by using the

VALUE dial, the ENTER button, and the ▲▼ cursor

buttons.

VALUE dial

Use this dial to edit the selected parameter’s value. This control is

convenient when you want to scroll through a very long list of

selections.

COMBI button: Combination mode

PROG button: Program mode

SEQ button( ): Sequencer mode

EXIT button ( )

+ SEQ button( )

Global/Media mode

Basic Information Basic operations

ENTER button and

▲▼

cursor buttons

When you select a parameter and press the ENTER button, a

▲▼ symbol will appear beside the value ( → ), and

you can use the ▲▼ cursor buttons to increment or decrement

the value in steps of one. When you’ve specified the value, press

the ENTER button once again to confirm it. This method is

convenient when you want to make small changes.

Note:

If you decide not to change the value, press the EXIT button.

Using the keyboard to enter a note number or velocity

value

For parameters that specify a note number (such as G4 or C#2) or

a velocity value, pressing the ENTER button will cause a ▲▼

symbol to appear beside the value (see above). You can play a

key to directly enter a note number or velocity value. When

you’ve specified the value, press the ENTER button once again to

confirm it.

ENTER button

If the parameter item is a toggle, radio button, or check box, press

the ENTER button to switch the setting.

Other

CATEGORY dial, VALUE dial

Parameters indicated by (category select icon) can be edited

using the CATEGORY dial and VALUE dial to change the

category and program/combination number. The dial’s LED will

light to indicate the current category.

In Program mode you can select the program category and

number.

In Combination mode these dials have the following two

functions.

• Select the combination category and number.

• When the edit cell is a timbre program (highlighted), the

dials select the program category and number.

In Sequencer mode when the edit cell is a track program

(highlighted), the dials select the program category and number.

Compare/Undo function

Program, Combination mode

Use this when you wish to compare the edits you have made to a

program or combination’s sound with the un-edited original (i.e.,

the sound that is written into memory).

While editing a program or combination, you can turn on the

Compare function (select the check mark) to recall the settings

that were last written to that program number or combination

number. When you turn off the Compare function (remove the

check mark), you will return to the settings that you had

previously been editing.

1. While editing, turn the Compare function on (select

the check mark).

To turn this on, press the FUNCTION button to access

the function list, use the PAGE+ (▼) or PAGE– (▲)

button to select Compare, and press the MENU (OK)

button.

The sound that had been saved before you began editing

will be recalled.

2. When you turn off the Compare function (remove the

check mark), you will return to the sound that you

had previously been editing.

To turn it off, select the Compare function once again and

press the MENU (OK) button.

Note:

If you edit the settings that were recalled by turning

Compare on (i.e., the saved settings), the check mark will be

cleared, and your previously edited settings will be lost. Even if

you turn Compare on again (select the check mark), the previous

settings will not return.

Sequencer mode

In Sequencer mode, you can use the Undo function to make

“before and after” comparisons immediately after using realtime

recording or step recording to record a song, or after performing

an edit on a track.

For example, this can be used effectively when realtime-

recording a MIDI track for a song.

1. Realtime-record a MIDI track. (Take 1)

2. Once again, realtime-record on the same track.

(Take 2)

3. If you turn on the Undo function (select the check

mark), take 1 will be recalled.

4. If you turn off the Undo function (clear the check

mark), take 2 will be recalled.

5. If at step 3 you once again realtime-record on the

same track (take 3), the Compare function will now be

referencing take 1.

6. If at step 4 you once again realtime-record on the

same track (take 3), the Compare function will be

referencing take 2.

In this way, the Undo function lets you recall the previous

recording or the previous state of event editing.

Note:

If you edit while Undo is on (the check mark selected), the

check mark will be cleared. That musical data now becomes the

musical data that will be selected when Undo is off.

Global/Media mode

The Compare function is not available in Global/Media mode.

Audio recorder

When using the audio recorder, you can use Undo to return to a

previously recorded state. You can step back through multiple

takes. You can also redo. In the AUDIO RECORDER SETUP

dialog box, press the PAGE– (UNDO) button.

Pad Audio Play

As with the audio recorder, the pad audio play function also lets

you return to the previously recorded state. In the AUDIO SONG

SETUP dialog box, press the PAGE- (UNDO) button.

Pad Sampler

The compare function cannot be used with pad sampler

recording, nor when editing in the EDIT SAMPLE window.

Introduction to the KROSS

Selecting and executing functions

The functions provide commands that are specific to each page,

such as Write (save) or Copy. The available functions will depend

on the selected page.

For example, the functions in Program mode let you write (save)

the settings, or let you perform convenient editing procedures

such as copying settings between oscillators or effects, or a Sync

function that lets you edit two EGs together.

1. Press the FUNCTION button.

The function list will appear.

2. Use the PAGE+ (▼) and PAGE– (▲) buttons to select

a function, and press the MENU (OK) button.

A dialog box for the selected function will appear.

Check-type commands will not display a dialog box; their

status will be switched, and the list will close.

• If you want to close the list without selecting a

command, press the FUNCTION (CLOSE) button once

again.

3. Use the ◄►▲▼ cursor buttons to select parameters

in the dialog box, and use the VALUE dial, ENTER

button, and ▲▼ cursor buttons to enter the value.

You can use the CATEGORY dial and VALUE dial when

selecting a program or combination number in the dialog

box.

4. To execute, press the MENU (OK) button.

If you decide not to execute, press the FUNCTION

(CANCEL) button.

The dialog box will close.

Writing/saving

After editing, you should write or save your changes as necessary.

For example if you’ve edited a program, your changes will be lost

if you select another program or turn off the power. The same

applies to a combination.

Settings that you edit in Global/Media mode, songs and Favorites

will be remembered as long as the power is on, but your changes

will be lost when you turn off the power, unless you write these

changes into memory.

For more details on the Write procedure, see the following pages.

• Programs → p.122

• Combinations → p.122

• Favorites → p.54

• Global settings (GLOBAL–G-USER SCALE) → p.124

• Drum kits → p.124

• User arpeggio pattern → p.124

• User template songs → PG p.140

• For details on writing to internal memory → p.122

Please see the following pages for more information about

saving.

• Saving a MIDI song → p.65

• Saving to SD card → p.121

Note:

On the KROSS, the action of writing into internal memory is

called “Writing,” and the action of saving to an SD card device is

called “Saving.”

Assigning a name (renaming)

You can edit the name of an edited program, combination, song,

drum kit, or arpeggio pattern.

For additional details, please see “Editing names” on page 124.

Basic Information Basic operations

REALTIME CONTROLS

When you're playing a program or combination,you can use these

to adjust the sound or the effects in real time, or to make simple

edits. You can also adjust settings for external audio input and the

vocoder function, and adjust the tempo of the arpeggiator and

sequencer.

Here's how to use REALTIME CONTROLS to adjust the tempo.

1. Press the SELECT button several times to make the

TEMPO light.

Note:

The selection of the SELECT button is saved for each

program, combination, or song.

Tips:

By holding down the EXIT button ( ) and pressing

the SELECT button, you can step through the parameters in

reverse order.

2. Turn the KNOB 1 knob to adjust the tempo.

3. You can set the tap tempo by pressing the SWITCH

button. The tempo will be specified when you tap

twice, but you should tap several times for better

precision.

Note:

REALTIME CONTROLS can be used when the SELECT

LED is lit. They cannot be used when the LED is unlit.

Parameters that can be operated using REALTIME

CONTROLS

For details on each of the parameters that can be controlled, see

the parameter guide. (→ PG p.305)

TONE 1

•VELOCITY

Specifies how the velocity of your keyboard playing

affects the sound.

•CUTOFF

Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the filter. Varies the

brightness of the sound.

• RESONANCE

Adjusts the resonance level of the filter. Raising the filter

resonance level gives a distinctive character to the sound.

TONE 2

•OCTAVE

Raises or lowers the pitch of the entire keyboard in steps

of an octave. With the default setting, the pitch is lowered

one octave.

•ATTACK

Adjusts the envelope attack times of the filter and amp.

This specifies the attack time that starts at note-on.

• RELEASE

Adjusts the envelope release times of the filter and amp.

This specifies the time from note-off until the sound fades

to silence.

EFFECT

•MASTER FX

Turns the master effect on/off.

Note: This is linked with the setting of the Global/Media

mode parameter System- “Effect SW - MFX."

•INSERT FX

Controls the "Wet/Dry" balance of all insert effects.

• MFX2/REVERB

Controls the "Wet/Dry" balance of MFX2 (master effect

2).

AUDIO IN 1

• AUDIO ON/OFF

Selects whether an external audio source connected to the

MIC IN or LINE IN jack will or will not be input.

• GAIN

Adjusts the level at the input stage of the external audio

signal that's being input.

So that the sound does not change suddenly while

you're performing, the GAIN value does not change

until the position of the knob matches the current

value. Once you have turned the knob to the position

of the current value, you can adjust the value.

• MFX2/REVERB

Adjusts the send level at which the external audio signal

that's being input is sent to master effect 2.

For preload sounds, either a reverb-type or a delay-type

effect is assigned to master effect 2. Use this when you

want to apply these effects to the external audio from the

mic input.

AUDIO IN 2

• MIC/LINE

Selects the external input jack that is used.

• VOCODER

Selects a vocoder effect using the mic input, or an effect

and program settings that are appropriate for vocals.

In the VOCODER window, you can use the FUNCTION

button to directly change or adjust settings such as

AUDIO ON/OFF or GAIN for AUDIO IN 1.

• FX CONTROL

Adjusts the tonal character of the vocoder or vocal effect

that's selected by the VOCODER knob.

Tempo

This adjusts the tempo for the entire KROSS. The tempo

setting will control the following.

* Arpeggiator

* Drum Track

* Step sequencer

* Songs in Sequencer mode

* Tempo sync LFO

* Tempo sync (BPM) delay effects

•TAP

SELECT LED

Introduction to the KROSS

Sets the tempo via tap tempo. This LED will blink at

quarter-note intervals of the current tempo.

Tap tempo control is available whenever the KNOB1

knob (TEMPO) can be used.For example it cannot be

controlled during songplayback if the Sequencer

mode Tempo Mode is set to Auto. (see page 103 of

the Parameter Guide)

Note: You can use the tap tempo control function by

pressing the SWITCH (TAP) button and also by pressing

a foot switch that’s connected to the ASSIGNABLE

SWITCH jack. (page 23 and page 165, page 303 of the

Parameter Guide)

•TEMPO

Adjusts the tempo.

•ARP-GATE

Changes the duration of the arpeggio notes in real time.

Setup

Turning the power on/off

The KROSS can be powered either by an AC adapter or by

using batteries.

Connecting the AC adapter

1. Make sure that the power is turned off. Make sure

that nothing is shown on the display, and that the

LEDs are unlit.

2. Connect the DC plug of the included AC adapter to

the DC9V (power supply) jack on the KROSS’s rear

panel.

You must only use the included AC adapter. Using

any other AC adapter might cause malfunctions.

3. Connect the AC adapter to an AC outlet.

Be sure to use an AC outlet of the correct voltage for

your adapter.

4. Use the cord hook of the KROSS to fasten the AC

adapter cord so that it will not be unplugged

accidentally.

Turning the power on

1. Turn the KROSS’s VOLUME knob

all the way to the left so that the

volume is down.

If any external equipment, such as a

monitor amplifier is connected, lower

their volume as well and then turn off

their power.

2. On the rear panel of the KROSS, hold

down the power button until the power

turns on. Keep holding down the button

until the display lights up.

The display will show the model name and

software version.

With the factory settings, the auto power-off

function of the KROSS is enabled; immediately after

you start up, the following message will appear,

indicating the time until the power will turn off

automatically.

If you disable the auto power-off function, this

message is not displayed. (see “Auto power-off

function” on page 18)

3. Turn on the power of the external equipment that’s

connected to the KROSS’s OUTPUT L/MONO and R

jacks, such as a monitor amplifier.

4. Use the KROSS’s VOLUME knob and the volume

controls of your external equipment to set the volume

to a suitable level.

AC adapter

(Included)

Power button

DC9V (Power supply) jack

DC plug

Cord hook

to an AC outlet

Setup

Turning the power off

When you turn off the power, unsaved data will be

lost. Be sure to save any important data such as

edited sounds or global settings. (see page 14)

If the KROSS’s auto power-off function is enabled,

its power will automatically turn off if there has been

no user input for a certain length of time. Unsaved

data will be lost even if the power is turned off by the

auto power-off function.

1. Turn the KROSS’s VOLUME knob all the way to the

left so that the volume is lowered.

2. If external equipment such as a monitor amplifier is

connected, lower their volume and then turn off their

power before proceeding.

3. Hold down the power button of the KROSS to turn off

the power. Keep holding down the button until the

display turns off.

Never turn off the power while processing is in

progress. Turning off the power while the following

processes are in progress may damage the data in

internal memory or on the SD card.

• Writing data to internal memory (display indicates “Now

writing into internal memory”)

• Writing to an SD card (e.g., while saving in Media mode,

recording on the audio recorder, or during Export)

A small amount of electrical power is used even

when the power is off (STANDBY). If you won’t be

using the KROSS for an extended period, turn off

the power and unplug the power cord from the AC

outlet. If you’re using batteries, remove the batteries.

Auto power-off function

The KROSS has an auto power-off function that

automatically turns off the power when there is no user input

(*) for a certain length of time. With the factory settings, this

is set to four hours.

* Using the VOLUME knob is not considered to be user input.

When the power turns off, the settings you had been

editing will be lost. If you want to keep the edited

settings, you must save them first.

Changing the auto power-off setting

If you want to change the setting so that the power will not

turn off automatically, proceed as follows to disable the auto

power-off function.

1. Simultaneously press the EXIT button ( ) and

SEQ button ( ) to access the GLOBAL/MEDIA

page. (If it does not appear, press the EXIT button.)

2. Press the PAGE+ (or PAGE–) button to access the

GLOBAL> PREF 1(Preferences 1) page.

3. Use the cursor ▼▲ buttons to select the Auto Power-

Off parameter.

4. Use the VALUE dial to specify the time until the

power will turn of.

If you don’t want the auto power-off function to turn off

the power automatically, set this to Disabled.

5. Save the setting.

Press the FUNCTION button to access the function list.

Choose Write Global Setting. (If a different function is

selected, press the PAGE- button to select it.)

Press the MENU (OK) button. A confirmation message

will appear; press the MENU (OK) button once again.

The setting has now been saved.

Auto power-off warning message

When the specified length of time has elapsed without any

user input on the KROSS, a message will appear, warning

you that the auto power-off function is about to turn off the

power.

If you want to continue using the system, press the keyboard,

or a button. The Auto power-off function will be reset. If the

same specified length of time elapses with no user input, the

same message will appear again.

Auto power-off function

Turning the power on/off Using batteries

Using batteries

Batteries that can be used

Use six AA nickel-metal hydride batteries or alkaline

batteries. Zinc-carbon batteries cannot be used.

Note: Batteries are not included. You’ll need to obtain them

separately.

Do not mix new and old batteries, or batteries of

differing types. Mixing batteries in this way may

cause them to leak or burst.

Continuous operating time

Alkaline batteries will allow approximately four hours of

usage with the factory settings. Battery life will depend on

the type of batteries and the conditions of use.

Replacing the batteries

An indicator on the upper right side of the screen shows the

remaining battery capacity ( , , ). If you’re

using the AC adapter, this will indicate .

If is flashing, the batteries are almost

exhausted. Immediately save any important data, and

either install fresh batteries or switch to using the AC

adapter.

If the batteries are exhausted, remove them

immediately. Leaving exhausted batteries installed may

cause malfunctions such as battery leakage. You should

also remove the batteries if you won’t be using the unit

for an extended period of time.

Note: If the batteries run low, you can plug in the AC

adapter and continue operation without having to power-off.

Note: If you turn on the power with an SD card already

inserted, there will be some cases in which the data from the

SD card is read as a background process after the unit has

started. While the data is being read, some functions will be

in a paused state, and will be unavailable. During this time,

the SD card access indicator ( ) blinks in a position that

overlaps with the remaining battery capacity indicator or the

AC adapter indicator. For details, refer to "Automatic SD

card loading at start-up" (→ p.25).

Installing batteries

1. Remove the battery compartment cover.

KROSS 61-key: The battery compartment is located on

the bottom panel.

When turning the unit upside down, place it on a

blanket or similar material to prevent damage to the

knobs and dials.

While pressing the cover latch, pull it upward and remove

it.

KROSS 88-key: While pressing the ||| area of the

cover(a.), slide it diagonally upward (b.), and open the

battery compartment (c.).

Note: The battery compartment cover is located on the

left side of the front panel.

Note: You can use the same procedure to open the storage

compartment for small items that is located at the

opposite side from the battery compartment.

The battery compartment cover does not detach. Do

not apply excessive force to the battery compartment

cover.

2. Install batteries.

When inserting the batteries, be sure to observe the

correct polarity (“+” and “–”). Place the “–” end of

each battery against the tip of the spring, and press it

into place.

KROSS 61-key

KROSS 88-key

3. Close the battery compartment cover.

Close the cover by reversing the steps you took to remove

it.

Spare battery compartment

Setup

In order for the remaining battery amount to be

displayed correctly, you must set the Global/Media

mode GLOBAL> PREF 1(Preferences 1) page

Battery Type setting to specify the type of battery

that you’re using.

Specifying the type of batteries you installed

After you’ve installed the batteries, turn on the power and

specify the type of batteries you’re using.

1. In the GLOBAL>PREF 1 (Preferences 1) page, select

the Battery Type parameter.

Perform steps 1–3 of “Changing the auto power-off

setting” on page 18.

2. Press the ENTER button to switch the setting.

Alkaline batteries: Alkaline

Nickel-metal hydride batteries: Ni-MH

3. Save the setting.

Press the FUNCTION button, and in the function list

choose Write Global Setting. (If a different function is

selected, press the PAGE– button to select it.)

Press the MENU (OK) button. A confirmation message

will appear; press the MENU (OK) button once again.

The setting has now been saved.

Connections Audio connections

Connections

Connections must be made with the power turned off.

Please be aware that careless usage may damage your speaker system or cause other malfunctions.

Audio connections

Connecting your output devices

The KROSS does not contain built-in speakers. In order to

hear the sound of your performance, you’ll need to connect

other audio equipment such as a monitor amplifier, a mixer,

a stereo set or headphones.

Connecting audio equipment

The KROSS’s audio output is designed to produce a

signal level that is higher than consumer audio

equipment such as CD players. For this reason,

performing at high a volume may damage your

speakers or equipment. Please use caution when

adjusting the volume.

1. Minimize the volume of all connected equipment, and

turn off the power.

2. Connect the KROSS’s OUTPUT L/MONO and R

jacks to the input jacks of your monitor amplifier or

mixer.

Note: If you connect only the L/MONO jack, the L and R

sound will be mixed for mono output. In order to take full

advantage of the KROSS’s capabilities, we recommend

that you listen in stereo.

If you’re playing back through your stereo audio system

or an audio player that has external input connectors,

connect the KROSS to the jacks that are marked LINE

IN, AUX IN, or external input. (You might need to obtain

the appropriate adapter plug or conversion cable.)

Connecting headphones

Using headphones at high volume for an extended

time may cause hearing damage. Please avoid

excessively high volume levels.

1. Connect the stereo mini-plug

of your headphones to the

KROSS’s Headphone jack.

2. Use the VOLUME knob to

adjust the headphone

volume.

The KROSS’s Headphone jack

will output the same signal as

the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks.

The output from the OUTPUT jack is not turned off even

if headphones are connected to the Headphone jack.

Connecting your input devices

You can sing while applying the built-in effects of the

KROSS to your mic, or connect an audio player and perform

along with the playback.

You can also use the audio recorder or pad sampler to record

the audio input.Alternatively, you can record just the

external audio input without mixing-in the performance of

the KROSS. For example if you're rehearsing in the studio,

you could record only the band's performance while you

play the KROSS.(→ p.22)

When connecting an input device, use the REALTIME

CONTROLS section's SELECT button to select AUDIO IN

1, and press the SWITCH button (ON/OFF) to turn the input

off (unlit). After you have connected the input device, once

again press the SWITCH button (ON/OFF) to turn the input

on (lit).

If you're not using the MIC IN or LINE IN jack, use

the REALTIME CONTROLS section's SELECT

button to select AUDIO IN 1, and press the

SWITCH button (ON/OFF) to turn the input off

(unlit).

Connecting a mic

1. Make sure that the SWITCH button LED (ON/OFF)

is off (unlit) in the AUDIO IN 1 row of the

REALTIME CONTROLS section.

2. Turn the VOLUME knob of the KROSS all the way to

the left, minimizing the volume.

AC adapter

(Included)

DC plug

to an AC outlet

DAMPER

ASSIGNABLE

PEDAL

ASSIGNABLE

SWITCH

SD card

MIDI keyboard

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI cable

USB cable

Audio player, etc.

Mic

Monitor Amplier, etc.

INPUT

Headphones

Computer

Pedal connections etc.

Connections to MIDI equipment

Connections to computers

Insert an SD card

Connect output devices

Connect input devices

SD card slot

USB B

MIDI OUT, IN

AUDIO OUTPUT

R, L/MONO

LINE IN, MIC IN

ASSIGNABLE

DAMPER, SWITCH, PEDAL

Headphones

KROSS-88key

Setup

3. Connect a dynamic mic to the MIC IN jack.

Note: This jack does not support condenser mics or other

mics that require phantom power or plug-in power. Such

types of mic must be connected via a mic amp.

Connecting a guitar

Connect your guitar to the MIC IN jack. Please see the

“Connecting a mic” section above.

Note: Most guitars and basses (i.e., equipped with passive

pickups that do not have a preamp) produce a low output

level that cannot be recorded at a satisfactory volume or

quality. Route such instruments through a preamp or effect

unit before connecting them to the KROSS. If the output of

the preamp or effect unit is too high, and you cannot set an

appropriate input level, adjust the output level of the preamp

or effect unit. If your instrument has active-type pickups

with a built-in preamp, simply connect it directly.

Connecting an audio player

An audio player or other stereo line input source can be

connected to the LINE IN jack.

1. Make sure that the SWITCH button LED (ON/OFF)

is off (unlit) in the AUDIO IN 1 row of the

REALTIME CONTROLS section.

2. Turn the VOLUME knob of the KROSS all the way to

the left, minimizing the volume.

3. Connect your audio player to the LINE IN jack.

Selecting the audio input

Specify and enable the audio input to which you connected

your mic, guitar, or audio player as described above.

Note: It's not possible to input audio via both the LINE IN

jack and MIC IN jack simultaneously.

1. In REALTIME CONTROLS, use the SELECT button

to select AUDIO IN 2.

2. In REALTIME CONTROL, use the SWITCH button

to select either MIC (LED lit) or LINE (LED unlit).

Only the selected input is enabled.

Adjusting the audio input

1. Select the input. (“Selecting the audio input” on

page 22)

2. Use the GAIN to adjust the level of the external audio

signal. In REALTIME CONTROLS, use the SELECT

button to select AUDIO IN 1, and use the KNOB 1

knob to adjust the volume of the input signal.

So that the sound does not change suddenly while

you're performing, the GAIN value does not change

until the position of the knob matches the current

value. Once you have turned the knob to the position

of the current value, you can adjust the value.

3. If you want to change the amount of effect that is

applied, adjust MFX2/REVERB in the AUDIO IN 1

row of the REALTIME CONTROLS section.

Operating the KNOB 2 knob adjusts the amount that

is sent to the MFX2 effect.

Tip: Although it will depend on the settings of the

program or combination, Send2 typically applies reverb.

For more about effect-related settings, see “Effect

settings for audio input” on page 71.

4. To specify the pan, or the amount that is sent to the

MFX1 effect, adjust settings in the AUDIO IN -

QUICK SETTING- dialog box. If you press the

FUNCTION button while the popup screen is shown

during steps 2 and 3, the AUDIO IN -QUICK

SETTING- dialog box appears.

Note: The Global setting (G-SET) dialog box is shown

above. These input settings are used by the entire

KROSS. (see “Global audio input settings (G-SET) and

individual settings”)

5. By setting the Direct Send parameter, you can record

just the external audio input from a mic connected to

the MIC IN jack, without recording the sound of the

KROSS's performance. For example if you're

rehearsing in the studio, you could record only the

band's performance while you play the KROSS.

Direct Send off: The audio input and the KROSS's

performance are mixed and recorded.

Direct Send on: Only the audio input is recorded. The

sound of the KROSS's performance is not mixed. (In this

case, the audio input sound is not output from audio out.)

6. To save the settings, press the PAGE+ (WRITE G-

SET) button. A dialog box will appear; press the

MENU (OK) button to save the settings.

Note: The explanation above is the procedure for saving

Global settings (G-SET). (see “Global audio input

settings (G-SET) and individual settings”)

7. Press the MENU (DONE) button to return to the page

you were in prior to the dialog box.

Global audio input settings (G-SET) and individual

settings

The audio input of the KROSS is affected by settings that are

shared by the entire instrument (Global settings / G-SET)

and by individual settings that are made independently for

each program, combination, or MIDI song.

With the factory settings, the programs, combinations, and

MIDI songs are set to use G-SET by default. For some

sounds, individual settings have been made for the vocoder

sound or vocal effect. By opening the AUDIO IN -QUICK

SETTING- dialog box, you can check whether that program

or combination uses the global settings (G-SET) or its own

individual settings.

Tip: Sounds with individual settings are stored in the

DRUM/SFX category.

Direct Send

Connections Connecting foot controllers

The AUDIO IN -QUICK SETTING- dialog box can be

opened from the FUNCTION (QUICK SETTING) button

shown in the lower left when you operate an audio-related

parameter in REALTIME CONTROLS.

In the upper left, [G-SET], [PROG] (or [COMBI], [SEQ])

indicate whether the global settings (G-SET) or the

individual settings are specified.

Global setting (G-SET)

Individual setting (PROG, COMBI, SEQ)

The global setting dialog box contains a PAGE+ (WRITE G-

SET) button; by pressing this button you can save the edited

settings as global settings. For individual settings, press the

MENU (DONE) button to close the dialog box, and use the

appropriate Write function to save the settings. For details on

how to save, please see “Writing a Program or Combination”

on page 122.

Only in the case of input gain (Gain), the global

setting (G-SET) and the individual setting are

shared. Use the global setting (G-SET) to save the

setting. Although you can edit this in the AUDIO IN

page or the QUICK SETTING dialog box of each

mode, you can’t save it as an individual setting

(PROG, COMBI, SEQ).

To create individual settings

In addition to using the AUDIO IN -QUICK SETTING-

dialog box, you can also adjust this setting in the INPUT/

CTRL> AUDIO IN page of each mode. For a program,

combination, or MIDI song that uses G-SET, the upper left

of the screen will show the G-SET indication selected. By

clearing this selection you can adjust individual settings.

Connecting foot controllers

If you connect an optional damper pedal, foot switch, or foot

pedal, you’ll be able to control the KROSS using your feet.

Connecting a damper pedal

When you press the damper pedal, the notes you’ve pressed

will be sustained so that they will continue even after you

take your hands off the keyboard. This is also called a

sustain pedal; it has the same function as the damper pedal of

an acoustic piano.

If the optional Korg DS-1H damper is connected, you’ll be

able to take advantage of the “half-damper” effect, where the

depth that you press the pedal will vary the amount of

damper that’s applied. If any other type of pedal is

connected, it will function as a damper switch.

In Combination or Sequencer mode, you can also select

settings so that the damper will be applied to some sounds

but not to other sounds.

1. Connect a Korg DS-1H damper pedal to the

DAMPER jack.

2. Set the polarity of the switch.

In the G-INPUT/CTRL> FOOT page, set the Damper

Polarity parameter.

If you’re using the DS-1H, choose the (–) KORG

Standard setting. With the factory settings, (–) KORG

Standard is selected. If the operation is inverted when you

use a foot switch other than the DS-1H, simply set the

polarity to the (+) setting.

Note: The half-damper sensitivity is adjusted to a standard

value when the KROSS is shipped from the factory. If the

half-damper pedal you’re using does not respond

appropriately, please adjust the sensitivity. (see page 177 of

the Parameter Guide)

Connecting a foot switch

This lets you use a simple foot switch, such as the Korg PS-1

or PS-3, as an assignable controller. The foot switch can

perform a wide variety of functions, such as:

• Selecting programs or favorites

• An assignable source for modulating sounds and effects

• Portamento on/off

• Sequencer start/stop or punch in/out

• Starting, pausing, and stopping audio recorder playback

or recording

•Tap Tempo

• Arpeggiator on/off

• Switch the Drum Track on/off

• Step sequencer RUN on/off

• Use various KROSS controls (modulation wheel, SW1/

SW2, etc.)

This button will always function in the same way regardless

of the Program, Combination, or Song you’ve selected. You

can assign the function in the Global/Media mode.

Setup

Using a foot switch to select Programs

You can select programs by using a foot switch connected to

the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack. By assigning the

appropriate function, you can increment or decrement the

program number in steps of one.

This lets you change Programs without using your hands–

which is great for quick Program changes in live

performance situations.

There are two ways of doing this: by assigning the foot

switch to Program Up/Down, or to Value Inc/Dec. Each of

these is suited to a particular application, as described below.

• Program Up/Down: When performing with the usual

MAIN page or the favorites list open

• VALUE Inc/Dec: When performing with the sound

select list open

Assigning the foot switch to Program Up/Down

Assigning the foot switch to Program Up or Program Down

lets you directly control Program changes from the foot

switch. For most situations, this is the more straightforward

method.

To set this up:

1. Connect a foot switch to the rear-panel

ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack.

Use an optional PS-1/PS-3 pedal switch.

2. Access the G-INPUT/CTRL> FOOT page.

Proceed as follows.

Hold down the EXIT button ( ) and press the

SEQ button ( ) to enter the GLOBAL/MEDIA

mode.

Press the MENU button to access the function list. Use

the PAGE+ (▼) and PAGE– (▲) buttons to select G-

INPUT/CTRL, and press the MENU (OK) button.

Use the PAGE+ (▼) and PAGE– (▲) buttons to select

the G-INPUT/CTRL> Foot page, and press the MENU

(OK) button.

3. Set “Foot Switch Assign” to either Program Up or

Program Down.

If you choose Program Up, the next program number up

will be selected each time you press the foot switch.

If you choose Program Down, the next program number

down will be selected each time you press the foot

switch.

Use the cursor ▲▼ buttons to select Foot Switch Assign.

Press the ENTER button to access the list, and use the

cursor ▲▼ buttons to select Program Up or Program

Down. Press the ENTER button to confirm your choice.

4. Set the “Foot Switch Polarity” to match the polarity of

the pedal you’ve connected.

If you’ve connected the optional PS-1 or PS-3 pedal,

choose (–) KORG Standard. Use the cursor ▼ button to

select the parameter, and press the ENTER button. The

setting will alternate on/off each time you press the

button.

Now, the foot switch will step through the Programs, one

by one.

5. If you want to preserve this setting even when the

power is turned off, be sure to Write the data. (see

page 124)

6. Press the PROG button to enter PROG> MAIN, and

press the foot switch to change the Program.

Note: This setting also works in the same way for selecting

combinations or favorites.

Note: With the Program Up/Down method, you can’t switch

programs while the sound select list is open. Use the method

explained below in “Assigning the foot switch to Value Inc/

Dec”.

Assigning the foot switch to Value Inc/Dec

This lets you use the Assignable Foot Switch to duplicate the

functions of the VALUE dial.

This method is convenient if you want to open the Sound

select list and switch programs while viewing the program or

combination menu.

1. Follow steps 1–2 under “Assigning the foot switch to

Program Up/Down,” above.

2. At the top of the page, set the Foot Switch Assign

parameter to Value Inc (or Value Dec).

3. Now, the foot switch will act just like you’re turning

the VALUE dial.

Note: The foot switch will work like this for the entire

KROSS–not just when the Sound select list is open.

Connecting a foot pedal

If you connect an optional EXP-2 foot controller or XVP-10/

XVP-20 expression/volume pedal to the ASSIGNABLE

PEDAL jack, you can use it to apply modulation to sounds

or effects, or to adjust the overall volume.

This pedal will always function in the same way regardless

of the Program, Combination, or Song you’ve selected. You

can assign the function in the Global/Media mode.

Like the Assignable Foot Switch, described above, the Foot

Pedal can be used for many different functions, including:

• Master Volume

• Channel Volume, Pan, or Expression

• Assignable sound modulation, as several different AMS

or Dmod sources

• Effects Send level control

• Use various KROSS controls (Modulation wheel, etc.)

1. Connect an optional XVP-10, XVP-20 or EXP-2 to the

ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jacks.

2. Use the Foot Pedal Assign parameter (G-INPUT/

CTRL> FOOT page) to specify the function that will

be controlled by the foot pedal.

Adjust settings as explained in “Assigning the foot switch

to Program Up/Down”.

Connections Using an SD card

Using an SD card

You can use an SD card to save or load programs,

combinations, and song data, and also for audio recording

and the pad sampler function.

Types of SD card you can use

SD card specifications

SD memory cards up to 2GB and SDHC memory cards up to

32GB are supported.

SDXC memory cards are not supported.

MS-DOS format FAT16 or FAT32 are supported.

SD card is not included. You will need to purchase it

separately.

Formatting SD card

Some consumer electronics products that use SD cards

utilize their own proprietary format method. Before using an

SD card with the KROSS, you must format it on the

KROSS. (see page 129)

Inserting/removing an SD card

Inserting an SD card

• Insert an SD card in the SD card slot.

With the card label facing upward, insert the connector

end of the card into the SD card slot and press it in until

you hear a click.

Make sure that the card is oriented correctly when

you insert it. Forcing it in the wrong direction may

damage the slot or the card, and the data may be lost.

Removing an SD card

During loading, saving, formatting, audio recorder

operation, or MIDI data dump reception, you must

never remove the SD card from the slot or insert it in

the slot. Doing so may cause the SD card or the

internal data to be damaged.

• Press the card inward; you will hear a click, and the card

will partially pop out, allowing you to pull it completely out.

Please see the owner’s manual included with your card,

and observe the guidelines for handling and use.

About the write protect setting of an SD card

SD cards have a write protect switch that prevents the data

from being overwritten accidentally and lost. If a card is

protected, you can’t save or delete data on it, use it to record

with the audio recorder, or format the card.

If you need to perform these procedures, you must first set

the switch to its original position.

Automatic SD card loading at start-up

If the unit is powered-on with an SD card containing audio

data already inserted, data loading may continue

automatically after start-up in some cases. During this time,

there are no restrictions on playing the keyboard or

performing most operations, but functions that access the SD

card will be in a paused state. The SD card access indicator

( ) will blink in a position that overlaps with the

remaining battery capacity indicator or the AC adapter

indicator.

At this time, the AUDIO REC, SAMPLER ACTIVE/HOLD,

and AUDIO PLAY ACTIVE buttons will be disabled; if you

press these buttons, the message “SD card busy Please

wait.” is displayed. Likewise, the “SD card busy Please

wait.” message is displayed if you access the MEDIA page,

and that page will be unavailable.

Similarly, GLOBAL - FUNCTION - “Load Preload/Demo

Data” and “Update System Software” will also be

unavailable. To use these functions, wait until the SD card

access indicator has stopped blinking.

Connecting the KROSS to a computer

USB connection

The KROSS provides both MIDI connectors and USB port

as standard equipment. By connecting the KROSS to your

computer via USB, you can use it as a controller and MIDI

sound module for your DAW software with single cable

convenience; and with out the need for a MIDI interface.

By using the dedicated editor, you can edit some of the

parameters of the KROSS from your computer as though it

were a software plug-in.

Before you connect the KROSS to your computer

via USB, you must install the KORG USB-MIDI

driver on your computer.

About the software

The latest version of the KORG USB-MIDI driver and the

KROSS Editor/Plug-in Editor can be downloaded from the

Korg website. (http://www.korg.com/)

Make connections as follows.

1. From the Korg website, download the KORG USB-

MIDI driver.

2. Install the driver as described in the documents that

accompany it.

Note: For audio, the KROSS uses the standard USB

audio driver that is built into Windows or Mac OS, so you

don't need to install the audio driver separately.

3. Power-on the KROSS.

4. Connect the KROSS's USB B port to a USB port of

your computer.

When the KROSS is connected to the computer, the

computer detects the KROSS as a USB MIDI device and

a USB audio device.

SD card slot

SD card

Setup

Connecting via the MIDI connectors

You can connect the KROSS to your computer via MIDI by

using a commercially available MIDI interface.

Note: For more about MIDI interfaces, please see the

owner’s manual of the MIDI interface that you’re using.

Some USB-MIDI interfaces may be unable to

transmit or receive the KROSS’s MIDI exclusive

messages.

Connecting MIDI devices

By connecting the KROSS’s MIDI connectors to an external

MIDI device you can transfer sound settings and

performance data such as note messages between your

external MIDI device and the KROSS.

About MIDI

MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, and is

a world-wide standard for exchanging various types of

musical data between electronic musical instruments and

computers. When MIDI cables are used to connect two or

more MIDI devices, performance data can be exchanged

between the devices, even if they were made by different

manufacturers.

Controlling an external MIDI tone generator

from KROSS

If you want to use the KROSS’s keyboard, chord trigger

switches and other controllers, sequencer, and arpeggiator to

play or control an external MIDI sound module, use a MIDI

cable to connect the KROSS’s MIDI OUT connector to the

MIDI IN connector of your external MIDI sound module.

Controlling KROSS’s tone generator from an

external MIDI device

When you wish to play or control the KROSS’s tone

generator from an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer etc.,

use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT connector of the

external MIDI device to the MIDI IN connector of KROSS.

Controlling two or more external MIDI tone

generators from the KROSS

You can also use a MIDI patch bay to control multiple MIDI

devices.

KROSS

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI keyboard

KROSS

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI keyboard

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI keyboard

MIDI tone generator

MIDI

patch bay

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

KROSS

Playing and editing Programs

About the KROSS’s Programs

Programs are the basic sounds of the KROSS; you can play

and edit them in Program mode.

You can play them by themselves, layer them together in

Combinations, or play a different Program on each of the 16

MIDI tracks, either from the internal sequencer or from

external computer-based sequencers.

This section of the manual takes a quick look at playing

Programs, including tours of the front-panel controllers and

basic editing techniques.

Playing Programs

Selecting Programs

1. Press the PROG button. (LED lit)

You’ll enter Program mode.

Access the PROG> MAIN page. The upper line of the

display shows the page that you’re on. If a different page

is shown, press the EXIT button several times to access

the PROG MAIN page.

Tip: In the PROG> MAIN page, you can also select

programs by using the cursor buttons ▲▼ or the VALUE

dial.

2. Turn the CATEGORY dial to select the category of

program that you want to play.

The sound select list will appear.

Tip: The sound select list will also appear when you press

the ENTER button.

You can also use the cursor buttons ◄► to switch

categories.

3. Turn the VALUE dial to select the program that you

want to play.

Play the keyboard to hear the sound.

Tip: You can also select programs by using the cursor

buttons ▲▼ or the PAGE-(▲)PAGE+(▼) buttons.

4. To return to the MAIN page, press the MENU button

or the ENTER button to close the menu.

When you press the FUNCTION button or the EXIT

button, your selection will be discarded and you’ll return

to the program where you were before opening the list.

Other ways to select programs

In addition to using the controls on the KROSS’s front panel,

you can select programs in the following ways.

• Using a connected foot switch (see page 24)

• Receiving a MIDI program change (from an external

MIDI sequencer or MIDI controller)

• Selecting a program that you’ve registered in Favorites

(see page 53)

• Selecting a VOCODER or other program that's

optimized for use with a mic input by the REALTIME

CONTROLS. (see page 15)

3 3

Mode, page name Tabs Tempo Power supply

Category icon

(Bank USER icon)

Program name

SW control information

Category type: Program number (bank number)

Playing and editing Programs

Program categories and numbers

The sounds of the KROSS are organized by type into

categories; within each category, an index number is

assigned to each sound. All programs are also assigned a

bank and program number that are used to recall that

program via MIDI.

Note: Depending on the bank, there are limitations on where

a program can be saved. For details, please see “Bank

numbers and conditions for saving” on page 121.

Category and index number

Index number

With the factory settings, the 768 preload programs of banks

A–F, the 256 GM2 preset programs of the GM banks (GM–

g(d)), and the 9 GM2 preset drum programs are organized

into the PIANO–DRUM/SFX categories. Within each

category, the programs are assigned an index number

starting with 000.

The 512 initialized programs of bank UA000...UD127 are

assigned to the USER category.

Category

Combination sounds are organized into the 12 categories that

are listed in the table above. A combination category icon is

shown on the upper left side of the display. The [USER]

category icon is shown at the left of the PIANO–DRUM/

SFX icon.

Bank number

The bank number indication shows the number used for

MIDI transmission and reception. Since the conditions for

saving will differ depending on the bank, this provides a

helpful guide. For more about banks, please see “Bank

numbers and conditions for saving” on page 121.

For details on combinations, please see the separate “Voice

Name List.”

Timbre icon information

The lower line shows icons indicating the category of the

timbre, the timbre used by the arpeggiator, and the timbre

used by the step sequencer.

Using controllers to modify the

sound

In addition to using the keyboard, the KROSS lets you

control the sound by using the pitch bend wheel, modulation

wheel, SW1 and SW2 buttons, damper pedal, and foot

switch or foot pedal.

These controls let you modify the tone, pitch, volume,

effects, etc. in realtime as you play.

• Pitch bend wheel, modulation wheel, SW1, SW2 buttons

→ p.1

• Damper pedal, foot switch/pedal → p.23

• REALTIME CONTROLS→ p.15

Performing with the arpeggiator,

drum track or step sequencer

Based on the note data that it receives from the keyboard or

from the MIDI IN connector, the arpeggiator can generate an

arpeggio (broken chord), or produce a wide variety of

phrases and patterns that are appropriate for the sound of the

selected program, such as guitar or keyboard backing riffs,

bass phrases, or drum patterns. A combination lets you use

two arpeggiators. For more about the arpeggiator, please see

page 73.

The Drum Track plays a variety of drum patterns using the

drum program that you’ve assigned to the desired timbre.

For more about the Drum Track, please see page 83.

The step sequencer is a function that lets you create and play

drum patterns in a way that’s similar to the Drum Track. You

can create and play drum patterns by turning on/off pads 1–

16 located on the right side of the front panel. For more

about the step sequencer, please see page 89. The step

sequencer is assigned to timbre 16.

You can play a combination along with an accompaniment

provided by the Drum Track and the step sequencer.

Arpeggiated phrases, the Drum Track, and the step

sequencer pattern can all be synchronized, and you can also

play along with them.

Category Index number (bank number)

PIANO 000 (A000)...036 (A036)

E.PIANO 000 (A037)...032 (A069)

ORGAN 000 (A070)...021 (A091)

BELL 000 (A092)...018 (A110)

STRINGS 000 (A111)...036 (B019)

BRASS 000 (B020)...019 (B039)

SYNTH LEAD 000 (B040)...061 (B101)

SYNTH PAD 000 (B102)...059 (C033)

GUITAR 000 (C034)...025 (C059)

BASS 000 (C060)...060 (C120)

DRUM/SFX 000 (C121)...006 (C127)

USER 000...511 (UA000...UD127)

Editing a combination Summary of the edit pages

Editing a combination

You can edit any of the Combinations that were shipped with

the KROSS. You can create your own combinations by

editing a preloaded combination, or by starting from an

initialized combination.

A combination has sixteen timbres; you can assign a

program to each timbre and specify its volume and pan, the

key range where the program will sound, and how its sound

will be routed to the effects. You can create simple setups

such as detuned sounds, split, or layers, or highly complex

orchestra-like setups.

Note: If a program you edit in Combination mode is used in

Program mode, that program will sound according to its

edited state.

Summary of the edit pages

To perform detailed editing, you’ll need to access an edit

page in the display.

For details on how to access each mode and page, please see

“Basic operations” on page 12.

Page Tabs Main content

COMBI

MAIN Select and play a combination

PROG

Select a program for each timbre and

set its status

MIXER Timbre volume, pan, and mute settings

ARP Arpeggiator easy editing

C-INPUT/

CTRL

AUDIO IN External audio input settings

CONTROLLERS

SW1 and 2 function settings and

tempo setting

C-TONE

ADJ

TONE ADJUST Tone Adjust settings for each timbre

EG ADJUST EG (ADSR) settings for each timbre

C-TIMBRE

MIDI MIDI channel settings for each timbre

OSC OSC settings for each timbre

PITCH Pitch settings for each timbre

SCALE Scale selection

C-ZONE/

DELAY

KEY ZONE Key zone settings for each timbre

VEL ZONE Velocity zone settings for each timbre

DELAY Delay time settings for each timbre

Parameters

Timbre2

Timbre3

Timbre16

Timbre4

Timbre1

Parameters

Program

OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

Master

Eects

1, 2

Insert

Eects

1…5

Step Sequencer Arpeggiator

Timbre

Insert Eects

Master Eects

FX Control Bus

Routing:

DrumTrack

Tone Adjust

Controllers

The structure of a combination, and the related pages

C-FILTER

MIDI transmit/receive filter settings for

each timbre

C-ARP

ASSIGN

Arpeggiator assignments to each

timbre

A Arpeggiator A settings

B Arpeggiator B settings

SCAN ZONE

Specifies the range in which the

arpeggiator operates

C-DRUM

TRACK

PAT TER N

Drum Track pattern selection and

trigger region settings

CHANNEL

Drum Track input/output MIDI channel

settings

C-STEP

SEQ

BASIC

Step sequencer program selection and

length settings

EDIT Step on/off entry

INST Instrument settings

MOD

Step sequencer settings such as accent

and swing

C-FX

ROUTING

BUS

Bus assignments from each timbre to

the insert effects

SEND

Send amounts from each timbre to the

master effects

IFX

Insert effect type selection and chain

settings

MIXER Post-insert effect routing settings

C-IFX

IFX1

Insert effect 1–5 settings

IFX2

IFX3

IFX4

IFX5

C-MFX

SETUP

Master effect type selection and chain

settings

MFX1

Master effect 1 and 2 settings

MFX2

Page Tabs Main content

Playing and editing Combinations

A suggested approach for editing

First select the program that each timbre will use, and set

each timbre’s MIDI channel to Gch (global MIDI channel)

and its Status to INT so that it can be played from the

keyboard.

Next, create any desired keyboard or velocity switch, layers,

or crossfades between the different Timbres.

After this, adjust the volumes of the Timbres, and set up any

other Timbre parameters as desired.

To add finishing touches to the sound, set up the Insert, and

Master Effect as desired. These effects can be different from

those associated with the individual Programs in Program

mode, if desired.

In addition, you can make arpeggiator and drum track

settings and controller settings to create the finished

Combination.

Note: You can use a function to copy effect and arpeggiator

settings from a program. (see page 96 of the Parameter

Guide)

Soloing a timbre

You can use the COMBI> PROG page Solo Setting function

to hear the sound of an individual timbre. (see page 32)

Comparing with the sound before

you started editing

Using COMPARE

When you’re in the process of editing a sound, pressing the

COMPARE button will recall the saved version of the sound,

as it was before you started editing.

For details, please see “Compare/Undo function” on

page 13.

Changing the program of each

timbre

Changing the Programs that are assigned to timbres (1–16) is

a quick way to dramatically alter the sound of the

Combination.

1. Access the COMBI> PROG page.

Press the PAGE+ or PAGE- button to select the page.

2. Press the cursor button ▼ to choose category/timbre

program select (it will be highlighted).

3. Use the cursor buttons ◄► to select the timbre whose

program you want to switch.

4. Turn the CATEGORY dial to select a category.

5. Turn the VALUE dial.

6. Press the MENU (OK) button or the ENTER button

to confirm your choice.

You can also switch programs by receiving MIDI

program changes from a connected external MIDI

device. (see page 316 of the Parameter Guide)

To select the timbre program via MIDI program change

the timbre’s status must be set to “INT.”

Adjusting the mix

Adjusting the volume of each timbre

1. Access the COMBI> MIXER page.

Press the PAGE+ or PAGE– button to select the page.

In this page you can view and edit the pan and volume of

timbres 1–16.

2. Press the cursor button ▼ to choose Volume (it will be

highlighted).

3. Use the cursor buttons ◄► to select the timbre whose

volume you want to adjust

4. Use the VALUE dial etc. to adjust the setting.

Note: If you check Hold Balance function, moving any one

of the volume sliders (volume values) will cause the volume

of the other timbres to change as well, maintaining the

relative volume balance between timbres 1–16. This is a

convenient way to adjust the overall volume.

Adjusting the panning of each timbre

1. Access the COMBI> MIXER page.

2. Use the cursor buttons ▲▼ to choose Pan (it will be

highlighted).

3. Use the cursor buttons ◄► to select the timbre whose

pan you want to adjust

4. Use the VALUE dial etc. to adjust the setting.

Note: Timbre pan interacts with the pan stored in the

Program. A setting of C064 reproduces the Program’s

oscillator pan settings. Adjusting the Timbre Pan will move

the sound to left or right while preserving the pan

relationship between the oscillators. A setting of L001 is far

left, and R127 is far right.

Timbre number

Category/combination select

Category/timbre program select

Active timbre

STEP(Step sequencer on/o)

SMP(Pad sampler on/o)

Editing a combination Using the Tone Adjust and EG Adjust functions

Using the Tone Adjust and EG Adjust

functions

The Tone Adjust function is an easy way to adjust the sound

of each timbre.

In the C-TONE ADJ> TONE ADJUST page you can adjust

parameters such as the cutoff and resonance; in the C-TONE

ADJ> EG ADJUST page you can adjust the attack time and

release time.

These adjustments will not affect the original program or the

sound of programs that are used by other combinations.

1. Access the C-TONE ADJ> TONE ADJUST page or

the EG ADJUST page.

Press the MENU button to access the page menu. Use

PAGE + (▼) and PAGE– (▲) to select “C-TONE ADJ,”

and press the MENU (OK) button.

Press the PAGE+ or PAGE– button to select the page.

2. Use the cursor buttons ◄► to select the timbre whose

sound you want to adjust

3. Use the cursor buttons ▲▼ to select the sound

parameter that you want to edit.

4. Use the VALUE dial etc. to edit the value.

For details on these parameters, please see page 31.

Saving a Combination you’ve edited

After you’ve edited a combination, you must save it if you

want to keep the changes you’ve made. If you re-select the

combination or turn off the power before saving, your edits

will be lost.

For details, please see “Writing a Program or Combination”

on page 122.

You can also save combinations on an SD card as PCG files.

For more details, please see “Saving to SD card” on

page 125.

Using REALTIME CONTROLS to adjust

the sound or effects

You can use the realtime controls to edit in a variety of ways.

For example, you can modify the cutoff or resonance.

You can also change the effect depth, or modify the phrase

that's generated by the arpeggiator. (→ p.32)

Note: In Combination mode, the sound edited by the TONE

1, TONE 2, or EFFECT rows of parameters that you select

using the realtime control section's SELECT button cannot

be saved. If you want to save the sound, use the equivalent

parameters of the Tone Adjust or EG Adjust functions.

Layers, Splits, and Velocity Switches

Within a Combination, you can use note range and the

velocity level to define the “zone” where a specific timbre

will play.

The Programs assigned to each Timbre can be played in

three ways: as part of a layer, a split, or a velocity switch. A

Combination can be set to use any one of these methods or to

use two or more of these methods simultaneously.

Tip: In Program mode it’s easy to make layer or split settings

for two programs. (see “Quick Layer/Split function” on

page 29)

Layer

Layers cause two or more Programs to play simultaneously

when a note is played.

Split

Splits cause different Programs to respond on different areas

of the keyboard.

Velocity Switch

Velocity Switches cause different Programs to respond

depending on the velocity (how hard you play the notes).

On the KROSS, you can use a different Program for each of

up to sixteen Timbres, and combine two or more of the

above methods to create even more complex setups.

Program B

Program A

Layer:

Two or more programs sound

simultaneously.

Program B

Program A

Split:

Dierent programs will sound in

dierent areas of the keyboard.

split point

Program A

Program B

Keyboard playing

dynamics

Strong

Soft

Velocity Switch:

Keyboard playing dynamics

(velocity) switch between

dierent programs.

Program C

Program D

Program B

Program A

Keyboard playing

dynamics

Strong

Soft

Example:

B and C/D are split. In the lower

keyboard range, A and B are

layered. In the higher keyboard

range, C and D are switched by

velocity and layered with A.

Playing and editing Combinations

As an additional possibility, you can set the slope for a key

zone or velocity zone so that the volume diminishes

gradually. This lets you change a split into a keyboard

crossfade, or a velocity switch into a velocity crossfade.

Creating Splits and Layers

Splits and Layers

Let’s create a Combination that combines both splits and

layers, like the diagram below:

1. Access the COMBI> PROG page.

2. Select a piano sound for Timbre 1, a brass sound for

Timbre 2, and a string sound for Timbre 3.

3. For timbres 1–3, set Status to INT.

4. Access the C-TIMBRE MIDI page.

5. For timbres 1–3, set the MIDI Channel to Gch (Global

channel).

6. Access the C-ZONE/DELAY> KEY ZONE page.

7. For timbre 1, set “Top Key” to G9 and Bottom Key to

C4.

You can also enter a note value by moving the cursor to

the parameter in the display, then holding down the

ENTER button and pressing a note on the keyboard.

8. For timbre 2 and timbre 3, set the Top Key to B3 and

the Bottom Key to C-1.

Key Zone Slope

In addition to “hard” splits, where the sound changes

abruptly, you can use the Slope parameters to gradually fade

a sound in or out over a range of keys.

We’ll make some changes to the example shown above.

1. In the example above, you could set the Bottom Key of

timbre 1 to G3, and set the Top Key of timbre 2 to G4,

so that these two timbres overlap.

2. Next, if you set the Bottom Slope of timbre 1 to 12, and

set the Top Slope of timbre 2 to 12, the sound will

change gradually instead of changing suddenly.

Creating Velocity Switches

Next, let’s create a simple velocity switched Combination,

like the diagram below:

1. Access the COMBI> PROG page.

2. Select a brass sound for Timbre 1, and a string sound

for Timbre 2.

3. For timbres 1 and 2, set the Status to INT.

4. Access the C-TIMBRE MIDI page.

5. For timbres 1 and 2, set the MIDI Channel to Gch

(Global MIDI channel).

6. Access the C-ZONE/DELAY> VEL ZONE page.

7. For timbre 1, set the Top Velocity to 127 and the

Bottom Velocity to 64.

You can also enter a velocity value by moving the cursor

to the parameter in the display, then holding down the

ENTER button and playing a note on the keyboard.

8. For timbre 2, set the Top Velocity to 63 and Bottom

Velocity to 1.

Velocity Zone Slope

Similar to Key Zone Slopes, as described above, these let

you fade sounds in and out gradually over a velocity range,

instead of a simple hard switch.

We’ll make some changes to the example shown above.

1. Set the velocity zones of the two timbres so that they

partially overlap.

2. Set the Top Slope and Bottom Slope so that the sound

changes gradually, rather than abruptly between

velocity values 63 and 64.

Program A

Program B

Keyboard X-Fade (keyboard

crossfade):

As you play from low notes to

high notes, the volume of A

will fade out, and the volume

of B will fade in.

C–1 C4 G9B3

PianoTimbre 1

Brass

Timbre 2

Strings

Timbre 3

127

Strings

Velocity

switch

Timbre 1

Timbre 2

Brass

Editing a combination Status settings

Status settings

Adjust these settings in the COMBI> PROG page.

This controls the status of MIDI and the internal tone

generator for each Timbre. Normally, if you’re playing an

internal Program, this should be set to INT.

If the status is set to Off, EXT, or EX2, that Timbre’s

internal sounds will not be played. Off simply disables the

Timbre entirely. The EXT and EX2 settings allow the

Timbre to control an external MIDI device.

For details, please see “Status” on page 71 of the Parameter

Guide.

MIDI settings

MIDI Channel

Adjust these settings in the C-TIMBRE> MIDI page.

Timbres that you wish to play from the KROSS’s keyboard

must be set to the global MIDI channel. Your playing on the

keyboard is transmitted on the global MIDI channel, and will

trigger any timbre that matches this channel. Normally you

will set this to Gch. When this is set to Gch, the MIDI

channel of the timbre will always match the global MIDI

channel, even if you change the global MIDI channel.

On some preloaded Combinations, Timbres used by the

arpeggiator may have their MIDI Channels set to

something other than Gch. These will be timbres that

play only when the arpeggiator is on, which is a very

useful technique for creating “Apreggiator based”

Combinations.

For details, please see “Arpeggiator settings in

Combination and Sequencer modes” on page 76. In

particular, note the relationships between arpeggiator A/

B assignments and the MIDI Channel.

Bank Select (when status=EX2)

When the Status (COMBI> PROG) is set to EX2, these

parameters allow you to transmit MIDI Bank Select

messages to external MIDI devices.

MIDI filter settings

Adjust these settings in the C-MIDI FILTER> 1–4 pages.

For each MIDI Filter item, you can specify whether or not

the corresponding MIDI message will be transmitted and

received. The checked items will be transmitted and

received.

The MIDI filters don’t turn the functions themselves on or

off. Instead, the filter just controls whether or not that MIDI

message will be transmitted and received.

For example, if portamento is on, portamento will be applied

to the internal KROSS sound even if Enable Portamento SW

is unchecked.

As another example, let’s say that you’ve selected a bass

Program for Timbre 1, and a piano Program for Timbre 2,

with the goal of creating a bass/piano split. You could

choose the following settings so that pressing the damper

pedal affects only Timbre 2’s piano sound:

1. Access the C–MIDI FILTER> 1 page.

2. Un-check the Damper (Enable Damper) box for

Timbre 1.

3. Check the Damper (Enable Damper) box for

Timbre 2.

Changing the program settings to

match the combination

You can make various changes to Programs within the

context of a particular Combination to make them fit better

with other Programs, or to create particular sonic effects.

These changes do not affect the original Programs, or how

those Programs sound in other Combinations. (see page 77

of the Parameter Guide)

Timbre oscillator settings

Adjust these settings in the C-TIMBRE> OSC page.

Force OSC Mode

If you wish to force a polyphonic program to sound

monophonically, set this either to Mono or Legato.

Conversely, set this to Poly if you wish to force a

monophonic program to play polyphonically.

Normally this should be set to PRG, so that the sound will

play as set by the original Program.

For details, please see “Force OSC Mode” on page 77 of the

Parameter Guide.

OSC Select

If the timbre is using a Program where the Oscillator Mode

is Double, and you want only OSC1 or OSC2 (not both) to

sound, set this to onlyOSC1 (only OSC1 will sound) or

onlyOSC2 (only OSC2 will sound). Conversely, specify

onlyOSC2 if you want only OSC2 to produce sound. If you

want to use the unchanged settings of the program so that the

original sound is heard, set this to OSC1&2.

Playing and editing Combinations

Normally, this should be set to OSC1&2.

Portamento

If the Program uses portamento, but you’d like to disable this

for the current Combination, set this parameter to Off.

Conversely, if you want to force the portamento to be on, or

just to change the portamento time, set this to a value of

001–127. The portamento will change to use the newly

specified time.

Normally, this should be set to PRG.

Pitch settings

Transpose, Detune (BPM Adjust)

These parameters adjust the pitch of the timbre. Adjust these

settings in the C-TIMBRE> PITCH page.

• In a layer-type combination, you can set two or more

timbres to the same program, and create a richer sound

by using Transpose to shift their pitch apart by an octave

or by using Detune to create a slight difference in pitch

between the two.

• In split-type combinations, you can use Transpose to

shift the pitch (in semitone units) of the programs

specified for each key zone.

Note: If you wish to change the playback pitch of a drum

program, use Detune. If you change the Transpose setting,

the relationship between the notes and drum sounds will

change.

Scale selection

Use a Program’s Scale, Scale Type (timbre scale and

overall scale)

This specifies the scale for each timbre. Adjust these settings

in the C-TIMBRE> SCALE page.

If you check Use Program’s Scale, the scale specified by

the program will be used. Timbres where this parameter is

not checked will use the Scale setting.

Delay

You can set some Timbres so that they don’t sound

immediately at note-on. This can create cool effects, and

more dramatic layers. Adjust these settings in the C-ZONE/

DELAY> DELAY page.

You can specify the delay for each Timbre either in

milliseconds (ms), or in rhythmic values which sync to the

system tempo.

If you set the Delay to Key Off, the Timbre will sound when

the note is released.

Arpeggiator settings

According to the note data received from the keyboard or

from the MIDI IN connector, the arpeggiator will

automatically generate a wide range of phrases or patterns

including arpeggios, guitar or keyboard backing riffs, bass

phrases, or drum patterns. A combination lets you use two

arpeggiators.

For more about the arpeggiator, please see page 73.

Drum Track settings

While you perform using a combination, you can use the

KROSS’s rich variety of drum patterns to play high-quality

drum programs.

Playing along with Drum Track patterns is often a useful

way to come up with new phrases.

You can select the drum program that you want, and specify

how it will start.

For more about the Drum Track function, please see

page 83.

Using the step sequencer

In a combination, the step sequencer uses the drum program

of timbre 16. You can use pads 1–16 to intuitively create

drum loop patterns and play them.

For more about the step sequencer, please see page 89.

Effects

For details, please see “Using Effects” on page 67.

Automatically importing a

combination into Sequence mode

You can use the Auto Song Setup feature, which

automatically copies the settings of the program or

combination and puts the KROSS in record-standby mode

when you simply press the SEQUENCER (REC) button.

Then you can press the SEQUENCER (start/stop)

button to begin recording.

For details, please see “Auto Song Setup function” on

page 60.

Favorites function

What is the Favorites function?

This function lets you register your favorite combinations or

programs using the 16 front panel pads so that you can recall

them instantly.

You can also register MIDI program changes to a favorite, as

a way to easily recall sounds on an external MIDI device.

Using the Favorites function

Recalling a favorite sound

1. Press the FAVORITES ACTIVE button to turn on the

Favorites function. (FAVORITES ACTIVE button lit

up)

2. Press the BANK SELECT button to select a bank.

(BANK LED lit up)

3. Press one of the 1–16 pads to select a favorite. The

sound or settings you registered will be recalled.

(Button lit up)

Note: You can use the VALUE dial or the cursor buttons

◄►▲▼ to recall favorites consecutively.

Note: You can use a foot switch or MIDI foot controller to

recall favorites. (see page 23, and page 303 of the Parameter

Guide)

Note: To turn off the Favorites function, press any one of the

PROG, COMBI, or SEQ buttons.

Registering a sound in Favorites

There are two ways to register a sound as a favorite.

• Directly register a sound as a favorite

• Modify an existing favorite registration

The two procedures are described below.

If you want to keep the registrations and settings that

you made for the Favorites function, you must save

them before you turn off the power. To save these

settings, execute the Write Favorites function. (see

“Saving your Favorites” on page 54)

Directly registering a favorite sound

Here’s how the sound that you’ve selected in Program mode

or Combination mode can be directly registered as a favorite.

1. In Program mode or Combination mode, select a

sound. (see pages 27, 45)

2. Hold down the EXIT button and press the

FAVORITES ACTIVE button to enter registration

mode. The display indicates "Add to Favorite," and

the bank LEDs and pads 1-16 blink.

Note: If you decide not to register the sound, press the

EXIT button.

3. Use the BANK SELECT button to select a bank.

4. Press one of the 1–16 pads to register the sound to that

button.

Add to Favorite function

You can also register a favorite by executing the Add to

Favorite function in Program mode or Combination mode.

Instead of step 2 described above, press the FUNCTION

button to access the function list, use the PAGE– (▲) and

PAGE+ (▼) buttons to select Add to Favorite, and press the

MENU (OK) button to execute. Use steps 3 and 4 described

above to register the favorite.

Modifying an existing favorite registration

In this method, you specify the favorite number, and change

the currently-registered sound to a different sound.

This method is convenient if you already know the sounds

you want and the order that you want to register them (for

example piano in A01 and organ in A02), so that you can

step through the favorites and change them consecutively.

1. Select a favorite whose sound you want to change.

(See “Recalling a favorite sound”)

2. Press the ENTER button to access the EDIT

FAVORITE dialog box. The bank LED and the 1–16

pads you’ve selected will start blinking.

1 2

Favorites function

Note: If you decide not to make the change, press the

EXIT button.

3. Select a sound. In the same way as usual when

selecting a sound, use the CATEGORY dial and the

VALUE dial to select a sound.

As when selecting a program or combination, you can

also press the ENTER button and choose from the list

that appears. Select a sound in the list, and press the

ENTER button to confirm.

To switch between programs and combinations, use the

PAGE– (PROG) and PAGE+ (COMBI) buttons.

4. When you’ve found the sound that you want to

registration will be changed to the new sound.

Changing the order of favorites

If you want to change the order of the favorites you’ve

registered, you can do so by using the Copy Favorite, Insert

Favorite, and Delete Favorite functions.

For details on how to use these functions, please see page 14.

1. Use the Copy Favorite function to copy the selected

favorite to the clipboard.

2. Select the favorite where you want to insert the copied

favorite. Use the Insert Favorite function to insert the

favorite from the clipboard.

Note:

All favorites existing after the position where you

inserted will be moved back one space within that bank. The

favorite at the last position in the bank (16) will disappear.

3. To delete the selected favorite, use the Delete Favorite

function.

Note:

All favorites existing after the one you deleted will

be moved forward one space within that bank. The last

position in the bank (16) will become an initialized favorite.

Note: If you execute this function with the All Favorites

check box selected, all favorites will be deleted.

Convenient ways to use favorites

Here are some ways to take advantage of favorites for even

more convenience. For each favorite, you can adjust the

following settings.

• Change the sound that’s registered (see “Modifying an

existing favorite registration” on page 53)

• Specify a program change and bank select that will be

transmitted via MIDI

You can adjust these settings by editing the favorite. To edit

a favorite, proceed as follows.

Specifying a program change

1. Access the edit page as described in steps 1 and 2 of

the “Modifying an existing favorite registration”

section on page 53.

2. In the edit screen, specify the parameters for each

favorite.

If you want to recall a sound on an external MIDI

device, adjust the appropriate Favorites Mode Select

settings.

Choose Internal if you want to play one of the KROSS

internal sound generator’s sounds. When you register a

sound from the front panel, that favorite is automatically

specified as Internal. When you recall a favorite that’s

specified as Internal, the program change that’s assigned

to that favorite will be transmitted. (E.g., A-3=002, B-

1=016)

Choose the External MIDI setting if you want to recall a

sound on an external MIDI device. The internal sound

generator will be disabled, and will not produce sound.

Note: If you want to simultaneously switch and play

sounds on the internal sound generator as well as an

external MIDI sound module, use a combination with the

EXT or EX2 settings. (see page 71 of the Parameter

Guide)

Saving your Favorites

When you’ve finished registering sounds to buttons, save

your Favorites settings. If you turn off the power without

saving your settings, they will be lost.

1. Press the FAVORITES ACTIVE button to turn on the

Favorites function.

2. Press the FUNCTION button, use the PAGE–(▲)

button to select the Write Favorites function, and

press the MENU (OK) button.

3. Press the MENU (OK) button. The settings will be

saved.

Favorite No.

Sound Setting

Prog/Combi Select

Favorite Mode Select

External MIDI Setting

2a 2b

Sequencer

Overview

About the KROSS’s Sequencer

The sequencer brings together the KROSS’s numerous

functions such as its arpeggiator, Drum Track, Step

sequencer, high-performance effects, and controllers,

allowing you to take advantage of these in a wide range of

situations.

This sequencer is a 16-track MIDI sequencer that can store

up to 128 songs and 210,000 MIDI events. You can use it to

record and play back notes for the internal sound generator

as well as for external MIDI sound modules.

When you turn off the power, the settings that were

created in Sequencer mode as well as the song data that

you recorded will not be backed up. If you wish to keep

this data, you must save it on an SD card before turning

off the power.

If you wish to write the programs, track parameters,

effects, and arpeggiator settings etc. that were used for a

song as a template song, use the Save Template Song

function.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the KROSS

will not contain any song data, so if you wish to play a

song on the sequencer, you must first load data from an

SD card, or receive a MIDI data dump from a MIDI

filer. For details, please see page 127, and page 178 of

the Parameter Guide.

Sequencer mode structure

Sequencer mode is structured as follows.

A song consists of tracks 1–16, a tempo track, song

parameters such as the song name, arpeggiator, Drum Track,

Step sequencer function, and effect parameters.

Tracks 1–16 consist of setup parameters (such as each

track’s program, pan, and volume) located at the start of the

song, and the musical data itself. The tempo track consists of

tempo and time signature data. (see “Setup parameters &

Musical data” on page 100 of the Parameter Guide)

Song recording and editing

You can record in real time onto tracks 1–16. Realtime

recording gives you a choice of six recording modes.

You can edit tracks 1–16 in units of tracks or measures, and

you can also edit individual notes and other events. For

example, you can use functions such as Create Control Data

to insert a pitch bend, aftertouch, or control change data.

OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

Bus

(Bus Select)

Track

Insert Eects

Master Eects

FXCtrl Bus

Tempo Track

Tempo and time signature data

Insert Eect 1...5

Master Eect

1, 2

Song

MIDI Track 01..16

Setting

parameters

Performance

data

Setting

parameters

Performance

data

Setting

parameters

Performance

data

Setting

parameters

Performance

data

Setting

parameters

Performance

data

Step Sequencer Arpeggiator

DrumTrack

Tone Adjust

Controllers

Sequencer

Playing back

Playback methods

In order to play back song data in the sequencer, you must

first, load song data into the KROSS.

First, let's load a demo song that contains preload data, and

play it back.

Loading a song (demo song)

1. Execute “Loading the preloaded data” on page 131

This procedure will load program and combination data

and demo song data into the KROSS. This means that

any data you've edited or newly created will be

overwritten and lost. If you want to keep this data, save

it on an SD card (commercially available) before you

continue.

Tip: To load song data that you saved on an SD card, see

“Loading songs for use in Sequencer mode (.SNG)” on

page 127.

Playing back a song

1. Press the SEQ button to enter Sequencer mode.

The SEQ> MAIN or SEQ> PROG page will appear. If

this is not displayed, press the EXIT button three times.

2. Use “Song Select” to select the song that you want to

play back.

You can also select a song by using the ENTER button,

the cursor buttons ▲▼, and the VALUE dial.

However if there is no song, you can’t make a selection

using these controllers.

3. Press the SEQUENCER (start/stop) button.

Song playback will begin.

The location indicator towards the upper left of the

display shows the currently playing measure and beat.

4. During playback, you can press the SEQUENCER

(start/stop) button to stop playback.

If you press the SEQUENCER (start/stop) button

once again, playback will resume from where you

stopped.

To fast-forward or rewind, hold down the SEQUENCER

(start/stop) button and press the cursor button 

(fast-forward) or  (rewind).

You can use the FF/REW Speed function to specify the

fast-forward and rewind speed. (Please see page 142 of

the Parameter Guide)

Note: Track Select chooses the track that will be played by

the keyboard.

Specifying the playback start location

By pressing the EXIT button ( ) and the

SEQUENCER (REC) button ( ), you can move

(locate) to a specified location. By default, you’ll move to

001:01.000.

You can use the song command “Set Location” to change

this location. (see page 142 of the Parameter Guide)

Loop playback

Looping all tracks simultaneously

By selecting the LOOP check box, you can make the song

play or record in a loop. In this example, we’ll loop

measures 10 through 13 of the demo song.

1. In Sequencer mode, access the SEQ> MAIN page.

2. Add a check mark to LOOP (Loop All Tracks).

Use the cursor buttons ◄►▲▼ to select the parameter,

and press the ENTER button.

3. Set the measure from which you want to start looping

(the Loop Start Measure) to 10, and the measure at

which you want to stop looping (the Loop End

Measure) to 13.

Use the cursor button ► to select each parameter, and use

the VALUE dial to specify the value.

4. Press the SEQUENCER (start/stop) button to

play back the demo song.

Measures 10 through 13 will play repeatedly.

Individually looping a track

During song playback or recording, you can make a

currently-playing track loop individually.

As an example, try the following settings.

Note: Turn LOOP (Loop All Tracks) off. For more about

Solo settings, see page 57.

1. In Sequencer mode, access the S-LOOP/TONE>

LOOP page.

Press the MENU button, select S-LOOP/TONE from the

menu, and press the MENU (OK) button.

2. Select track 1 as the track where you’re adjusting

settings.

Press the cursor button ◄ to make the track number

towards the upper left side of the display indicate

TRACK 01.

Location Tempo Mode TempoSong Select

Track Program Category

Track Select

LOOP: On Loop Start: M010 End: M013Song Select: 000

LOOP: OSong Select: 003

Solo: On Solo: On

Playing back Playback methods

3. Turn on Track Play Loop.

Use the cursor button ▲ to select the parameter, and

press the ENTER button to add a check mark.

If a check mark is shown, the specified region of

measures will loop during playback or recording.

4. Turn on Play Intro.

Use the cursor button ▼ to select the parameter, and

press the ENTER button to add a check mark.

If a check mark is shown, playback will start from the

first measure of the intro, and then the specified region of

measures will repeat.

5. Set the Loop Start to M005, and the Loop End to

M008.

Use the cursor button ▼ to select each parameter, and use

the VALUE dial to specify the value.

6. Using the procedure described above, adjust settings

for track 10 as shown in the illustration below.

If you play back from the first measure with the settings

shown in the screenshot above, the specified region of

measures will repeat as follows.

If Play Intro is unchecked, the specified region of measures

will repeat as follows.

Changing the volume, and pan settings of

each track

In the SEQ> MIX page you can change the volume, and pan

settings of each track.

Muting a specific track/Monitoring a specific

track (Mute/Solo functions)

The KROSS provides a Mute function that lets you silence

specified tracks between 1–16, and a Solo function that lets

you hear the specified track or channel by itself. These

functions can be used in various ways. For example you can

intentionally mute or solo specific tracks, or listen only to

the rhythm section of the previously-recorded tracks while

you record new tracks. Let’s try out the Mute and Solo

functions.

1. Press the SEQUENCER (start/stop) button.

2. Access the SEQ> MIX page. Press the PAGE+ or

PAGE+ button to select the page.

3. Use the cursor ▲ button to select Sound.

4. Use the cursor buttons ◄► to select the track that

you want to mute. Select track 1.

5. Press the ENTER button to switch between Play and

Mute.

The display will change from P (Play) to M (Mute), and

the playback of track 1 will no longer be heard. In this

way, the “mute” function allows you to silence a

specified track until the track is un-muted.

6. Press the cursor ► button to select track 2, and press

the ENTER button to switch it to Mute.

The playback of track 2 will also be muted. To cancel

muting, press the ENTER button again.

7. Turn on Solo for track 1.

Press the FUNCTION button, select Solo Setting from

the menu, and press the OK button. The Solo Setting

dialog box will appear.

Use the cursor button ▼ to select Solo, and use the cursor

button ◄ to select Track 01. When you press the ENTER

button to add a check mark, the screen will indicate (S);

now you’ll hear only the playback of track 1. In this way,

you can play only a specific track that you want to hear.

If both Mute and Solo are used, the Solo function will be

given priority.

Use the cursor button ► and the ENTER button to turn

Solo on for track 2. The indication will change, and

you’ll hear the playback of tracks 1 and 2. MIDI tracks 3–

16 will not be heard.

8. To turn off the Solo feature, press the ENTER button

once again. Turn off Solo for MIDI tracks 1 and 2.

The display will change, and the playback of tracks 1 and

2 will be muted. If the Solo function is turned off for all

tracks, playback will be according to the Sound settings.

The Solo is not stored when you save the song.

Measures 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Track 1

1234567856785

Track 10

9109109109109109109

Measures 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Track 1

5678567856785

Track 10

9109109109109109109

Track Play Loop: On Play Intro: OnTrack Select: 01

Loop Start: M005 Loop End: M008

Track Play Loop: On Play Intro: OTrack Select: 10

Loop Start: M009 Loop End: M010

Sequencer

Exclusive Solo

Exclusive Solo is a function that limits the Solo function

(described above) to a single track at a time. If Exclusive

Mode has a check mark, only the track for which Solo was

last turned on will play; all other tracks will be silent.

Recording

The sequencer of the KROSS can record your keyboard

performance and use of controllers such as the modulation

wheel and pitch bend wheel in real time.

Usually you will use Single Track Recording to record one

track at a time.

Note: In addition to Single Track Recording, you can also

use Multi-Track Recording. (see page 61)

Preparations for recording

Before you begin recording, make sure that the memory

protect setting in Global/Media mode is turned off. For

details, please see “Protecting the memory” on

page 116.

Selecting a song

1. Press the SEQ button to enter Sequencer mode.

2. Choose “Song Select” (e.g., in the SEQ> MAIN page).

Use the cursor buttons ◄►▼▲ to choose Song Select,

and use the VALUE dial to select a song.

Note: Immediately after the power is turned on, there will

be a single initialized song. If there is only one song, you

won’t be able to select other songs.

Track settings

Assign a program to each track, and specify its volume.

Tip: Here we are explaining how to adjust these basic

settings step by step, but in the section that follows we will

tell you how these settings can be adjusted automatically.

• “Using template songs” on page 59

• You can also use “Copying the settings of a combination

or program” on page 60.

1. Assign a program to each track.

Press the PAGE+ button to access the SEQ> PROG page.

Use the cursor button ▼ to choose Program Select.

Tempo

Mode

TempoLocation

Song

Select

rack Select

Category/Track

Program Select

Track Info. Track Select

Status

Recording Preparations for recording

Use the cursor buttons ◄► to select the track whose

program you want to specify. Use the CATEGORY dial

and VALUE dial to choose a program. The procedure is

the same as when assigning a program to each timbre of a

combination. (see page 48)

Tip: You can copy various settings from Programs or

Combinations. (see pages 138, 139 of the Parameter

Guide)

2. Use Status to specify whether each track will play the

internal and/or external sound generator.

Normally when using the KROSS, you will select INT or

BTH.

INT: During playback, the KROSS’s internal tone

generator will play the MIDI data recorded on that track.

When you use the KROSS’s keyboard or controllers, you

will be playing and controlling the track selected by

Track Select.

EXT, EX2, BTH: During playback, the MIDI data

recorded on that track will be transmitted from the MIDI

OUT to play an external sound module. When you use

the KROSS’s keyboard or controllers, MIDI data will be

transmitted to play and control the external sound module

selected by Track Select. The MIDI channel of the

external tone generator must be set to match the MIDI

Channel (S-TRACK> MIDI page) of KROSS tracks that

are set to EXT, EX2 or BTH.

If Status is set to BTH, both the external tone generator

and internal tone generator will be played and controlled.

3. Set the pan and volume of each track.

Press the PAGE+ button to access the SEQ> MIX page.

Use the cursor button ▼ to choose Pan or Volume.

Use the cursor buttons ◄► to select the track whose

settings you want to edit.

Pan sets the pan position of each track, and Vol ume sets

the volume level of each track.

4. Specify the MIDI channel that each MIDI track will

play.

Access the S-TRACK> MIDI page. Press the MENU

button to select S-TRACK. Move to the appropriate page.

Use MIDI Channel to specify the MIDI channel for each

track. Normally you will set the MIDI Channel to a

different channel: 1–16 for each track. Tracks that are set

to the same MIDI channel will sound simultaneously

when you record or play back either of the tracks.

5. Adjust the effect settings.

Use the S-FX ROUTING, S-IFX, and S-MFX pages to

adjust settings in each page.

(see “Effect settings for a combination or song” on

page 70)

6. Set the tempo and time signature.

• To set the tempo, select TEMPO in REALTIME

CONTROLS. To set the tempo, either turn KNOB 1

(TEMPO) or press the SWITCH (TAP) button at the

desired interval.Alternatively, you can select  (Tempo)

in the SEQ> MAIN page (or similar page), and use the

VALUE dial to set the tempo. Set Tempo Mode to

Manual.

• Next

you will set the time signature. In this example,

we’ll explain how to set the time signature using the

“Time Sig (Time Signature)” field. Normally, you

specify the time signature before recording the first track,

and then begin recording.

a) Access the SEQ> REC page.

b) Press the

SEQUENCER (REC) button, and set “Time

Sig (Time Signature)” to **/**.

c) Press **/** to highlight it, and use the VALUE controllers to

set the time signature.

d) Press the SEQUENCER (start/stop) button. to begin

recording. When the pre-count has ended and Locate reaches

001:01.000, press the SEQUENCER (start/stop)

button to stop recording. The time signature you specified has

now been recorded on the Tempo track.

If you press the SEQUENCER (start/stop) button

during the pre-count, the time signature won’t be recorded.

7. Adjust other settings as needed.

Adjust settings for the arpeggiator (S-ARP page) and the

MIDI filter (S-MIDI FILTER page). (see page 76)

If you want, you can make adjustments to the sound by

using the Tone Adjust function (S-LOOP/TONE> TONE

ADJ, EQ ADG pages).

When you’ve finished the above settings, basic setup is

complete.

Saving your song parameter settings

The song parameter settings that you create here can be

saved as a template. If you use these settings frequently, you

can simply load one of the templates you’ve saved.

For details, please see “Save Template Song (Save as User

Template Song)” on page 140 of the Parameter Guide.

Using template songs

Loading a template song is an easy way to create settings

appropriate for a particular musical style. You can also

assign a drum pattern to a track at the same time.

1. In the SEQ> MAIN page, press the FUNCTION

button, choose Load Template Song from the menu,

and press the MENU (OK) button. A dialog box will

appear.

2. In the “From” field, choose the template song you

want to load.

3. If you check “Copy Pattern to Track too?,” a dialog

box for copying a drum track pattern will

automatically appear after you execute the “Load

Template Song” operation.

If you execute the command without checking this, only

the template song you selected in step 2 will be loaded.

Sequencer

4. Press the MENU (OK) button to load the template

song, or press the FUNCTION (CANCEL) button if

you decide to cancel.

When you perform this operation, song settings other

than Track Play Loop will be copied.

5. In the “From” field, select the pattern that you want

to copy.

To actually hear the currently selected pattern, press the

SEQUENCER (start/stop) button.

In the To Track field, select the copy-destination track.

In the Measure field, specify the starting measure of the

copy-destination.

Following the pattern name for each of the 700 preset

patterns, the musical style and the name of the most

suitable Drum category program are partially displayed.

By loading a drum track and the corresponding preset

pattern, you can instantly set up a drum track appropriate

for each preset template song.

6. To execute this operation, press the MENU (COPY)

button.

When you execute this procedure, the Measure field will

count up automatically, showing how many measures of

the selected pattern have been placed in the selected song.

You can then copy another pattern if desired, or add more

measures of the same pattern. When you’re finished,

press the FUNCTION (EXIT) button.

Copying the settings of a combination or

program

You can copy the settings of a combination or program into

the sequencer.

This can be done in the following ways.

• Auto Song Setup

Auto Song Setup is a function that copies the settings of the

selected combination (in Combination mode) or program

(in Program mode) to the song in Sequencer mode.

• Copy From Combination or Copy From Program

functions. (see pages 138, 139 of the Parameter Guide)

In Sequencer mode, you can use these functions to copy

the desired settings.

Auto Song Setup function

1. Enter Combination mode.

2. In COMBI> MAIN page, select the desired

combination and edit the Arpeggiator etc. as desired.

Note: If you want to save the edited state of the

combination, use the Write Combination functions.

3. Press the SEQUENCER (REC) button.

Alternatively, select the “Auto Song Setup” function.

The Setup to Record dialog box will appear.

4. To execute the Auto Song Setup function, press the

SEQUENCER (REC) button or the MENU (OK)

button. If you decide not to execute, press the

CANCEL button.

You will automatically move to Sequencer mode, and the

settings of the combination will be copied to the song.

The step sequencer’s RUN on/off setting and the Drum

Track’s on/off setting when Trigger Mode is set to

“Start Immediately” will not be copied. If you want to

use these settings, press the appropriate buttons to turn

them on.

The first unused song will be the copy-destination song.

5. The KROSS will automatically enter record-ready

mode, and the metronome will sound according to the

Metronome setting. (see page 110 of the Parameter

Guide)

6. Press the SEQUENCER (start/stop) button to

begin realtime recording. To stop recording, press the

SEQUENCER (start/stop) button once again.

Copy From Combination and Copy From Program

functions

In Sequencer mode, you can use these functions to copy

combination or program settings to a song.

If you select all of the check boxes in the dialog box, the

same settings will be copied.

Creating a new song

1. Press the SEQ button. You’ll enter Sequencer mode.

2. Press the FUNCTION button, choose the Create New

Song function from the menu, and press the MENU

(OK) button (SEQ> MAIN page, etc.). A dialog box

will appear.

3. Enter the number of measures in Set Length.

You can change the number of measures later if

necessary. (see “Set Song Length” on page 142 of the

Parameter Guide)

4. If you add a check mark to “Select the number,”

you’ll be able to specify the number of the new song. If

there is no check mark, the song will be numbered

consecutively.

5. Press the MENU (OK) button to create the song.

Recording Recording MIDI in real time

Recording MIDI in real time

When you’ve finished with the “Preparations for recording”

section you can start recording.

This is a method of recording what you’re playing on the

keyboard and your controller usage, in real time. This

method of recording is normally used one track at a time,

and is called single track recording.

As an alternative, multitrack recording allows you to

simultaneously record multiple channels of data onto

multiple tracks. This is the method you will use when using

the Drum Track function, the Step sequencer function, and

the arpeggiator to record multiple tracks of musical data at

once, or when you play back existing sequence data on an

external sequencer and record it onto KROSS’s sequencer in

real time.

Recording setup

In SEQ> REC page Recording Setup, select the realtime

recording method that you want to use.

Overwrite

By default, this recording method is selected.

This will record your performance by overwriting any

previously recorded data. All data following the measure

where you start recording will be erased.

Normally you will use this method to record, and then

modify the results by using other types of real-time

recording or MIDI event editing.

1. Use Track Select to choose the track that you want to

record.

Play the keyboard; you’ll hear the selected track.

2. Set the Recording Setup to Overwrite.

3. Press the SEQUENCER (REC) button, and then

press the SEQUENCER (start/stop) button.

If the Metronome Setup is still set to the default settings,

the metronome will sound for a two-measure pre-count,

and then recording will begin. Play the keyboard and

move controllers such as the Modulation wheel to record

your performance.

4. When you finish playing, press the SEQUENCER

(start/stop) button.

Recording will end, and the location will return to the

point where you started recording.

The following recording setup parameters are also available.

Overdub

Select this method if you wish to record additional

performance data by overdubbing it without erasing the

previously-recorded data.

Manual punch-in

Select this method when you wish to use the SEQUENCER

(REC) button or a foot switch to re-record selected

portions of a previously-recorded track.

Auto punch-in

Select this method when you wish to automatically re-record

selected portions of a previously-recorded track.

Then, recording will occur only over the specified area

(Auto Punch In Start Measure–Auto Punch In End

Measure), rewriting it with the newly recorded data.

Loop (Loop All Tracks)

Select this method when you wish to repeatedly record over

a specified area of a track, while continuing to add data. This

is suitable for creating drum patterns, etc.

For details, please see “An example of realtime recording”.

Multi Rec (multitrack recording)

Use MIDI multi-track recording if you want to

simultaneously record multiple tracks of different channels,

such as when recording the output of the drum track,

arpeggiator or Step sequencer functions, or when recording

from an external multi-track sequencer.

Recording resolution

Set the “REC Resolution” if necessary. When you record in

real time on a track, this parameter specifies how the timing

of the recorded MIDI data will be corrected.

Adjust these settings in the SEQ> REC page.

For example if REC Resolution is set to , the timing of your

realtime-recorded notes will be automatically adjusted as

shown in section “2” of the following illustration whenever

it varies from 8th note intervals.

If REC Resolution is set to Hi, the notes will be recorded

with the timing at which you play them.

Tip: To correct already-recorded data, use the Quantize

function.

First, access the S-TRACK EDIT >SELECT MEASURE

TO EDIT page. Then specify the target of quantization and

the range of measures, and select the Quantize function.

Specify the steps that will be corrected and the strength of

correction, and then apply quantization. If you want to return

to the state prior to quantizing, use the Undo function from

the function list.

Track Select

LOOP (Loop All Tracks)

Multi REC

Recording Setup



 

      

Sequencer

An example of realtime recording

In this example, we’ll assign a drum program to track 01 and

create the following one-measure drum phrase.

1. Create a new song, and specify a drum program for

track 01.

Use Track Select to select track 01, and verify that you

hear a drum program. (see page 58)

2. Access the SEQ> REC page. In Recording Setup,

specify “Loop (Loop All Tracks)” and set it to M001-

M001.

With this setting, measure 1 will be recorded repeatedly.

The newly recorded data will be added at each pass.

3. Set “REC Resolution” to .

4. Press the SEQUENCER (REC) button, and then

the SEQUENCER (start/stop) button.

The metronome will sound a two-measure count-down,

and then recording will begin.

5. As shown in the musical example printed above, start

by playing the C3 note of the keyboard to record the

bass drum for one measure.

6. Next, play the E3 note of the keyboard to record the

snare for one measure, and then the F#3 note to

record the hi-hat.

Tip: Pressing the SEQUENCER (REC) button (lit)

while recording will pause recording. At this time, the

REC button blinks. When you press the SEQUENCER

(REC) button once again, recording resumes.

7. Press the SEQUENCER (start/stop) button to

stop recording.

8. Play back the result, and listen to the drum

performance that you recorded.

Press the SEQUENCER (start/stop) button When

you’ve finished listening, press the SEQUENCER

(start/stop) button once again to stop playback.

9. If you’re not satisfied with your performance, you can

select the Undo function to return to the state prior to

recording. Record again from step 4.

Note: When you’ve finished recording, clear the LOOP

(Loop All Tracks) check box, and set Recording Setup to

the Overwrite setting that you normally use.

In addition, access the S-LOOP/TONE> LOOP page,

check Track Play Loop for track 01, and set the Loop

Start Measure and Loop End Measure to 001. When

you play back, track 01 will repeatedly play the first

measure.

Performing with the arpeggiator

drum track or step sequencer

Based on the note data it receives from the keyboard or from

the MIDI IN connector, the arpeggiator can generate a wide

range of phrases and patterns including arpeggios, guitar or

keyboard backing riffs, bass phrases, or drum patterns. You

can use two arpeggiators simultaneously. For more about the

arpeggiator, please see page 73.

The Drum Track plays a variety of drum patterns using the

drum program that you’ve assigned to the desired track. For

more about the Drum Track, please see page 83.

You can select the drum program that you want, and specify

how it will start.

The step sequencer uses the drum program of track 16. You

can use pads 1–16 to intuitively create drum loop patterns

and play them. For more about the step sequencer, please see

page 89.

Recording your pad sampler

performance

By assigning a MIDI channel to the pad sampler, you can

record your pad performance as note data on a track.

Select a song, and in the MAIN page, turn “SMP” on; the

timbre that's assigned to track 15 is disabled (does not

sound), and instead the on/off events of the pad sampler are

recorded as note-on/off events of the MIDI channel that's

assigned to track 15.

If “SMP” is off, the track 15 timbre can be used as usual.

Note: It is not possible to change the track used for the pad

sampler to any setting other than 15.

Recording System Exclusive events

Exclusive messages received from an external MIDI device

or the parameter changes produced when you edit a track

parameter or effect parameter can be recorded in real time on

any track.

During playback, the exclusive messages you recorded will

control the track parameters and effect parameters of the

song, and can be sent to external MIDI devices.

GM, XG, and GS exclusive messages can be recorded

on a track, but the KROSS’s tone generator will not

respond to these messages.

Using realtime controls to record changes in

a MIDI track’s pan, EQ, volume, and tone

adjust

By controlling the pan, EQ, volume, and tone adjust

parameters during realtime recording, you can record these

changes so that they will be reflected during playback.

Use multi-track recording if you want to modify the settings

of multiple tracks simultaneously.

Note: Controlling these parameters will transmit control

change or system exclusive messages. In order for this data

to be recorded, the G-MIDI> FILTER Enable Control

Change and Enable Exclusive settings must be checked. Go

to Global/Media mode and verify that these items are

checked.

Note: Use Param. MIDI Out in G-MIDI> OUT page to

specify whether control change messages or system

exclusive messages will be transmitted when you edit the

Pan (CC#10), Volume (CC#7), or Send 1/2 level (CC#93 and

CC#91) parameters.

Bass Drum: C3

Snare: E3

Hi-Hat: F#3

Recording Recording System Exclusive events

Recording internal parameter changes

You can use SysEx for automation of internal KROSS

effects and Program parameters.

Here we’ll explain how to record internal parameter

changes. As an example, we’ll explain how parameter

changes recorded on a different track can be used to modify

the parameters of the insert effect (IFX1) applied to the

program of track 1.

Note: In order to record system exclusive messages, make

sure that the G-MIDI> FILTER setting Enable Exclusive is

checked. Go to Global/Media mode and verify that this is

checked.

1. Select the desired program for MIDI track 1, and

route it to IFX1. Then record a phrase of about

sixteen measures.

• In the SEQ> PROG page, use “Program Select” to select

the desired program for MIDI Track 01.

• In the S-FX ROUTING> BUS page, route the Track 01

Bus to IFX1. Then in the S-FX ROUTING> IFX page,

select the desired effect for IFX1.

• Select Track 01 in Track Select. Then press the the

SEQUENCER (REC) button, and then the

SEQUENCER (start/stop) button, and record a

phrase of about sixteen measures.

2. Select Track 09 in “Track Select,” and record

parameter changes as desired.

Note: For this example, select an empty track. If you

want to record onto a MIDI track that already contains

data, set the SEC> REC page Recording Setup to

“Overdub.”

• Select Track 09 in Track Select. Then pressthe

SEQUENCER (REC) button, and then the

SEQUENCER (start/stop) button, and begin

recording.

• At the appropriate time while recording, adjust the

parameter(s) that you want to realtime-record.

In the S-FX ROUTING> IFX page, select another effect

for IFX1, and modify the effect parameter values.

Note: In addition to effect parameter changes, you can

also record parameters such as sound parameters. For

details on the parameters that can be recorded, please see

page 152 of the Parameter Guide.

3. Stop recording.

Note: Exclusive messages are always recorded on the

current track selected by Track Select. In this example,

they are recorded on MIDI track 9.

Note: In the event edit page you can view the recorded

exclusive events and their location. Exclusive events are

displayed as “EXCL”.

To view these events, go to the S-TRACK EDIT page,

and select the MIDI Event Edit function. Then in the Set

Event Filters dialog box, check Exclusive and press the

OK button.

Exclusive events cannot be changed to a different type

of event. Nor can other events be changed into

exclusive events.

4. If you go to the page (e.g., S-FX ROUTING> IFX)

that shows the parameters you’ve adjusted in

realtime, you can watch the recorded changes be

reproduced while the song plays back.

Exclusive messages that will be recorded during

realtime recording

The following exclusive messages will be recorded. (see

page 152 of the Parameter Guide)

• Exclusive messages received from an external MIDI

device.

• Parameter changes in Sequencer mode.

• Master Volume universal system exclusive messages

assigned to a foot pedal.

Sequencer

Song editing

You can apply a variety of editing procedures to a song. The

available types of editing procedures are listed below.

Song

Load (Save) Template Song: Loads a song template into

the song (or saves a song as a template). (see page 59)

Copy From Combination/Copy From Program:

Copies

the settings of the specified combination/program to the

settings of the song that’s currently selected.

Copy From Song: This command copies all of the settings

and musical data from the specified song to the song that’s

currently selected.

Rename song: Renames the selected song. You can enter up

to 24 characters.

Delete Song: This command deletes the currently selected

song.

FF/REW Speed: This allows you to set the speed at which

fast-forward or rewind will occur.

GM Initialize: This command transmits a GM System On

message to the Sequencer mode, resetting all MIDI tracks to

the GM settings.

Set Song Length: This command changes the length of the

specified song.

Tracks

Event Edit: Here you can edit individual events of MIDI

data.

Erase Track: This command erases the data from the

specified track.

Copy/Bounce Track: The Copy Track command copies

musical data from the copy source track to the specified

track. The Bounce Track command combines the musical

data of the bounce source and bounce destination tracks, and

places the combined data in the bounce destination. All

musical data in the bounce source will be erased.

Erase Measure: This command erases the specified type(s)

of musical data from the specified range of measures. The

Erase Measure command can also be used to remove only a

specific type of data. Unlike the Delete Measure command,

executing the Erase Measure command does not cause the

subsequent measures of musical data to be moved forward.

Delete Measure: This command deletes the specified

measures. When the Delete Measure command is executed,

the musical data following the deleted measures will be

moved towards the beginning of the sequence.

Insert Measure: This command inserts the specified

number of measures into the specified track. When you

execute the Insert Measure command, the musical data

following the insert location will be moved backward.

Repeat Measure: This command repeatedly inserts the

specified measures for the specified number of times. When

you execute the Repeat Measure command, the measures

will be inserted following the measure specified by To End

of Measure, and musical data following the inserted data

will be moved backward.

Copy Measure: This command copies the measures of

musical data specified as the “From” source to the beginning

of the measure specified as the “To” location. When you

execute the Copy Measure command, the existing track data

at the copy destination will be rewritten.

Move Measure: This command moves the specified

measures of performance data to another measure.

Create/Erase Control: The Create Control command

creates control change, aftertouch, pitch bend, or tempo data

in the specified region of a MIDI track or the tempo track.

The Erase Control command erases data such as control

changes, aftertouch, pitch bend, or tempo in the specified

range.

Quantize: This command corrects the timing of MIDI data

of the type you specify (note data, control change,

aftertouch, pitch bend, program change, etc.) in the

track.You can also adjust for swing.

Shift/Erase Note: This command shifts (moves) or erases

the specified note numbers in a specified MIDI track and

range of measures.

Modify Velocity: This command modifies the velocity

values of notes in the specified area so that they will change

over time according to a selected curve.

Rename Track: This command renames the selected track.

You can enter up to 24 characters.

Saving your MIDI song Tracks

Saving your MIDI song

In order to ensure that the data you create is reproduced

faithfully, we recommend that you save your data by using

the Save All command so that the programs will also be

saved. However if you have not changed the program

numbers or sounds used in your song, saving only the song-

related data (.SNG) will minimize the size of the data.

When you turn off the power, the Sequencer mode

settings and the recorded songs data will be lost.

1. Insert an SD card in the SD card slot.

With the card label facing upward, insert the connector

end of the card into the SD card slot and press it in until

you hear a click.

Make sure that the card is oriented correctly when you

insert it. Forcing it in the wrong direction may damage

the slot or the card, and the data may be lost.

2. Hold down the EXIT button ( ) and press the

SEQ button ( ) to enter Global/Media mode.

3. Press the MENU button and select the MEDIA tab;

the MEDIA>FILE page appears.

Tip: When the Global/Media mode GLOBAL tab is

displayed, you can once again hold down the EXIT

button ( ) and press the SEQ button ( ) to

jump to the MEDIA tab.

4. Press the FUNCTION button. Press the PAGE– or

PAGE+ buttons to choose Save All.

5. Press the MENU (OK) button.

The Save All (PCG and SNG) dialog box will appear. If

you want to change the name, you can do so. (see

page 124)

6. Press the MENU (OK) button to save (write) the data.

If data of the same name already exists, a message will

ask whether you want to overwrite the existing data. If

you want to overwrite the existing data, press the MENU

(OK) button.

Saving a template song

If there are sounds or settings that you use frequently for

songs, it’s convenient to save them as a template song.

Use the Save Template Song function to do this.

Note: The saved data will contain settings for the programs

that are selected for the song, as well as the track parameters,

effect settings, and arpeggiator settings.

Sequencer

Using Effects

An overview of the KROSS’s

effects

You can choose from 134 different types of high-quality

digital effects. The KROSS provides five insert effects, and

two master effects, together with a mixer section that

controls the routing of these effects. All of these are stereo

in/out.

Specific parameters of these effects can also be controlled in

real time from the KROSS’s controllers or via MIDI

messages using Dynamic Modulation (Dmod), by MIDI/

Tempo Sync, or by using a common LFO to apply

synchronized changes to multiple modulation effects.

Effect I/O

Insert Effects

Insert Effects (IFX 1–5) are stereo-in/stereo-out. If you

select Dry (unprocessed) for the “Wet/Dry” parameter, the

stereo input signal will be output in stereo without being

processed by the effect. If you select Wet (effect applied),

the processed signal will be output in one of the following

ways:

Insert effect 1 can use the effects S01: Stereo Compressor–

S63: Rotary Speaker and D00: St.Mltband Limiter–D10:

Rotary SpeakerOD.

Insert effects 2–4 can use the effects S01: Stereo

Compressor–S61: AmpSim - Tremolo and D00: St.Mltband

Limiter–D09: Vocoder.

Insert effect 5 can use the effects S01: Stereo Compressor–

S61: AmpSim - Tremolo.

Master Effects

Master Effects MFX1 and MFX2 are stereo-in/stereo-out.

“Send1” and “Send2” determine the send level to the Master

Effects.

With Master effects, only the Wet (processed) signal will be

output. The output signals from the Master Effects are routed

to the L/R bus with the output level specified by “Return1”

and “Return2”. These outputs are mixed with the L/R

output bus (in each mode, FX ROUTING> BUS page or

MIXER page).

Selecting “000: No Effect” will mute the output. The

processed signal will be output in one of the following ways,

according to the type of effects.

Master effect 1 can use the effects S01: Stereo Compressor–

S87: Phaser- Cho/Flng and D00: St.Mltband Limiter–D13:

Early Reflections.

Master effect 2 can use the effects S01: Stereo Compressor–

S120: Reverb- Gate.

Note: The Parameter Guide includes block diagrams for

each individual effect, which include the effect’s input/

output structure. (see page 219 of the Parameter Guide)

Effects in each mode

Program mode

For programs, you can use insert effects to process the final

sound in the same way that you use the Filter and Amplifier

to process the sound from the oscillators (OSC 1 & 2). Then

use the master effects to add spatial processing such as

reverb to create the final sound. You can also use the same

effects on the audio output of the Drum Track and the step

sequencer program. These settings are made individually for

each program.

Combination and Sequencer modes

In Combination and Sequencer modes, you can insert effects

to process the sound of each timbre/track program. Then you

can use the master effects to create overall ambience, and

use the total effect to make final adjustments.

In Combination mode, you can adjust these settings for each

combination, and in Sequencer mode you can adjust them

for each song.

In Sequencer mode, you can switch between effects or

modify the effect parameters and record these changes, so

that effects will switch automatically or effect parameters

will be modified automatically as the song plays back.

External input (or audio in)

You can apply effects to an external audio input in any

mode: Program, Combination, or Sequencer mode. To

specify the effects that you want to use, set the common

Stereo In - Stereo Out

Mono In - Mono Out

Mono In - Stereo Out

Eect

Wet

Stereo In - Stereo Out

Mono In - Mono Out

Mono In - Stereo Out

Eect

Wet

Oscillator1 Filter1 Amplier1

Oscillator2 Filter2 Amplier2

Insert

Eect 1–5

Drum Track

Step Seq

Return

OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

Send

Master

Eect 1, 2

Timbre 1 /MIDI Track 1

Timbre 16 /MIDI Track 16

Return

OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

Send

Insert

Eect 1–5

Master

Eect 1, 2

Using Effects

input settings of the KROSS in G-SET (Use Global

Settings), or use the individual parameters of each mode to

specify the BUS or Send settings. (see “Effect settings for

audio input” on page 71)

Depending on the type of effects that you’re using on

the external audio input, and on their settings, it is

possible for feedback to occur. If this occurs, adjust the

input/output levels and the effect settings. Take special

care when using high-gain effects.

Audio recorder

The audio recorder can record the sound as it is processed by

the effects specified in Program, Combination, or Sequencer

mode.

You can’t apply effects to the playback of the audio

recorder.

Pad Sampler, USB Audio

Effects cannot be applied to the playback of the pad

sampler, nor to the USB audio input.

Routing and effect settings

Routing lets you specify how each sound will be connected

to the various effects. In each mode, you can adjust settings

for the program’s oscillators, the combination’s timbres, and

the song’s tracks.

Here we’ll explain how to adjust routing settings in each

mode, and how to edit the effect settings.

Effect settings for a program

Routing

1. Access the P-FX ROUTING> BUS page.

2. “Bus (Bus Select)” specifies the bus where the output

from the oscillators will be sent. Here we’ll choose

IFX1 so that the output of the oscillators will be sent

to insert effect 1.

L/R: The oscillator output will not be sent to an insert

effect. It will pass through the total effect, and then be

sent to OUTPUT L/MONO and R.

IFX1–IFX5: The oscillator output will be sent to insert

effect 1–5.

Off: The oscillator output will not be sent to OUTPUT L/

MONO or R, or to insert effects 1–5. Choose this if you

want to send the sound directly to the master effects at the

send levels specified by Send1 (to MFX1) or Send2 (to

MFX2) (P-FX ROUTING> SEND page).

3. If you selected L/R or Off in step 2, you can use each

oscillator’s Send1 (to MFX1) and Send2 (to MFX2)

parameters to set the send levels to the master effects.

Adjust these settings in the P-FX ROUTING> SEND

page.

If Bus (Bus Select) is set to IFX1–5, the send levels from

the output of each insert effect to the master effects are

specified by the S1 (Send1) and S2 (Send2) parameters

(P-Fx Routing Mixer page). (see step 6 of the next

section, “Insert effects”)

4. “FX Control Bus” sends the output of oscillators 1

and 2 to the FX control bus.

Use this when you want to use a different sound to

control the sound that’s being input to an effect. You can

use two FX control buses to freely control the sound. (see

“FX Control Bus” on page 211 of the Parameter Guide)

Oscillator1 Filter1 Amplier1

Oscillator2

Audio Recorder

Filter2 Amplier2

Return

OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

Send

REC

PLAY

Mic In (mono)

Line In (stereo)

Insert

Eect 1–5

Master

Eect 1, 2

USB Audio

Input

Output

Routing and effect settings Effect settings for a program

Insert effects

1. Access the P-FX ROUTING> IFX page.

2. In the Effect area, select each insert effect that you

want to use.

You can press the ENTER button and choose from a list.

Tip: You can use the “Copy Insert Effect” function to

copy the effect settings from another effect. The “Swap

Insert Effect” function lets you exchange (for example)

insert effects 1 and 5.

3. In the Effect On/Off area, turn the insert effect on.

Each time you press the ENTER button, the insert effect

will turn on or off. If this is Off, the result will be the

same as if 000: No Effect is selected; the input sound will

be output without change.

4. Specify the chain setting.

If the Chain check box is selected, the insert effect will

be chained in series. Set the Chain To parameter to

“→2.”

If →2 is selected, the insert effects will be connected in

series in the order of IFX1 → IFX2.

5. Access the P-FX ROUTING> MIXER page.

6. Set the “Pan:#8,” “Bus (Bus Select),” “FX Control

Bus,” “Send1,” and “Send2” parameters to specify the

pan and routing of the signal following the insert

effect.

If Chain is On, the settings that follow the last insert

effect will be used. (FX Control Bus is an exception.)

Pan: #8: Specifies the pan.

Bus (Bus Select): Specifies the output destination.

Normally you’ll set this to L/R.

Send1, Send2: Specify the send levels to the master

effects. For this example, set them to 127.

FX Control Bus: The sound that has passed through the

insert effect is then sent to the FX control bus. This

allows you to use a different sound to control the input to

an effect. You can use two FX control buses, giving you a

wide range of possibilities for controlling the effects. (see

“FX Control Bus” on page 211 of the Parameter Guide)

7. In the P-FX ROUTING> IFX page, edit the

parameters of the insert effect you selected.

Edit the parameters in the P-IFX> IFX 1–5 pages.

Effect On/Off: Turns the insert effect on/off. This is

linked with the on/off setting of the P-FX ROUTING>

IFX page.

For details on the parameters of each effect, please see

page 219 and following of the Parameter Guide.

Double-size effects

Double-size effects (D00: St.Mltband Limiter–D13: Early

Reflections) use twice as much processing area as other

effects.

D00: St.Mltband Limiter–D10: Rotary SpeakerOD can be

used with insert effect 1, D00: St.Mltband Limiter–D09:

Vocoder can be used with insert effects 2–4, and D00:

St.Mltband Limiter–D13: Early Reflections can be used with

master effect 1.

When you use a double-size effect, the next-numbered effect

will be unavailable. For example if you’ve selected a double-

size effect for IFX1, you won’t be able to use IFX2.

Example of when a double-size effect is selected for IFX1

Master effects

1. “Send1” and “Send2” settings (P-FX ROUTING>

SEND page or P-FX ROUTUNG> MIXER page)

determine the input level to the master effects. If

“Send1” and “Send2” are set to 0, nothing will be

input to the master effects. “Send1” corresponds to

MFX1, and “Send2” corresponds to MFX2.

2. Access the P-MFX> SETUP page.

Eect On/O Eect Chain Chain To

Pan:#8 Bus Send1 Send2 FX Control Bus

Eect ParametersEect On/O

Wet/Dry

Using Effects

3. For MFX1 and MFX2, select a master effect for each.

The procedure is the same as when selecting an insert

effect. (see “Insert effects”)

Note: Double-size effects can be selected only for MFX1.

(see “Double-size effects”)

4. Press the On/Off button to turn the master effect on.

The master effect will alternate on/off each time you

press the button. If it is Off, the output of the master

effect will be muted.

5. Use Return1 and Return2 to adjust the output level of

the master effects.

Note: For each effect’s Wet/Dry setting, the Wet value is

the output level of that effect. The Dry sound will not be

output. This value is multiplied by the return setting (with

Return= 127 as ×1.0) to determine the actual output level

of the master effect.

6. Select the MFX1 or MFX2 page, and edit the effect

parameters in each page. (Please see step 7 of “Insert

effects”)

Effect settings for a combination or

song

In Combination and Sequencer modes, you can specify how

each timbre or track is routed to the insert effects, master

effects, and total effects. The procedure for adjusting settings

is similar in each mode. Here, we’ll explain the procedure

for Combination mode.

Routing

1. Access the C-FX ROUTING> BUS page.

2. Use Bus (Bus Select) to specify the bus where the

output of each timbre will be sent. If you want the

output of the timbre to be sent to insert effect 1,

choose IFX1.

The display shows the routing, the insert effects, and the

chain settings. In this example, T01 (timbre 1) is using

IFX1 and 2. T02 is using IFX3, T03 is using IFX4, and

T11, T12, T13, and T15 are using IFX5.

3. Access the C-FX ROUTING> SEND page.

Use Send1 and Send2 to specify the send levels from

each timbre to the master effects.

This setting is valid only if Bus (Bus Select) is set to L/R

or Off.

Note: The actual send level is determined by multiplying

this setting with the Send1 or Send2 value of oscillators

1 and 2 in the program selected by the timbre. If the

program’s S1 (Send1) or S2 (Send2) setting is 0, the

actual level will be 0 even if you raise the send level

setting here.

If Bus (Bus Select) is set to IFX1–IFX5, the S1 (Send1)

and S2 (Send2) (C-FX1 ROUTING> MIXER) settings

following the insert effect will determine the send levels

to the master effects.

4. Access the C-FX ROUTING> MIXER page.

FX Control Bus sends the timbre’s output to the FX

control bus. Use this when you want to use a different

sound to control the input to an effect.

You can use the two FX control buses to control effects

with a great deal of flexibility. (see “FX Control Bus” on

page 211 of the Parameter Guide)

Routing and effect settings Effect settings for audio input

Insert effects

1. Access the C-FX ROUTING> IFX page.

2. Select an insert effect for each IFX1–5, and edit its

settings.

3. Access the C-IFX page. Select the IFX1–5 pages, and

edit the effect parameters in each page.

You can adjust these settings in the same way as a

program. (see page 69)

You can use MIDI to control each effect’s dynamic

modulation (Dmod) and the “Pan (CC#8),” “Send1,”

and “Send2” following the insert effect. These settings

are controlled on the MIDI channel specified by “Ctrl

Ch.” For timbres that are routed to an insert effect, a “*”

symbol is shown to the right of the channel number

Ch01–16. If multiple timbres with differing MIDI

channel settings are routed, you can specify here the

channel where control will occur.

Master effects

You can adjust these settings in the same way as a program.

(see page 69)

Dynamic modulation (Dmod) for the master effects and

total effect can be controlled on the MIDI channel

specified by “Ctrl Ch.”

Effect settings for audio input

You can apply the KROSS's effects to an external audio

input from the LINE IN jack or MIC IN jack, and record it

on the audio recorder or pad sampler; you can also apply an

effect to the mic input or line input along with the program

or combination that you're playing. In addition, you can use

a vocoder effect (D09: Vocoder) that uses the external mic

input to control an internal sound.

Normally, the settings of the Global/Media mode G-INPUT>

AUDIO IN page are shared. For special cases, such as when

you want to have specific settings for a vocal mic, you can

adjust individual settings for a program, combination, or

MIDI sequencer song.

Routing

1. In REALTIME CONTROLS, select AUDIO IN 2 and

use the SWITCH button (MIC/LINE) to specify the

input jack that you want to enable, either Mic (LED

lit) or Line (LED unlit).

If you want to save the edited settings, press "WRITE"

(MENU button) in the popup screen that appears when

you operate a switch or knob.

2. In REALTIME CONTROLS, select AUDIO IN 1 and

use the KNOB 1 knob (GAIN) to adjust the input gain

to an appropriate setting.

3. In REALTIME CONTROLS, select AUDIO IN 1 and

use the KNOB 2 knob (MFX2/REVERB) to specify

the send level to master effect 2.

For preload sounds, either a reverb-type or a delay-type

effect is assigned to master effect 2.

4. If you want to access more detailed settings, press the

FUNCTION ("QUICK SETTING" ) button in the

popup screen that appears when you operate a button

or knob in steps 1, 2, or 3.

5. Use Bus (Bus Select) to specify the bus where the

audio input will be sent. For example if you want the

output of the device that’s connected to LINE IN to be

input to insert effect 1, specify IFX1 as the Bus (Bus

Select) setting when selecting the routing.

6. Use Send1 and Send2 to specify the send levels from

the input to the master effects.

These settings are available only if Bus Select is set to L/

R or Off.

If Bus Select is set to IFX1–5, the send levels to the

master effects are specified by the Send1 and Send2

parameters (in each FX ROUTING> SEND page) for the

signal that has passed through the insert effects.

Depending on the type of effects that you’re using on

the external audio input, and on their settings, it is

possible for feedback to occur. If this occurs, adjust the

input/output levels and the effect settings. Take special

care when using high-gain effects.

Using Effects

7. The Level parameter specifies the level of the external

audio signal that’s being input. Normally you’ll leave

this at 127.

8. The FX Control Bus sends the audio input to the FX

Control bus. Use this when you want to use another

sound to control the effect input. You can use two

separate FX Control buses to control the effects with a

great deal of flexibility. (see “FX Control Bus” on

page 211 of the Parameter Guide)

If you want the edited settings to be saved in the

KROSS, be sure to execute the Write function. Do this

using the PAGE+ (WRITE G-SET) button in the

AUDIO IN -QUICK SETTING- dialog box.

The input gain (Gain) setting will be saved in Global/

Media mode. Although you can edit this in the AUDIO

IN page or the QUICK SETTING dialog box of each

mode, you can’t save it individually for a program, etc.

9. If you want the Input settings of Global/Media mode

to be used in the other modes, check G-SET in the

"AUDIO IN" page of each mode. If you want to use

individual input settings in Program, Combination,

and Song modes, clear this check mark.

Dynamic modulation (Dmod)

Dynamic modulation (Dmod) lets you use MIDI messages

or the KROSS’s controllers for realtime control of specific

effect parameters.

Another way to control effect parameters is to use MIDI/

Tempo Sync, which allows the LFO speed of a modulation

effect or the delay time of a delay effect to be synchronized

to the tempo of the arpeggiator or sequencer.

(see “Dynamic modulation (Dmod) and Tempo

Synchronization” on page 210 of the Parameter Guide)

Arpeggiator function

Using the arpeggiator while

you play

The arpeggiator is a function that automatically generates

arpeggios (patterns of individual notes derived from a

chord). Most arpeggiators produce an arpeggio when you

play a chord on the keyboard.

The KROSS’s arpeggiator is also polyphonic, and can

produce a variety of chordal transformations or phrases

based on the pitch or timing of the notes you play on the

keyboard. These functions let you use the arpeggiator to play

a wide range of patterns including drum or bass phrases, and

guitar or keyboard backing riffs. It is also effective to use the

arpeggiator as part of the sound-design process when

creating subtly-moving pads, synth-sounds, or sound effects.

The KROSS’s Dual Arpeggiator feature lets you use two

simultaneous arpeggio patterns in Combination mode, and

Sequencer mode. You can take advantage of this in many

ways, including a separate arpeggio pattern for a drum

program, and another applied to a bass program, or using a

keyboard split or velocity to switch between two arpeggio

patterns.

The KROSS provides five preset arpeggio patterns: the

standard UP, DOWN, ALT1, ALT2, and RANDOM. You

can also create and store 1,028 of your own user patterns.

The factory settings contain a wide variety of arpeggio

patterns stored in these user locations. (see page 78)

Using the arpeggiator in Program

mode

Turning the arpeggiator on/off

1. Press the PROG button to enter Program mode, and

select a program. For details, please see “Selecting

Programs” on page 27.

2. Press ARP button (the LED will light up) to turn on

the arpeggiator.

3. When you play the keyboard, the selected arpeggio

pattern will start playing.

4. Press the ARP button once again to turn off the

arpeggiator (the button will be unlit).

If it had been playing, it will stop.

Note: The on/off status is saved when you write the

program.

Changing the tempo

• In REALTIME CONTROLS, select TEMPO and use the

KNOB 1 knob (TEMPO) or the SWITCH button (TAP)

to adjust the tempo.

The tempo can be adjusted in the range 040.00-300.00.

The SWITCH button LED blinks at quarter-note ()

intervals.

Note: The tempo setting is also saved when you write a

program.

Note: The arpeggio playback speed is affected by the

Resolution (PROG> ARP page or P-ARP> SETUP page).

Note: In the P-INPUT/CTRL> CONTROLLERS page you

can use the VALUE dial or the cursor buttons to edit the

setting.

Tip: You can synchronize the tempo with an external MIDI

device. (see page 117)

If the KROSS is set to synchronize with an external

device, you can’t adjust the tempo on the KROSS itself.

Arpeggiator control (MOD)

You can control the duration, strength, and rhythmic feel of

the arpeggiated notes.

1. Access the PROG> ARP page.

Use the PAGE+ button (or PAGE− button) to select the

page.

2. Use the cursor buttons ◄►▲▼ to select the

following parameters to edit.

3. Use the VALUE dial etc. to edit the value.

The chord you played on the

keyboard is sounded as an

arpeggio (broken chord)

Arpeggiator function

Changing the length of the arpeggiated notes

• By selecting the arpeggiator control [GATE] and

adjusting the value, you can change the duration of the

arpeggiated notes.

Negative “–” values make the notes shorter, and positive

“+” values lengthen them. If this is 00, the note length

will be as specified by the program parameter Gate (P-

ARP> SETUP page).

Note: It is effective to adjust the Release on the PROG>

TONE page.

Note: You can also change the duration of the arpeggiated

notes by adjusting ARP-GATE (the KNOB 2 knob) in the

TEMPO row of REALTIME CONTROLS. (Please see

page 308 of the Parameter Guide)

Changing the strength of the arpeggiated notes

• By selecting the arpeggiator control [VEL] (Velocity)

and adjusting the value, you can change the strength of

the arpeggiated notes.

Negative “–” values make the notes weaker, and positive

“+” values strengthen them. If this is 00, the strength of

the notes will be as specified by the program parameter

Velocity (P-ARP> SETUP page).

Note: It is effective to adjust Cutoff, Resonance, and EG

Intensity in the PROG> TONE page.

Giving a shuffle feel to the arpeggio pattern

• By selecting the arpeggiator control [SWING] and

adjusting the value, you can shift the timing of the even-

numbered arpeggiated notes forward or backward.

Negative “–” settings will make the even-numbered notes

earlier; positive “+” settings will make them later. If this

is at the center position (12 o’clock), the setting will be as

specified by the program parameter Swing (P-ARP>

SETUP page).

Note: Swing has no effect on the preset patterns.

Arpeggio pattern selection and

operation settings

In the PROG> ARP page you can select an arpeggio pattern

and specify how the arpeggiator will function.

1. Access the PROG> ARP page.

2. Use the cursor buttons ◄►▲▼ to select the

following parameters to edit.

3. Use the VALUE dial etc. to edit the value. Press the

ENTER button to switch the setting of the check box.

Selecting an arpeggio pattern

•In the Arpeggio Pattern Select area, select an arpeggio

pattern.

Preset: UP–Preset: Choose an arpeggio pattern from

RANDOM or 0000–1023.

With the factory settings, a variety of arpeggio patterns

are provided in the range 0000–1023.

Preset: UP

Preset: DOWN

Preset: ALT1

Preset: ALT2

Preset: RANDOM

Playing arpeggios across multiple octaves

•Use the Octave setting to specify the range of 1–4

octaves in which the arpeggio will be generated.

Arpeggiator control: [GATE], [VEL], [SWING]

Operation settings

Arpeggio Pattern Select

DOWN

ALT1

ALT2

RANDOM

Octave: 4

Using the arpeggiator while you play Using the arpeggiator in Combination mode

Changing the note value of the arpeggiated notes

• The Resolution parameter lets you set the note value of

the arpeggiated notes, over a range from  3 –  .

Sounding an arpeggio in the order of the pitches in

the chord you played

• The Sort parameter lets you select whether the notes of

the arpeggio will be sounded in the order of the pitches

in the chord you played (regardless of the order in which

you actually played the notes), or in the order that you

played the notes.

Checked: the arpeggio will play each note in the order of

its pitch, regardless of the order that you actually played

the notes.

Unchecked: the arpeggio will trigger each note in the

order that you actually played the notes.

Setting the arpeggio to continue playing even after

you have taken your hand off the keyboard

• The Latch parameter lets you select whether the

arpeggio will continue playing when you take your hand

off the keyboard, or whether the arpeggio will stop.

Checked: The arpeggio will continue playing even after

you remove your hand from the keyboard.

Unchecked: The arpeggio will stop playing when you

remove your hand from the keyboard.

Synchronizing the arpeggiator to your keyboard

timing

• The Key Sync. parameter lets you specify whether the

arpeggio will begin at the moment you play the

keyboard, or whether it will always play in

synchronization to the MIDI clock tempo.

Checked: The arpeggio pattern will start from the

beginning when you press a key. This setting is suitable

when you want the arpeggio to start from the beginning

of the measure as you are playing in realtime.

Unchecked: The arpeggiator will synchronize to the

MIDI clock timing.

Sounding both the arpeggio notes and the notes you

play

• The Keyboard parameter lets you specify whether the

notes that you play on the keyboard will be sounded

along with the arpeggiated notes.

Checked: The notes you play on the keyboard and the

notes played by the arpeggiator will both be heard.

Unchecked: Only the arpeggiated notes will sound.

Specifying the zone where the arpeggiator

will function

In P-ARP> SCAN ZONE page you can specify the range of

notes (keys) and velocities where the arpeggiator will

function.

Using the arpeggiator in

Combination mode

In Combination mode the KROSS provides dual arpeggiators,

allowing you to run two arpeggio patterns simultaneously.

1. In Combination mode, select a combination. (see

“Selecting Combinations” on page 45)

2. Each time you press the ARP button, the arpeggiator

will turn on or off.

Tip: As you select various combinations, you’ll notice

that the ARP button LED will light up for some

combinations. (see “Linking the arpeggiator to programs

or combinations” on page 77)

3. If the arpeggiator is on, an arpeggio will start playing

when you play the keyboard.

In some combinations or songs, depending on the

arpeggiator A and B settings, the arpeggiator might not

start even if you turn on the ARP and play the keyboard.

(see page 77)

4. In REALTIME CONTROLS, select TEMPO and use

the KNOB 1 knob (TEMPO) or the SWITCH button

(TAP) to adjust the tempo.

The ARP button and the KNOB 1 (TEMPO) knob and

SWITCH (TAP) button in the TEMPO row of

REALTIME CONTROLS apply to both arpeggiators A

and B. Their state is saved when the combination is

written.

Selecting an arpeggio pattern and adjusting

settings

You can select an arpeggio pattern and specify how the

arpeggiator will function.

1. Access the COMBI> ARP page.

2. Notice how the arpeggio changes as described in

“Arpeggiator control (MOD)” on page 73, and

“Arpeggio pattern selection and operation settings”

on page 74.

ON, UP

Sort

OFF, UP

Sort

1324

Timbre Assign BArpeggiator Run B

Arpeggiator control: [GATE], [VEL], [SWING]

Adjusting settings

Arpeggio Pattern Select

Timbre Assign A

Arpeggiator function

Select the arpeggiator(s) that will run

Use the Arpeggiator Run setting to enable the arpeggiator(s)

that you want to use. The arpeggiator(s) that this is on will

run when the ARP button is on.

However, the arpeggiator will only play a timbre if the table

next to the check boxes assigns arpeggiator A or B to a

timbre: T 1–16. You change these settings in C-ARP>

ASSIGN page Arpeggiator Assign. (see page 76)

Arpeggiator-A, Arpeggiator-B

For each arpeggiator A and B, you can adjust settings for

Pattern Select, Resolution, Octave, Sort, Latch, Key

Sync, and Keyboard. (see page 74)

Arpeggiator settings in Combination

and Sequencer modes

In Combination and Sequencer modes, you can use two

arpeggio patterns simultaneously, thanks to the KROSS’s

dual arpeggiator functionality. The settings in each of these

modes are adjusted in a similar way.

The following example shows how to adjust settings in

Combination mode.

The dual arpeggiator functionality lets you do the following

things.

• Assign an arpeggiator for each timbre. Choose from Off,

(arpeggiator) A, or (arpeggiator) B. →step 5

• Independently specify whether A and B will run.

→step 6

• Select an arpeggio pattern and set parameters

independently for A and B. →step 7

• Select Scan Zone page settings so that you can use the

keyboard range or playing velocity to switch between

normal playing and arpeggiated playing, or to switch

between arpeggiators A and B. →step 8

• Adjust settings for timbres that will be silent when the

arpeggiator is Off, and will sound only when the

arpeggiator is On. →step 10

Arpeggiator settings

1. Select COMBI> PROG page.

Select programs for the timbres that you wish to use. For

this example, select any desired program for timbres 1–4.

For the timbres that you want to use, set their Status to

INT. For this example, set Status to INT for timbres 1–4,

and Off for timbres 5–16.

2. Access the C-TIMBRE> MIDI page.

Set the MIDI Channel to match the Gch or global MIDI

channel (set in G-MIDI> BASIC page MIDI Channel).

For timbres 1–4, set MIDI Channel to Gch.

3. Access the C-ARP> ASSIGN page.

4. Set “Temp” to specify the tempo.

This is the same as for a program. However, the tempo is

shared by both arpeggiators A and B.

5. Adjust “ARP Assign” settings.

Assign arpeggiator A or B to the desired timbres. Each

timbre will be played by the arpeggiator that has been

assigned to it.

6. In the C-ARP> A, B pages, set the Run (Arpeggiator

Run) parameter.

Turn this on for the arpeggiator(s) that you want to use.

The arpeggiator(s) checked here will run when the ARP

button is turned on.

With the settings shown in the display for steps 2 and 3,

turning the ARP button on will cause arpeggiator A to

run for timbre 1, and arpeggiator B to run for timbres 2

and 3. When the ARP button is turned off, timbres 1–4

will sound as a layer.

If all timbres ARP Assign status are set to Off, or if Run

(Arpeggiator Run) is unchecked, the arpeggiator will not

function.

7. On the C-ARP> A, B pages, set the parameters for

arpeggiators A and B.

The parameters for A and B are the same as for a

program. (see page 74)

8. In the Scan Zone A/B page, specify the range in which

arpeggiators A and B will function.

The parameters for A and B are the same as for a

program.

You can use keyboard ranges or velocity ranges to use

one or both of the arpeggiators, or to switch between

arpeggiators A and B. By using the C-ZONE/DELAY>

KEY ZONE, and VEL ZONE page to set keyboard and

velocity ranges in conjunction with each other, you can

create even more variations.

9. If you wish to save the edited combination settings in

internal memory, turn off memory protect in Global/

Using the arpeggiator while you play Linking the arpeggiator to programs or combinations

Media mode, and write the combination. (see

pages 116, 122)

10.The “Status,” “MIDI Channel” and “Arp Assign”

settings shown in the display of steps 1 to 3 can be

adjusted so that certain timbres will sound only when

the arpeggiator is On, and will be silent when the

arpeggiator is Off.

Combination PIANO: 032 Piano Trio

Although this is a somewhat sophisticated editing technique,

we will describe the settings of one of the preset

combinations as an example.

When you play a specific region of the keyboard, this

combines settings that cause the arpeggiator to play an

arpeggio using different sounds than what’s being played by

the keyboard, with other settings that cause the arpeggiator

sounds to remain completely unplayed when the arpeggiator

is off.

Before you play, make sure that the global MIDI channel (G-

MIDI> BASIC MIDI Channel) is set to 01.

Select combination PIANO: 032 Piano Trio, turn the ARP

button on, and play. To make the arpeggiator performance

more clearly audible, turn off the DRUM TRACK button.

• Arpeggiator A is assigned to timbres 2, 3 and 14

(COMBI> ARP page). When you play the keyboard, the

bass riff arpeggio pattern will sound timbres 2 and 3.

•The A Bottom Key and Top K ey (C-ARP> SCAN

ZONE page) are set so that arpeggiator A will function

only for notes C4 and lower.

• Arpeggiator A is also assigned to timbre 14, but this is so

that the timbres 2 and 3 program will sound only when

the arpeggiator is on.

Notice the timbre settings for timbres 2, 3 and 14.

• If the arpeggiator is off, playing the keyboard will sound

the timbre(s) that are set to Gch or to the global MIDI

channel (in this case, 01). Since the MIDI Channel of

timbres 2 and 3 is set to 02, it will not sound. Timbre 14

is set to Gch, but since the “Status” is Off it will not

sound.

• Notes from any MIDI channels that are assigned to a

timbre will trigger the arpeggiator. In this case, these will

be MIDI Channel 02 and Gch (global MIDI channel).

When the arpeggiator is on, playing the keyboard will

trigger arpeggiator A, which is assigned to timbre 14

(Gch). Timbres 2 and 3 will be sounded by arpeggiator

A. Since the Status of timbre 14 is Off, it will not sound.

• Since the Status of timbre 14 is Off, it will not sound,

regardless of whether the arpeggiator is on or off. It is a

dummy timbre that causes timbres 2 and 3 to sound only

when the arpeggiator is on.

Combination BASS: 035 Jazzy Guitar

Before you play, make sure that the global MIDI channel (G-

MIDI> BASIC MIDI Channel) is set to 01.

Select combination BASS: 035 Jazzy Guitar, turn the ARP

button on, and play.

• Arpeggiator A is assigned to timbres 6, 7, 8, and 14, and

arpeggiator B is assigned to timbres 4, 5, and 9. When

you press any note of the entire keyboard, the drum

programs of timbres 6–8 will be sounded by the arpeggio

pattern of arpeggiator A. When you play the keyboard

below B3, you’ll hear a bass line arpeggio play bass

programs sounded by timbres 4, 5, and 9.

• The arpeggiator A parameters “Bottom Key” and “Top

Key” (C-ARP> SCAN ZONE page) are set so that

arpeggiator A will run for the entire keyboard.

•The B Bottom Key and Top Ke y (C-ARP> SCAN

ZONE page) are set so that arpeggiators B will function

only for the note B3 and below.

• Arpeggiator A is assigned to timbre 14 as well, but this

setting is so that timbres 6 to 8 will sound only when the

arpeggiator is on. Please see the preceding section

“Combination PIANO: 032 Piano Trio.”

Linking the arpeggiator to programs

or combinations

You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings that are

written to a program or combination will be recalled when

you switch programs or combinations, or whether the current

arpeggiator settings will be maintained.

With the factory settings, the former is selected. Use the

latter when you want to keep the same arpeggio pattern

running, and change only the program sound.

This setting is made in “LOAD ARP WHEN CHANGING

(GLOBAL> SYSTM page). (see page 116)

Timbre Status MIDI Channel Assign

2, 3 INT 02 A

14 Off Gch A

Arpeggiator function

Creating a user arpeggio

pattern

About user arpeggio patterns

The patterns that can be selected on the KROSS’s

arpeggiator are called “arpeggio patterns.” There are two

types of arpeggio patterns: preset arpeggio patterns and user

arpeggio patterns.

Preset arpeggio patterns:

There are five patterns; UP, DOWN, ALT1, ALT2, and

RANDOM.

The functionality of these patterns is fixed, and cannot be

edited.

User arpeggio patterns:

There are 1280 patterns - 0000–1279 - which can develop

chords or phrases in a wide variety of ways, based on the

pitches that you play on the keyboard or the timing with

which you play them.

In Global ARP PATTERN, Setup you can modify these user

arpeggio patterns, or create a new user arpeggio pattern from

an initialized condition. Edited user arpeggio patterns can be

written to internal memory areas 0000–1279. (see page 124)

In Media mode, you can also save user arpeggio patterns to

media.

Editing a user arpeggio pattern

If you want to edit a user arpeggio pattern, you must

first make sure that memory protect is unchecked. (see

page 116)

If you enter this mode from the Program mode, your editing

will apply to the arpeggio pattern that’s specified for the

selected program.

1. In Program mode, select a program which uses the

arpeggio pattern that you wish to edit, or a program

that you wish to use as a basis for editing the arpeggio

pattern.

2. Press the ARP button to turn the arpeggiator on (the

button will light up).

Tip: Even if you entered Global/Media mode from a

program in which the arpeggiator was turned off, you can

use the ARP button to turn it on.

3. Select the Global ARP PATTERN> SETUP page.

Note: If you move from Program mode, arpeggiator “A”

will be automatically selected.

4. In “Pattern,” select the arpeggio pattern that you wish

to edit.

If a blank pattern is selected, playing the keyboard will

not start an arpeggio. Although preset arpeggio patterns

can be selected, they cannot be edited.

When you edit a user arpeggio pattern, the changes will

have an effect anytime that this pattern is used in

Program, Combination, or Song.

5. In “Length,” specify the length of the pattern.

After the pattern has played for the length specified, it

will return to the beginning. This setting can also be

changed during or after editing. For this example, set it to

08.

Note: For the preload arpeggio patterns 0000–1023, simply

changing the “Length” can significantly change the

character of the pattern. Try changing the length and

listening to the result.

6. Adjust settings for the “Resolution,” “Octave,”

“Sort,” “Latch,” “(Key) Sync.,” and “Kbd

(Keyboard)” parameters.

These are program parameters, but they can be set from

here as well.

If after accessing this page from Program mode, you

modify these parameters and wish to keep your

changes, return to Program mode and write the

program. These parameters are not saved by “Write

Arpeggio Pattern.”

For this example, select the settings shown in step 3.

7. In ARP PATTERN> MODE page, specify how the

arpeggio will be developed.

8. Access the ARP PATTERN> EDIT page.

A pattern consists of Steps and Tones.

• Step: Each user arpeggio pattern has up to 64 steps.

Starting with the first step, the arpeggiator will play

notes at intervals of the note value specified by the

Resolution. The vertical lines of the grid indicate the

steps.

• Ton e: Each step can sound a chord of up to 12 tones

(Tone N o. 00–11).

9. Enter one or more Tones at each Step. Use the cursor

buttons ◄►▲▼ to select the Step, and press the

ENTER button. The tone will alternate on/off each

time you press the button. In the illustration above,

Tone No.:04 and Step No.:05 are indicated.

10.Use Step to select the step; then specify the Pitch

(Pitch Offset), Gate, Vel (Velocity) and Flam for each

step. (Please see step 3 of “An example of creating a

pattern”)

Pattern Length

Octave

Resolution

Tone No.

Step No.

Length: 8

Creating a user arpeggio pattern Editing a user arpeggio pattern

An example of creating a pattern

1. Access the ARP PATTERN> EDIT page.

2. Enter the tones shown in the following illustration.

3. When you play the keyboard as shown in the

illustration, the arpeggiator will begin playing.

Tone 0 corresponds to the pitch of the lowest key of the

chord you play on the keyboard. (If Sort is unchecked, it

will correspond to the pitch of the first note you play.)

4. For steps 01–08, adjust settings for “Pitch (Pitch

Offset),” “Gate,” “Vel (Velocity),” and “Flam.”

Pitch (Pitch Offset): This offsets the pitch of the

arpeggio note in semitones up or down. You can input the

same tone for each step, and change the Pitch Offset

value for each to create a melody using a single tone. (see

“Melody pattern”)

Gate: Specifies the length of the arpeggio note for each

step. With a setting of LGT (Legato), the note will

continue sounding either until the next note of the same

tone or until the end of the pattern. With a setting of Off,

the note will not sound.

Vel (Velocity): This specifies the strength of the note.

With a setting of Key, the note will sound at the strength

of how it was actually played.

The Gate and Veloc ity settings you select here will be

valid if the Gate and Velo city parameters (P-ARP>

SETUP page) of the program that was selected in

Program mode are set to Step. If these parameters have

a setting other than Step, the Gate and Velocity settings

that were specified for each individual step will be

ignored, and all notes of the arpeggio will sound

according to the settings in P-ARP> SETUP page. Be

sure to verify the settings of the program.

When specifying Gate, Velocity, and Swing, set the

PROG> ARP page parameters [GATE], [VEL], and

[SWING] to +00.

5. To rename the user arpeggio pattern, use the Rename

Arpeggio Pattern function. (“Rename Arpeggio

Pattern” on page 179 of the Parameter Guide)

6. Be sure to execute the Write operation if you want the

edited user arpeggio pattern to be saved in internal

memory. (→ p.124)

If you turn off the power without writing, the edited

content is lost.

7. If you want to save the state of the program at the

same time, return to program mode and write the

program. (→ p.122)

Melody pattern

1. Access the ARP PATTERN> EDIT page.

2. Specify tone 0 for Step 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 07, 08 (all

other than 06).

3. Specify the pitch. Set the “Step” 02 “Pitch” to +10,

“Step” 05 “Pitch” to +12, and the “Step” 08 “Pitch” to

–2.

4. Play a single key; the arpeggio will begin playing.

Chordal pattern

1. Access the ARP PATTERN> EDIT page.

2. In Step 01, set tone 01.

3. In “Step” 03, 04, 06, and 08, set tones 00–04.

4. Select “Step” 01, and set “Gate” to LGT (Legato).

Arpeggiator function

5. Select “Step” 06, and set “Gate” to LGT (Legato).

Tip: To simulate the timing nuances of a strummed guitar

chord, select Flam. In Program mode, select an acoustic

guitar program, and choose the user arpeggio pattern that

you created here. In the P-ARP> SETUP page, set Gate to

Step.

Then return to the ARP PATTERN> EDIT page. For odd-

numbered steps, set Flam to a positive (+) value. For even-

numbered steps, set Flam to a negative (–) value.

Drum pattern

You can use the arpeggiator to play a rhythm pattern by

using “Fixed Note” with a drum program.

1. In Program mode, select a drum kit program.

For this example, select the preset program DRUMS/

SFX: 000 Basic Kit 1.

2. In ARP PATTERN, select the MODE page, and

parameter settings.

(Arpeggio) Tone Mode: Set this to Fixed Note. This will

cause the tone to always sound at the specified pitch.

Mode (Fixed Note Mode): If you set this to Trigger All

Tones, playing a single note on the keyboard will sound

all tones.

If you set this to Trigger As Played, the tones will be

sounded according to the notes that you play on the

keyboard. (see page 169 of the Parameter Guide)

3. For each “Tone,” specify “Fixed Note No.”

Access the FIXED Setup dialog box. Here you can assign

a different drumsample (note number) of the drum kit to

each fixed note.

For this example, set Ton e No. and Fixed Note No. as

follows.

The drumsample corresponding to each note number will

differ depending on the drum kit. It’s convenient to use

the keyboard to audition the drum sounds, select Fixed

Note No. and press the ENTER button, and then press a

key to enter the note number. To confirm, press the

ENTER button once again and then press the EXIT

button.

4. Access the ARP PATTERN> EDIT page.

Let’s input the following rhythm pattern.

5. Enter the kick (Tone00).

Set tone 00 (B2) of Step 01 and 09.

6. Enter the snare (Tone01).

Set tone 01 (D3) of Step 05 and 13.

7. Enter the closed hi-hat (Tone04).

Set tone 04 (F#3) of Step 01, 03, 05, 09, 11, and 13.

8. Enter the open hi-hat (Tone05).

Set tone 05 (A#3) for Step 07 and 15.

9. If “Mode (Fixed Note Mode)” is set to Trigger All

Tones, playing a single note on the keyboard will cause

the rhythm pattern to play.

Playing two notes on the keyboard will cause only the

kick (Tone00) and snare (Tone01) to play. In this way, the

number of keys that you play will be played by the same

number of tones.

10.Set the parameters for each step.

Use Vel (Velocit y) etc. to add accents to the rhythm

pattern.

The Gate and Vel (Vel ocity ) settings you select here

will be valid if the Gate and Ve locit y parameters (P-

ARP> SETUP page) of the program selected in

Program mode are set to Step. If these parameters have

a setting other than Step, the Gate and Velocity that

were specified for each individual step will be ignored,

and the notes of the arpeggio will be sounded according

to the

ettings of the P-ARP> SETUP page. Check the

settings of the program.

When specifying Gate, Velocity, and Swing, set the

PROG> ARP page parameters [GATE], [VEL], and

[SWING] to +00.

Tone No. Fixed Note No.

0B2 (kick)

1D3 (snare)

4 F#3 (closed hi-hat)

5 A#3 (open hi-hat)

Regarding arpeggiator synchronization “Key Sync.” parameter

Dual arpeggiator editing

Here we will use a combination as an example in our

explanation.

The same procedure applies when editing an arpeggio

pattern in Sequencer mode.

If you have entered this mode from the Combination mode,

the arpeggio pattern selected by the combination will be

affected by your editing.

1. In Combination mode, select a combination that uses

the arpeggio pattern that you wish to edit.

For this example, select a combination where both

arpeggiators A and B are assigned.

2. Press the ARP button to turn on the arpeggiator (the

button will light up).

Even if the arpeggiator had been turned off when you

moved here, you can use the ARP button to turn it on.

However, if Arpeggiator Run A or B are not checked,

and if Arpeggiator Assign, is set to off, then the

arpeggiator will not function.

3. Select the ARP PATTERN> SETUP page.

4. Press the ENTER button at Arpeggio Select A or B to

specify the arpeggiator that you want to edit.

If this is A, your editing will apply to the parameters and

user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator A.

If this is B, your editing will apply to the parameters and

user arpeggio pattern of arpeggiator B.

5. Switch between arpeggiators A and B, and edit their

respective user arpeggio patterns.

If you want to stop one of the arpeggiators, return to

Combination mode, access the COMBI> ARP page and

turn Arpeggiator Run off.

6. To modify the name of a user arpeggio pattern, use the

“Rename Arpeggio Pattern” function. (see page 179 of

the Parameter Guide)

7. If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio pattern in

internal memory, you must write the user arpeggio

pattern.

In this case, both user arpeggio patterns will be written

simultaneously. If you turn off the power without writing,

the edited contents will be lost.

8. If you wish to save the state of the combination at the

same time, return to Combination mode and write the

combination. (see page 122)

Note: When editing a user arpeggio pattern, pay attention to

the global MIDI channel, the channel of each track, and the

arpeggiator assignments, and make sure that the arpeggiator

you are hearing is the pattern that you wish to edit.

Regarding arpeggiator

synchronization

“Key Sync.” parameter

The timing of the arpeggiator notes depends on the state of

the arpeggiator Key Sync. check box.

If this box is checked, the arpeggiator will start running at

the first note-on that occurs after you’ve taken your hands

completely off the keyboard.

If this box is unchecked, the arpeggiator will run in

synchronization with the internal/external MIDI clock.

Below, we will explain how synchronization occurs when

the Key Sync. check box is not checked (Synchronization

with Song Start and with MIDI realtime Start messages are

excluded).

Synchronization between arpeggiators

A and B

In Combination and Sequencer modes, the two arpeggiators

can run simultaneously. In this case, if one arpeggiator is

already running, and you then run the other arpeggiator (with

“Key Sync.” unchecked), the second arpeggiator will

synchronize to the “ (Tempo)” based on the first

arpeggiator.

If Key Sync. is checked, arpeggiators A and B will run

independently, each at their own tempo.

Synchronization with the drum track

If you want the arpeggiator to synchronize to the drum track

pattern that’s currently playing, uncheck the Key Sync.

setting. In this case, the arpeggiator will synchronize to the

beat of the drum track pattern that’s currently playing.

Note: If you want the drum track pattern to synchronize to

the arpeggiator that’s currently running, turn on the “Sync”

setting (the Trigger parameter of the DRUM TRACK>

PATTERN page of each mode).

Synchronizing with the step sequencer

If you want the arpeggiator to synchronize with the loop

pattern being played by the step sequencer, clear the Key

Sync check box. In this case, the arpeggiator will

synchronize with the beat based on the loop pattern that’s

currently playing.

Synchronization between the arpeggiator

and sequencer in Sequencer mode

If song playback is stopped

• The arpeggiator will synchronize to the “ (Tempo)”

based on the internal MIDI clock timing.

While playing back or recording a song

• The arpeggiator will synchronize to the beat based on the

timing of the song.

Arpeggiator function

Synchronization with Song Start

• If the arpeggiator is turned on (ARP button is on) and is

running, it will reset to the beginning of its arpeggio

pattern when a Song Start message is received. (This is

unaffected by the Key Sync. setting.)

• In Sequencer mode when Key Sync. is unchecked and

the ARP button is on, if you start the arpeggiator by

pressing a key during the pre-count before recording

begins, the arpeggiator will start its pattern as soon as

recording begins, and will be recorded.

Synchronization with external sequencer

playback

If “ (Tempo)” is EXT (i.e., if G-MIDI> BASIC MIDI Clock

is External MIDI or External USB) in Program,

Combination, or Sequencer modes, the arpeggiator will

synchronize to the MIDI timing Clock and Start messages

received from a connected MIDI device.

Note: Synchronization will occur in the same way if the

MIDI Clock is set to Auto and MIDI timing clock messages

are being received from a connected MIDI device.

Synchronization with external MIDI timing clock

The arpeggiator will synchronize to the “ (Tempo)” timing

of the external MIDI timing clock.

Synchronization with MIDI realtime Start messages

If the arpeggiator is turned on and running, an incoming

MIDI realtime Start message will reset the arpeggiator to the

beginning of its pattern (This is unaffected by the Key Sync.

setting).

Drum Track function

Performing with the Drum

Track function

The Drum Track function makes it easy to play the KROSS’s

high-quality drum programs using a wide variety of Drum

Track patterns.

It provides a convenient way for you to hear Drum Track

patterns while you try out various phrases on a program or

combination, or work out the outline of your song. Then,

when you’ve come up with some ideas, you can use the Auto

Song Setup function to immediately start recording in

Sequencer mode.

You can use preset drum patterns that cover a wide range of

musical styles.

The Drum Track pattern will start immediately when you

press the DRUM TRACK button, or when you play the

keyboard after pressing the DRUM TRACK button. If

you’re starting the pattern by playing the keyboard, you have

the option of starting it by using a specific range of notes or

velocities.

The Drum Track can also play in synchronization with the

arpeggiator.

In Program mode, the drum track has a dedicated mixer

channel and effect routing, allowing you to control the drum

track independently from the sound of the program itself. In

Combination and Sequencer modes, the drum track is

handled as a conventional timbre or track, allowing you to

select programs, and specify the effect routing in the same

way as for conventional timbres or tracks.

Using the Drum Track function in

Program mode

Playing and stopping the Drum Track

1. In Program mode, select a program. (see “Selecting

Programs” on page 27)

2. Press the DRUM TRACK button to turn the Drum

Track on.

The DRUM TRACK button will light up or blink,

depending on the setting (Trigger Mode) of the program.

If lit: The Drum Track pattern will start according to the

Sync setting. When you turn it off, the pattern will stop.

(This will occur if the Trigger Mode parameter is set to

Start Immediately.)

If blinking: The Drum Track pattern will be ready to start.

It will start when you play the keyboard or when a MIDI

note-on message is received. (This will occur if the

Trigger Mode parameter is set to Wait KBD Trigger.)

3. Press the DRUM TRACK button once again to stop

the Drum Track (the button will be unlit).

Changing the tempo

• Use the TEMPO controls of REALTIME CONTROLS

to adjust the tempo of the KROSS. (→ p.15)

Selecting the Drum Track pattern and Drum

Track program

1. In the Program mode page P-DRUM

TRACK>PATTERN, use Pattern No. to select a drum

track pattern.

2. In the P-DRUM TRACK> PROGRAM page, the

Drum Track Program parameter selects the program

that will play the Drum Track patterns.

Note: You can only select programs from the DRUM/

SFX category.

Note: If you’ve selected an empty pattern, the DRUM

TRACK button will not function.

Setting the volume, mute, and solo for the

drum track pattern

In the PROG> MIXER page you can edit the volume, mute,

and solo settings. (see page 32)

Preset 001...772 Preset Drum Track patterns

Drum Track function

Using the Drum Track function in

Combination mode

Selecting a combination and turning the

Drum Track function on/off

1. Press the COMBI button to enter Combination mode,

and select the desired combination. (see “Selecting

Combinations” on page 45)

2. Press the DRUM TRACK button to turn the Drum

Track on/off. For details, please see the Program

mode sections “Playing and stopping the Drum

Track”, and “Changing the tempo”.

Selecting a Drum Track pattern and Drum

Track program

Unlike its functionality in Program mode, the Drum Track

function in Combination mode does not have its own

dedicated track (timbre). The program that plays the Drum

Track pattern will use the timbre that you specify.

1. In the COMBI> PROG page, select the timbre that

you want to use for the drum track, and then select

the Drum Track program.

In the following illustration, we’ve selected timbre 5 for

use by the drum track.

2. In the C-TIMBRE>MIDI page, specify the MIDI

channel of the timbre used by the drum track.

Be aware that if another timbre uses the same MIDI

channel, that timbre will also be played.

3. In the C-DRUM TRACK>CHANNEL page, use

Output to specify the output MIDI channel for the

drum track.

Specify the drum track’s MIDI channel Output. Set this

to match the MIDI Channel of the timbre that you

specified in step 2.

4. Access the C-DRUM TRACK> PATTERN page.

Use Pattern No. to select the Drum Track pattern.

Note: 000: If you select Off, it will not be possible to turn

the DRUM TRACK button on.

5. Press the DRUM TRACK button to verify that the

pattern plays correctly.

The method of triggering will depend on the Trigger

settings.

Drum Track function settings Drum Track function settings in Program mode

Drum Track function settings

Drum Track function settings in

Program mode

Starting/stopping the drum track

1. Access the Program Mode P-DRUM

TRACK>PATTERN page.

2. “Trigger Mode” specifies how the Drum Track

pattern will be triggered.

Start Immediately: When you press the DRUM TRACK

button to turn it on, the LED will light up and the Drum

Track pattern will start according to the Sync setting. It

will stop when you press the DRUM TRACK button to

turn it off.

Wait KBD Trigger: When you press the DRUM

TRACK button to turn it on, the LED will blink and the

Drum Track pattern will wait to start. When you play the

keyboard or receive a MIDI note-on, the Drum Track

pattern will start according to the Sync setting.

3. Specify the Sync setting.

Off (unchecked): The Drum Track pattern will not

synchronize to the arpeggiator that’s currently running,

but will start immediately.

On (checked): The Drum Track pattern will synchronize

to the arpeggiator that’s currently running.

4. If “Trigger Mode” is set to Wait KBD Trigger, specify

the “Latch” setting. “Latch” specifies whether the

Drum Track pattern will continue playing even after

you take your hand off the keyboard.

Off (unchecked): If the DRUM TRACK button is on

(the LED will blink), the pattern will start when you play

the keyboard (note-on). The pattern will stop when you

release the keyboard (note-off).

On (checked): If the DRUM TRACK button is on (the

LED will blink), the pattern will start when you play the

keyboard (note-on). The pattern will continue when you

release the keyboard (note-off). The pattern will stop

when you turn the DRUM TRACK button off (the LED

will go dark).

5. If “Trigger Mode” is set to Wait KBD Trigger, specify

the Keyboard Zone and Velocity Zone.

These settings specify the range of keys and velocities

that will trigger the Drum Track pattern when you play

the keyboard (or receive a note-on).

Saving the on/off status

If “Trigger Mode” is set to Wait KBD Trigger, the drum

track’s on/off status can be saved in the program.

If “Trigger Mode” is set to Start Immediately, the drum

track’s on/off status will always be saved as “off,” regardless

of the state of the DRUM TRACK button.

MIDI transmission and reception for the

drum track

In Program mode, the Drum Track function transmits and

receives on the following MIDI channels.

Receive: If you’re controlling the triggering by playing the

keyboard, the drum track will receive on the global MIDI

channel.

Transmit: The drum track will transmit on the MIDI

channel that’s specified by the Drum Track Prog MIDI Ch

(default: channel 10) which can be found on the G-MIDI>

OUT page. (Note data etc. of the Drum Track program will

be transmitted.)

Note: MIDI transmission of the pattern data is enabled if

Drum Track Prog MIDI Out is selected. The default setting

is off (unselected).

The Drum Track program does not transmit or receive

program changes.

Drum Track function settings in

Combination mode

MIDI transmission and reception for the

drum track

In Combination mode, the Drum Track function transmits

and receives on the following MIDI channels.

Receive: If you’re controlling the triggering by playing the

keyboard, the drum track will receive on the global MIDI

channel.

Transmit: The drum track will transmit on the MIDI

channel that’s specified by the Output (C-DRUM TRACK>

CHANNEL) setting of each combination.

Set this to match the MIDI channel of the timbre you’ve

specified for the drum program.

If the timbre’s Status (COMBI> PROG) is EXT or EX2, the

note data etc. of the Drum Track pattern will be transmitted.

Drum Track function

Drum Track function settings in

Sequencer mode

The structure of parameters related to the drum track

function is the same in Sequencer mode as in Combination

mode. Assign the Drum Track program to the desired track

1–16.

However, while a combination triggers the Drum Track

pattern on the global MIDI channel, a song triggers the

Drum Track pattern on the MIDI channel specified by the

Input (S-DRUM TRACK> CHANNEL). Normally you’ll

set this to Tch. With the Tch setting, the MIDI channel of the

track selected by Track Select will automatically be used as

the trigger channel.

For details, please see “Selecting a Drum Track pattern and

Drum Track program” on page 84.

In Sequencer mode you can use the Drum Track function

while realtime-recording a song track or pattern.

The note-on/off data transmitted by the Drum Track pattern

can be recorded as events in a track or pattern.

You can’t use note data from the internal sequencer as a

trigger to start patterns for the Drum Track function.

When you’ve used the Drum Track function with a program

or combination to come up with an idea for a song, you can

then use the Auto Song Setup function to immediately start

realtime-recording. (see page 60)

MIDI transmission and reception for the

drum track

In Sequencer mode, the Drum Track function transmits and

receives on the following MIDI channels.

Receive: The drum track will receive on the MIDI channel

specified by the Input (S-DRUM TRACK> CHANNEL)

setting of each song. Normally you’ll set this to Tch and use

the KROSS’s keyboard to control the triggering.

Transmit: The drum track will transmit on the MIDI

channel specified by the Output (S-DRUM TRACK>

CHANNEL) setting of each song. Set this to match the MIDI

channel of the MIDI track where you’ve assigned the drum

program.

If the track’s Status (SEQ> PROG) is BTH, EXT, or EX2,

note data etc. of the Drum Track pattern will be transmitted.

Synchronizing the Drum Track

function

The Trigger “Sync” parameter

The trigger timing of a drum track will depend on the setting

of its Trigger Sync parameter. (Please see page 53, page 86

of the Parameter Guide)

On (checked): The trigger timing will be quantized to the

nearest beat relative to the base tempo.

Off (unchecked): If Trigger Mode is set to Start

Immediately, triggering will occur at the moment you press

the DRUM TRACK button. If this is set to Wait KBD

Trigger, triggering will occur at the moment you play the

keyboard.

Synchronization with the arpeggiator, step

sequencer, and Sequencer mode songs

Turn the Sync setting On if you want the Drum Track

patterns to play or record in synchronization with the

arpeggiator that’s currently running, the step sequencer, or

the song that’s currently playing.

Sync is off: If the Trigger Mode setting is set to Start

Immediately, the Drum Track pattern will be triggered the

moment you press the DRUM TRACK button. If this is set

to Wait KBD Trigger, the Drum Track pattern will be

triggered the moment you play the keyboard. The Drum

Track will not synchronize with the arpeggiator that’s

currently running, the step sequencer, or the song that’s

currently running.

Sync is on: The Drum Track will be triggered at one-

measure intervals in synchronization with the song that’s

currently running. The Drum Track will be triggered at one-

beat intervals in synchronization with the arpeggiator that’s

currently running or the step sequencer (in Sequencer mode

if the song is stopped).

Note: If you want to synchronize the arpeggiator to the

Drum Track function that’s currently running, adjust settings

for Key Sync (P-ARP> SETUP, C-ARP> A, B, S-ARP> A,

B).

Synchronization with song stop

Synchronization with a song in Sequencer

mode

• When you press the SEQUENCER (START/

STOP) button, the Drum Track function will stop as well

as the sequencer.

• If you want the Drum Track function to start

simultaneously with the start of recording, press the

DRUM TRACK button during the pre-count before

recording (if Trigger Mode is set to Start Immediately)

or play the keyboard (if Trigger Mode is Wait KBD

Trigger). The Drum Tracks will not be triggered

immediately, but will be triggered in synchronization

with the sequencer the moment recording starts.

Synchronizing the Drum Track function Slave operation

Slave operation

Connect the KROSS’s MIDI IN to your external MIDI

device’s MIDI OUT, or connect the KROSS’s USB B

connector to your computer’s USB port.

Set MIDI Clock (see page 117) to External MIDI or

External USB.

Note: If the KROSS is set to MIDI Clock= Auto, it will also

synchronize to the external MIDI device in the same way if

MIDI timing clock messages are being received from the

external device.

Synchronization to MIDI clock

The arpeggiator function will synchronize to a tempo based

on the external MIDI clock timing.

Synchronization with MIDI realtime commands

In Sequencer mode, Song Start, Continue, and Stop

messages that the KROSS receives will control song

playback and recording just as when you use the front panel

SEQUENCER (START/STOP) button. The Drum

Track function also will be controlled in the same way as

when you use the front panel SEQUENCER

(START/STOP) button. (see “Synchronization with song

stop”)

Master operation

If you want an external MIDI device or computer to

synchronize to the KROSS’s MIDI timing clock and

realtime commands, connect the KROSS’s MIDI OUT to

your external MIDI device’s MIDI IN, or connect the

KROSS’s USB port to your computer’s USB port.

Set MIDI Clock to Internal.

Note: The same applies if MIDI Clock=Auto and MIDI

realtime clock messages are being transmitted. (see

page 117)

Synchronization via MIDI clock

The connected external MIDI device will synchronize to the

MIDI clock of the KROSS.

Drum Track function

Step sequencer

Performing with the step

sequencer

The step sequencer is a function that lets you use the front

panel pads 1–16 to easily create drum loop patterns. By

turning steps on/off you can create patterns in an intuitive

way, and modify a pattern while it plays back.

The step sequencer can be used in Program, Combination, or

Sequencer mode; the loop patterns that you create can be

saved together with the sound and song data.

A loop pattern consists of up to 64 steps, and you can add

volume accents and a sense of swing to the steps. A pattern

can use up to 12 different tones, such as kick or snare. You

can edit the number of steps in a pattern, and specify the

instrumental sounds (Inst) that will actually be sounded by

the tones.

The sounds used by each tone can be selected from the

variations of the currently selected drum set. You can also

exchange the drum set itself.

Playback and settings in Program

mode

Playing and stopping the step sequencer

1. Select the program that you’ll use when playing the

step sequencer or when entering the pattern. (see

“Selecting Programs” on page 27)

2. Press the RUN button to start playback (the button

will be lit).

Press the button once again to stop (the button will be

unlit).

The drum loop pattern that’s saved together with the

program sound will play.

Note: The on/off state of the RUN button is not saved when

you write the program.

Changing the tempo

• In REALTIME CONTROLS, select TEMPO and use the

KNOB 1 knob (TEMPO) or the SWITCH button (TAP)

to adjust the tempo.(see page 73)

Entering a pattern

Use pads 1–16 to enter a pattern.

1. Make sure that the STEP SEQ ACTIVE button is lit.

Pads 1–16 will turn each of the step sequencer’s steps on/

off.

2. Press the RUN button (it will light up) to start

playback.

3. Press pads 1–16 to enter steps. Each time you press a

pad 1-16, it alternates between on (lit) and off (unlit);

a pad that is on will sound.

4. To enter a different tone, switch tones. Hold down the

EXIT button ( ) and press the STEP SEQ

ACTIVE button ( ) to access the P-STEP

SEQ>EDIT page.

The P-STEP SEQ> EDIT page will appear. On this page,

you can use the cursor buttons ▲▼ to select the tone that

you want to enter. Hold down the STEP SEQ ACTIVE

button and press pads 1-13 to switch tones. You can also

use the cursor buttons ◄► to select a step, and press the

ENTER button to turn it on/off.

Tone 1

Tone 2

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Step 16

Tone 3

: Step On

Tone 12

ACCENT Tone (13)

Zone A Zone B

3 5

Step sequencer

Specific sounds such as kick, snare, and tom are already

assigned to the 12 tones used by the step sequencer.

Note: If you hold down the STEP SEQ ACTIVE button,

the currently selected tone number will light up. If you

press this button, the ASSIGN INST TO TONE dialog

box will appear. In this dialog box you can change the

sound that’s assigned to the tone. Please see the following

section.

5. Press pads 1–16 to enter steps for the next tone.

Changing the drum sounds

Switching the sounds of all tones (switching the

drum set)

Here’s how to change the drum sounds.

1. Access the Program mode P-STEP SEQ>BASIC page.

2. Select Program, and use the VALUE dial etc. to

change the drum program.

Changing the sounds (instruments) for each tone

Variations are provided for the sounds that are played by

each tone.

1. While you hold down the STEP SEQ ACTIVE button

, the currently selected TONE 1–12 pads will light up.

To specify an instrument, select the pad for the TONE

that you want to specify, making that pad light up;

then press the lit pad to access the ASSIGN INST TO

TONE dialog box.

Note: Tone 13 is the accent tone. You cannot assign an

instrument to it.

Tip: You can also access this dialog box by using the

Assign Inst To Tone function.

2. Use the cursor buttons ◄► to select Inst variation

category, and press the ENTER button to switch

between categories and All.

If All is selected, you’ll be able to choose drum sounds

from all instruments. If a category is selected, you’ll be

able to choose from instruments of that category.

If the category is set to Inst variation category,

switching programs may also switch the note number of

the Inst variation. This is because an instrument of the

same category does not exist at the same note number as

the program that you changed, and therefore a nearby

instrument of the same category has been assigned.

3. Use the VALUE dial etc. to select an instrument.

You can press the PAGE+ (AUDITION) button to hear

the sound you selected.

You can also play the keyboard to hear the candidate

instrument. If Inst variation category is set to All, all keys

will produce sound. If a category is selected, sound will

be produced only by the keys where a corresponding

instrument has been assigned.

You can also select by holding down the STEP SEQ

ACTIVE button and playing a key.

4. To specify the sound for another tone, hold down the

STEP SEQ ACTIVE button and press a pad 1–12 to

switch tones, or choose Tone No. and use the VALUE

dial etc. to change the setting.

5. When you’ve finished adjusting settings, press the

MENU (OK) button.

Adjusting how the loop pattern will play

You can adjust the volume, the sense of swing (groove), and

accent for the pattern.

1. Access the P-STEP SEQ> MOD page.

2. Velocity adjusts the basic volume, SWING adjusts the

sense of swing, and Accent adjusts the volume.

To add an accent to a step

1. While holding down the STEP SEQ ACTIVE button ,

press pad 13 to select the accent tone.

2. Turn on the steps where you want to boost the volume

Using pads 1–16 and the BANK SELECT button, press

the steps where you want to add an accent, making those

steps light up. The volume of all tones in the selected

steps will be emphasized.

3. The accent volume is adjusted by the Accent

parameter on the MOD page as described earlier.

Tone 1 Kick Tone 5 H.H Open Tone 9 Tom H

Tone 2 Snare 1 Tone 6 Crash Tone 10 Perc 1

Tone 3 Snare 2 Tone 7 Ride Tone 11 Perc 2

Tone 4 H.H Close Tone 8 Tom L Tone 12 SFX

Tone No. Inst variation

category

[Note No.] Inst variation

Step

123456789

Swing

–32 –16 +16 +32

If Resolution = (when Steps per Beat = X1)

Modulation Control - SWING

Performing with the step sequencer Step sequencer settings in Combination mode

To add a sense of swing to the steps

1. On the P-STEP SEQ> BASIC page, adjust the Step/Bt

parameter.

A swing effect will be added at the following locations.

(see below)

2. On the P-STEP SEQ> MOD page, adjust the Swing

setting.

Specifying the zone

You can use up to 64 steps in a loop pattern. The loop pattern

consists of four zones, A–D, each zone containing 16 steps

that correspond to the 16 pads.

The number of steps in the pattern is specified by the Lgth

(Length) setting on the P-STEP SEQ> BASIC page.

1. Access the P-STEP SEQ> BASIC page.

2. Use the Lgth (Length) setting to specify the number of

steps.

The pattern will play as a loop for the specified number

of steps.

The tempo and Reso (Resolution) settings determine the

speed.

Use the BANK SELECT button to switch between zones

for the specified Lgth. For example if Lgth is 32, two

zones will be available; pressing the BANK SELECT

button will switch between zones A and B.

MIDI transmission from the step sequencer

In Program mode, the step sequencer function transmits note

data on the following MIDI channel.

Data is transmitted on the MIDI channel specified by the

Global/Media mode G-MIDI>OUT page setting Step Seq

Prog MIDI Ch (default setting: ch.16).

Note: MIDI data transmission is enabled if the Step Seq

Prog MIDI Out setting is checked. By default, this is off

(unchecked).

Step sequencer programs do not transmit or receive program

changes.

Step sequencer settings in

Combination mode

In Combination mode, timbre 16 is used by the step

sequencer. It will be used if the COMBI> PROG page STEP

parameter is selected. If the STEP parameter is not selected,

timbre 16 can be used as a conventional timbre.

MIDI transmission from the step sequencer

In Combination mode, the step sequencer function transmits

the step sequencer's note data on the MIDI Channel (C-

TIMBRE>MIDI) if timbre 16's Status (COMBI>PROG) is

set to EXT or EX2.

Step sequencer settings in

Sequencer mode

In Sequencer mode, track 16 is used by the step sequencer. It

will be used if the SEQ> PROG page STEP parameter is

selected. If the STEP parameter is not selected, timbre 16

can be used as a conventional track.

Note: If you press the RUN button during the recording pre-

count, the step sequencer will start in synchronization with

the beginning of song recording.

Resolution = , Swing = +16

Step

123456789

Swing

Resolution = , Swing = +16

When Step/Bt = X1

+16

+16 +16 +16

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+16 +16 +16 +16

Step

123456789

Swing

When Step/Bt = X2

+16 +16

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+16 +16

Step

123456789

Swing

When Step/Bt = X4

+16

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

+16

STEP(Step sequencer on/o)

Step sequencer

MIDI transmission from the step sequencer

In Sequencer mode, the step sequencer function transmits

the step sequencer's note data on the MIDI Channel (S-

TRACK>MIDI) if track 16's Status (SEQ>PROG) is set to

BTH, EXT, or EX2.

Using the step sequencer with

Favorites

When using the Favorites function, the settings of each

registered program or combination can make the step

sequencer play.

You’ll be able to turn steps on/off, but the settings

cannot be saved. Nor can you enter the various STEP

SEQ pages. You’ll need to use Program mode or

Combination mode to edit the step sequencer settings.

Playing and stopping the step sequencer

1. Select a favorite program or combination. (see

page 53)

2. Press the STEP SEQ RUN button to start playback

(the button will be lit).

Press the button once again to stop (the button will be

unlit).

The drum loop pattern that’s saved together with the

program or combination sound will play.

Note: The on/off state of the RUN button is not saved when

you write the program.

Entering a pattern

1. Press the STEP SEQ ACTIVE button to make the

button lit.

Pads 1–16 will turn each of the step sequencer’s steps on/

off.

2. Use the BANK SELECT button and pads 1–16 to

enter steps. Each time you press a pad, it will turn on

(lit) or off (unlit); if it is on, sound will be produced.

3. To enter other tones, hold down the STEP SEQ

ACTIVE button and press pads 1–12 to switch tones.

Then press pads 1–16 to turn them on/off.

4. To add accents, hold down the STEP SEQ ACTIVE

button and press pad 13 to select it; then use the

BANK SELECT button and pads 1–16 to turn the

accent on/off for each step.

Synchronizing the

step sequencer

The step sequencer will play in synchronization with the

internal/external MIDI clock.

Synchronization with the arpeggiator

The step sequencer will synchronize to the timing of the

currently playing arpeggiator.

Note: If you want to synchronize the arpeggiator playback to

the step sequencer that’s currently running, turn Key Sync

(P-ARP> SETUP, C-ARP> A, B, S-ARP> A, B) off.

Synchronization with the Drum Track

In Sequencer mode, the step sequencer will synchronize to

the Drum Track pattern that's currently playing.

Note: If you want to synchronize the Drum Track pattern

playback to the step sequencer that’s currently running,

select the Sync check box (in each mode, DRUM TRACK>

PATTERN page Drum Track setting).

Synchronization between the step sequencer

and the sequencer in Sequencer mode

When playing or recording a song

• The step sequencer will synchronize to the song in units

of one beat.

Synchronization with song start

• If the step sequencer is on (i.e., the RUN button is on)

and running, it will reset to the beginning of the pattern

when it receives a song start message.

Synchronization with the playback of an

external sequencer

If “ (Tempo)” is EXT (i.e., if the G-MIDI> BASIC page

MIDI Clock parameter is set to Ext-MIDI or Ext-USB) in

Program, Combination, or Sequencer modes, the step

sequencer will synchronize to MIDI timing clock and start

messages from an external MIDI sequencer etc. connected

via a MIDI cable.

Note: The step sequencer will also synchronize in the same

way if MIDI Clock is set to Auto and MIDI timing clock

messages are being received from a connected MIDI device.

Synchronization with external MIDI timing clock

The step sequencer will synchronize to “ (Tempo)” based on

the external MIDI timing clock.

Synchronization with the MIDI realtime command Start

message

If the step sequencer is on and running, it will be reset to the

beginning of the pattern when it receives the Start command.

Pad Sampler

Performing with the pad

sampler

The pad sampler function lets you use the 16 pads on the

front panel to easily sample (record) your KROSS

performance or an external input, and perform by playing

back these samples. The maximum recording time is 14

seconds per pad, and you can play back the samples of up to

four pads simultaneously. To record a sample, select one of

the pads 1–16, and record the KROSS's performance or an

external input. When you record a sample, it is written into

the KROSS's RAM; then the data (16-bit, 48 kHz, stereo) is

automatically saved to the SD card as a Korg Format Sample

file.

A set consisting of the eight banks A–H is called a "session."

For each session, you can load the sample data for 16 pads,

and switch between banks while you perform.

Note: The KROSS's effects cannot be applied to the

playback of the pad sampler.

Note: We recommend that you use an SD card. If a card is

not inserted, demo samples are loaded into bank A; you will

be able to perform.

Recording samples (sampling)

Getting ready to record samples

Before you record, insert an SD card formatted by the

KROSS into the SD card slot. If an SD card is not

inserted; you will be able to record, but the recorded

content is lost when you turn off the power.

Note: When you use an SD card with the KROSS for the

first time, the folder KORG/KROSS2/SAMPLER is created

automatically, and settings are made to prepare the card for

use.

Note: If you insert an SD card that was previously used with

the KROSS, the sample set of Session 001 bank A saved on

the SD card is automatically loaded into the KROSS.

Sampling the sound of the KROSS

Here's how to sample the sound of your performance in

Program mode or Combination mode, a sequencer song, or

audio processed by the vocoder.

1. In Program mode etc., select the sound that you want

to sample.(→ p.27, → p.45)

2. Press the EXIT button ( ) and the SAMPLER

ACTIVE button ( ) to access the SAMPLER

SETUP window.

3. Either press the pad to which you want to assign the

sample, or use the cursor buttons to select pad.

4. Press the MENU (REC) button located below the

display to access the SAMPLE RECORDING

window.

If you select a pad to which a sample is already assigned,

and press the MENU (REC) button, a dialog box appears,

asking whether you want to overwrite the sample.

Note: If you don't want to delete the sample, press the

FUNCTION (CANCEL) button below the display to

cancel the operation; then select a different pad.

Note: If you want to record a sample in a different bank

than the currently selected bank, press the BANK

SELECT button to select a bank.

3,7

3,4

3,5

Pad Sampler

5. Move the cursor to Auto Rec Start:, and use the

ENTER key or the VALUE dial to select the auto

trigger method.

Off: Press the MENU (Rec Control) button to start

sampling.

Note-On: Sampling will start when you play the

keyboard.

SEQ START: Sampling will start when you press the

SEQUENCER (start/stop) button.

Input Low: Sampling will start when the audio input

level exceeds approximately –18 dB.

Input High: Sampling will start when the audio input

level exceeds approximately –6 dB.

6. Press the MENU (Rec Control) button to enter

sample-standby.

7. Sample the sound of your performance. Sampling

starts according to the method you specified Auto Rec

Start.

8. When you press the PAGE+ (Stop) button, sampling

stops. Sampling automatically stops if the maximum

recordable time elapses.

Note: During sampling, you can use the AUDIO REC

(play/pause) button to play back an audio song, or

play back samples of other pads to sample them. (You

can't play back an audio song from a pad.)

9. When you stop sampling, the EDIT SAMPLE window

appears. In the EDIT SAMPLE window, You can

specify the playback region and playback method of

the sample. ( “Editing a sample” on page 95)

10.When you press the pad that you recorded, the sample

plays back. (“Playing samples” on page 96)

Sampling the sound from external audio

input

If you want to sample an external audio input, proceed

through step 3 of “Sampling the sound of the KROSS” on

page 93 and then press the PAGE- (A-IN) button to access

the AUDIO IN-QUICK SETTING dialog box and change

audio input settings. (→ p.22)

When you finish making settings, press the MENU (DONE)

button to return to the SAMPLE RECORDING window.

Importing from a WAVE file

WAVE files saved on an SD card can be imported as samples

and played from the pad sampler.

The following file formats can be imported.

• File format: WAVE format uncompressed linear PCM

• Sampling bit depth: 16-bit

• Sampling frequency: 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, stereo files

Note: The first 8 characters of the file name are shown.

1. Using your computer, copy the WAVE file that you

want to import into the KORG/KROSS2/DATA folder

of an SD card that was formatted by the KROSS.

2. Insert the SD card, and in the SAMPLER SETUP

window, select the import-destination pad.

3. Press the FUNCTION (FUNC) button to access the

function list; then select Import WAV, and press the

ENTER button to access the dialog box.(Please see

“Import WAV” on page 206 of the Parameter Guide)

4. In the file list, select the WAVE file that you want to

import.

5. Verify the import-destination pad number, and press

the MENU (OK) button to execute the import.

Note: Up to the first 14 seconds of the WAVE file can be

imported. Using your computer beforehand, make sure

that the audio you wish to import is within this limit.

Note: Importing might take a certain amount of time.

Note: From the SAMPLE RECORDING screen as well,

you can use the FUNCTION (FUNC) button to select

Import WAV and execute the procedure in the same way.

Performing with the pad sampler Editing a sample

Editing a sample

Note: The edited content is also automatically saved to the

SD card each time.

You can specify the playback region and playback method of

the sample.

1. Press the EXIT button ( ) and the SAMPLER

ACTIVE button ( ) to open the SAMPLER

SETUP window.

2. Either press the pad to which the sample you want to

edit is assigned, or use the cursor keys to select pad.

3. Press the MENU (EDIT) button to open the EDIT

SAMPLE window.

Note: You can press the pad to actually play the sample

while you adjust the settings and hear the result.

4. To specify the region that plays back, use the VALUE

dial to move the "S" start point and "E" end point.

Note: The start point and end point are shown in the

waveform display. You can use the PAGE+ (ZOOM-) and

MENU (ZOOM+) buttons to adjust the range of the

waveform display as you check the playback region. You

can use the PAGE- (V/H) button to switch between

zooming in the V (vertical) or H (horizontal) directions.

The selected direction is shown in bold.

Note: By using the Truncate Sample function you can

discard the portions of the sample that are outside the

specified start point and end point.

Note: Be aware that a sample on which Truncate Sample

was executed cannot be returned to its previous state.

5. Specify the playback method. Use the "LOOP" check

box to specify the loop on/off setting, and use the

"GATE" check box to specify the gate on/off setting.

If the "LOOP" check box is on: The sample plays from

the start point to the end point, and then playback

continues from the start point.

If the "LOOP" check box is off: The sample plays from

the start point to the end point, and then playback stops.

If the "GATE" check box is on: While the pad is held

down, playback continues according to the loop on/off

setting. Playback stops when the pad is released.

If the "GATE" check box is off: Once the pad is

pressed, playback continues according to the loop on/off

setting. Playback stops when the pad is pressed once

again.

6. To adjust the playback volume, use "Lv" to specify

the level.

7. To rename the sample, use the FUNCTION (FUNC)

button to open the function list, and select Rename

Sample.(Please see “Rename Sample” on page 207 of

the Parameter Guide)

8. When you've finished making settings, press the EXIT

button to close the EDIT SAMPLE window.When you

close the window, the edited content is saved to the

Korg format sample file on the SD card.

Note: If you don't close the EDIT SAMPLE window, the

edited content is not saved to the Korg format sample file on

the SD card.

Pad Sampler

Playing samples

1. Make sure that the SAMPLER ACTIVE button is lit.

2. Select the sampler bank.

Press the BANK SELECT button to make the BANK

LEDs indicate the bank that you want to select; the

BANK LED blinks. When 1 second has elapsed with the

LED blinking, the switch to that bank is confirmed.

Note: While the BANK LED of the selected bank is still

blinking, the bank switch has not yet been confirmed.

Blinking stops if you select the bank in which you're

currently working.

Note: Data is read when you switch banks. Never remove

the SD card while this is occurring.

3. When you press a lit pad, the sample plays according

to the settings that you specified in “Editing a

sample”.

Note: A pad whose sample is currently playing is lit more

brightly than when it is not playing.

Note: The pad sampler can play back up to four samples

simultaneously.

Hold the pad

If you hold down the SAMPLER HOLD button and press

a pad, it remains in the hold state even if you then release

the pad.

Tip: The same result occurs if you hold down a pad and

press the SAMPLER HOLD button.

Note: If sample playback ends while a pad is still in the

hold state, the hold state is cleared for that pad.

Note: If even one pad is in the hold state, the SAMPLER

HOLD button is lit. In this case, you can once again hold

down the SAMPLER HOLD button and press another

pad to simultaneously put it in the hold state. At this time,

you can press and release the SAMPLER HOLD button

to clear the hold state for all pads.

switch the pad to mute mode

If there is a pad that is playing, you can hold down the

EXIT button ( ) and press the SAMPLER HOLD

button ( ) to switch the pad to mute mode. (At

this time, the SAMPLER HOLD button ( ) LED

blinks.)

In mute mode, pressing a currently-playing pad will mute

(silence) the playback. (The LED of a muted pad blinks.)

When you once again press a blinking pad, mute is

cleared. To clear mute mode, once again hold down the

EXIT button ( ) and press the SAMPLER HOLD

button ( ).

4,5

Performing with the pad sampler MIDI transmission and reception for the pad sampler function

MIDI transmission and reception for

the pad sampler function

Program mode

Data is transmitted and received on the MIDI channel

specified by the Global/Media mode G-MIDI>OUT page

setting Pad Sampler Prog MIDI Ch (default setting: ch.15).

MIDI data transmission is enabled if the Pad Sampler Prog

MIDI Out setting is checked. By default, this is off

(unchecked).

Combination mode

If in the PROG page you turn "SMP" on, the program

assigned to timbre 15 is disabled (will not sound), and

instead the pad sampler on/off events are transmitted and

received on the MIDI channel that is assigned to timbre 15.

If the MIDI timbre's Status (COMBI > PROG) is EXT or

EX2, note data is transmitted.

Note: It is not possible to change the timbre used for the pad

sampler to any setting other than 15.

Sequencer mode

If in the MAIN or PROG page you turn "SMP" on, the

program assigned to track 15 is disabled (will not sound),

and instead the pad sampler on/off events are transmitted and

received on the MIDI channel that is assigned to track 15.

This lets you record and play back on the track. If the track's

Status (SEQ>PROG) is BTH, EXT, or EX2, note data is

transmitted.

Note: It is not possible to change the track used for the pad

sampler to any setting other than 15.

Using samples in other ways

Samples recorded on the KROSS can also be used in other

ways as well as playing them back from the pads.

Here are some possibilities.

• Use for recordings in Sequencer mode

Pad playback (on/off) data can be recorded as note data in

Sequencer mode. (“Recording your pad sampler

performance” on page 62)

• Play samples as programs

A bank (session) of recorded samples can be converted to

a program and played on the keyboard or processed by

the KROSS's effects. (“Convert Current Bank to

Program” on page 207 of the Parameter Guide)

Exporting a sample

Using the "Export to KSC" function or "Export to WAV"

function, a sample that you recorded with the pad sampler

can be exported as a .KSC file or as a sample file in WAVE

format. When you execute these functions, a .KSC file or

WAVE file is created in the SD card's KORG/KROSS2/

DATA folder.

.KSC file:

The data is exported as a Korg-format PCM data file, with a

multisample and sample file for each bank. This data can be

loaded into a sampling-capable model such as the KRONOS

series, OASYS, M3, or TRITON series, and played.

WAVE file:

The data is exported as a .WAV format sample file. A

computer application that supports WAVE format can load

this data, allowing you to use samples that were recorded on

the KROSS.

• File format: WAVE format uncompressed linear PCM

• Sampling bit depth: 16-bit

• Sampling frequency: 48 kHz

Pad Sampler

Audio recorder

An overview of the audio

recorder

About the audio recorder

The KROSS provides a high-quality digital audio recorder

that records on an SD card that you insert into the SD card

slot. In addition to recording the sound of what you play on

the keyboard or play back from the sequencer, the audio

recorder can also record an external audio input such as a

mic, guitar, or audio player that’s connected to the KROSS.

You can also overdub as many times as you like by playing

back the recorded audio while recording your KROSS

performance or external audio input. There’s also an Undo

function that lets you return to the state prior to the previous

take, and re-record from there. These functions let you use

the audio recorder like a simple multi-track audio recorder.

The recorded audio data is saved on the SD card as a WAVE

file (48 kHz, 16-bit), so you can use it with your computer.

You can also import a WAVE file into the audio recorder and

play it back.

The audio recorder gives you an easy way to record your

phrases and ideas anytime you’re playing, regardless of the

sound or mode (except for Disk mode).

Recording time and data size

The maximum time for one song is three hours. The actual

total time for a multi-track recording will depend on the free

capacity of the SD card.

A single pass of recording will store approximately 11 MB

of data per minute. This means that 1 GB allows you to

record approximately 90 minutes. When you perform multi-

track recording, additional data will be stored on the SD card

according to the length of the recording.

Note: Recording times are approximate. Since song

management data is also stored, the actual recordable time

may be shorter depending on the number of songs.

* The effects designed for use with external audio can be used

simultaneously with the insert/master effect provided for

programs etc. (see page 71)

Take 1: Drums

Drums

Drums+Bass

Drums+Bass+Guitar

0:00:00

Recorded takes and how they play back

2:59:59

Take 2: Bass

Take 3: Guitar

: Rec Data

: Playback

Audio Recorder

Oscillator

- Gain

ADC

SD card

2Mix Play 2Mix Rec

Return

OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

Send

Mic In (mono)

Line In (stereo)

KROSS

Insert

Eect 1–5

Master

Eect 1, 2

Volume (Mixer)

- Level (Audio In)

- Input Level Meter

- Audio Play Level

(Set Play Level)

- Output Level

Meter

- Direct Send

(to Audio Rec)

- Direct Send

(to Audio Rec)

Signal flow within the audio recorder

OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

Oscillator

Eects

Audio Recorder:

Recording

Keyboard

Recording

LINE IN/MIC INExt. Audio

OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

Audio Recorder:

Playback

Audio Recorder:

Playback

OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

Oscillator

Eects

Audio Recorder:

Recording

Keyboard

Overdub Recording

LINE IN/MIC INExt. Audio

Audio recorder

100

Basic operation

To perform audio recorder operations such as recording,

playback, and undo, use the front panel AUDIO REC

(play/pause) button ( ), and also the audio recorder

dialog box that appears when you hold down the EXIT

button ( ) and press the AUDIO REC (play/

pause) button ( ).

AUDIO REC (play/pause) button ( )

Controls recording, playback, and pause for the audio song.

The operating status is shown by the color, and the state of

the LED (lit or blinking). In each state, pressing this button

will perform the following actions.

• LED unlit = Stopped: Press the button to start playback.

• Green LED blinking = Playback paused: Press the button

to start playback.

• Green LED lit = Playing: Press the button to pause

playback.

• Red LED blinking = Recording paused: Press the button

to start recording.

• Orange LED blinking = Recording paused: Start

recording by inputting the trigger specified by Auto.

• Red LED lit = Recording: Press the button to pause

recording.

If you hold down the EXIT button ( ) and press the

AUDIO REC (play/pause) button ( ), the

AUDIO RECORDER SETUP window appears.

AUDIO RECORDER SETUP window

In this window you can control recording, stop, pause, and

playback, as well as perform functions such as undo and

create a new audio song. Use the buttons located below the

display to operate the recorder.

FUNCTION (FUNC ) button

This button shows the functionlist where you can use

functions such as creating a new sound, renaming, deleting,

exporting, or adjusting the level. (see page 8)

PAGE– (UNDO) button

Shows the UNDO dialog box. Here is where you can step

back to an earlier recording take. You’ll also use this button

for the Redo function which brings back a recorded take.

(see page 104)

PAGE+ (Stop/Reset) button

This is the stop button. It stops playback or recording of the

audio song. When you stop, the recorder will return to the

stored location. If you press locate while stopped, you’ll

return to the beginning 0:00:00 of the song.

MENU (REC Control) button

This is the record button. It controls record-pause and

record-start. The functionality of the button will depend on

the current state. In each state, pressing this button will

perform the following actions.

= While stopped: Press the button to enter the record-

pause state.

= When shown: Press the button to start recording.

= Recording: Press the button to switch to playback.

Locate

During recording or playback, pressing the PAGE+ (Stop/

Reset) button will stop and take you back to the location

where you started recording or playing (except if you started

from pause).

When stopped, pressing the PAGE+ (Stop/Reset ) button

will take you to the beginning (0:00:00) of the song.

If you want to move the location, use the cursor buttons

◄►▲▼ to select Time Location, and press the ENTER

button (the ▲▼ symbols are shown beside the value). Use

the cursor buttons ▲▼ or the VALUE dial to specify the

location, and press the ENTER button to move there.

You can’t change the location during recording or in the

record-pause state.

Foot switch

You can use a foot switch to switch between play/play-pause

or record/record-pause (Foot SW Assign =Audio Recorder

Start/Pause, Audio Recorder REC Start/Stop). (see page 23)

AUDIO RECORDER SETUP window

In the audio recorder setup window you can adjust settings

for the audio recorder.

• Hold down the EXIT button ( ) and press the

AUDIO REC (play/pause) button ( ) to

open the window.

• Audio Take: If you have not yet recorded, this will

indicate New. When you record, the left side indicates

the currently selected take, and the right side indicates

the number of multi-track recordings. You can use Undo

to go back to a previous recording.

•

Time Location: Indicates the location within the audio song.

From the left, this shows hours, minutes, and seconds.

Please see the preceding section “Locate” on page 100.

• Status/Trigger: Indicates the state of the audio recorder,

such as recording, playing, or stopped.

• Level Meter: The INPUT level meter shows the level of

the external audio that’s being input to the KROSS.

The OUTPUT level meter shows the level of the sound being

output from the L/R jacks: the sound of the KROSS, the

external audio input, and the playback of the audio recorder.

During recording, this will show the recording level.

UndoFunc Stop/Reset Rec Control

Status/TriggerTime Location Level Meter

Audio Song

Audio Take

Undo Stop/Reset Rec Control

Recording and playing audio Preparations

101

• Audio Song: Selects a song.

•

Auto: Specifies how recording will be started automatically.

(see “Specifying how recording will start” on page 104)

• LOOP: Repeatedly plays the A-B region.

• Undo: Returns to a previous take or the most recent take.

• Stop/Reset, Rec Control: Control the audio recorder.

Recording and playing audio

The audio recorder can record what you play on the

keyboard of the KROSS, or it can play an external audio

signal from LINE IN, MIC IN or USB audio input.

Let’s begin by recording the sound of your playing a

program. In a later section we’ll explain how to record an

external audio signal.

Preparations

• Insert an SD card into the SD card slot.

(see “Inserting an SD card” on page 25)

If the SD card is being used by the KROSS for the first

time, you’ll need to format it in GLOBAL/MEDIA

mode. (see “Formatting SD card” on page 129)

Note: When using an SD card with the KROSS for the first

time, KORG/KROSS2/AUDIO and DATA folders will be

created automatically to make the card usable by the

KROSS.

Never remove the SD card during recording or

playback. Doing so may temporarily destabilize the

KROSS.

Recording the performance of the

KROSS

1. Press the PROG button to enter Program mode, and

select the program that you want to play from the

keyboard and record.

2. Hold down the EXIT button ( ) and press the

AUDIO REC (play/pause) button ( ) to

open the AUDIO RECORDER SETUP window.

3. Select the audio song that you want to record.

• If there is no recorded data on the SD card, the display

will indicate “NO AUDIO SONG.” Simply proceed to

step 4.

• To select a different song, move the cursor to the audio

song and use the VALUE dial etc. to select the song you

want. You can press the ENTER button and choose from

a list.

• If you want to newly record a song, prepare a new song.

(see “Preparing a new audio song” on page 104)

4. Press the MENU (Rec Control ) button to enter

the record-standby condition. (AUDIO REC

(play/pause) button: blinking red)

Audio recorder

102

5. Press the MENU (Rec Control ) button or the

AUDIO REC (play/pause) button to start

recording. (AUDIO REC (play/pause) button: lit

red)

Note: The procedure here is for when Auto (Auto Rec

Start) is Off. As an alternative to the Rec Control button,

you can also initiate recording in other ways, such as by

playing the keyboard. (see “Specifying how recording

will start” on page 104)

6. Perform on the keyboard; the sound of the KROSS

will be recorded. You can also record the performance

of the Drum Track, the arpeggiator, and the step

sequencer.

Note: Even if you close the setup window, the recording

or standby condition of the recorder will be maintained.

7. To stop recording, press the PAGE+ (Stop/Reset )

button (AUDIO REC (play/pause) button:

unlit). When you stop, you’ll automatically return to

the time location where you started recording.

If you press the PAGE+ (Stop/Reset ) button while

stopped, you’ll return to the beginning of the audio

song.

If you press the AUDIO REC (play/pause)

button during recording, you’ll pause in the record-

standby state (AUDIO REC (play/pause)

button: blinking red).

If you press the MENU (Rec Control ) button during

recording, recording will end, playback will continue,

and the location will advance. To resume recording, press

the MENU (Rec Control ) button or the AUDIO REC

(play/pause) button.

Recording external audio input

If you want to record the sound of an external audio

inputsource, proceed as follows.

As an example, we will explain how to record from a mic.

1. Select a mic program.

Recording from a mic will be easy if you use a

programwhose input and effect settings have been set

upappropriately for a mic.

2. In the REALTIME CONTROLS section, use the

SELECT button to select AUDIO IN 1; then turn off

the SWITCH (ON/OFF) button, and turn the

VOLUME knob all the way to the left to lower the

volume.

Then connect a dynamic mic to the rear panel mic input

(MIC IN) jack.

You must turn the SWITCH (ON/OFF) button off and

use the VOLUME knob to minimize the volume before

you connect a mic or any other device. If you fail to

observe this precaution, your speaker system or other

equipment might be damaged.

Note: Also use the MIC IN jack if you’re connecting an

electric guitar. If you’re connecting a guitar equipped with

passive pickups, we recommend that you connect a preamp

or effect unit between your guitar and the KROSS.

3. In REALTIME CONTROLS, press the SWITCH

(ON/OFF) button to turn it on (lit).The mic input will

be enabled. Turn the VOLUME knob back toward its

original position to adjust the volume appropriately,

and play the keyboard or play back the audio

recorder while you input audio from the mic to check

the volume balance. If you want to adjust the mic

volume, use the SWITCH (ON/OFF) button to enable

the mic input, and then press FUNCTION

button?(QUICK SETTING) to open AUDIO IN-

QUICK SETTING-, and adjust the GAIN value.

Note: You can also adjust GAIN in the AUDIO IN 1 row

of the REALTIME CONTROLS section.

Note: Ideally, the level meter should be moving in

approximately 70% of its full range. If the input is

overloaded, the [MIC] indicator will be highlighted.

When you’ve finished adjusting the volume, save the

setting. (see “Global audio input settings (G-SET) and

individual settings” on page 22)

4. Specify the Direct Send setting. In this example, we

will mix and record the KROSS's performance, so

turn the setting off.

5. Adjust effect settings.

In the mic program, the Reverb Hall effect etc., which

applies reverberation to your vocal is assigned to Master

FX. If you want to turn off the effect, turn the MASTER

FX button off. To turn the effect off, use the SELECT

button to select the EFFECT row of REALTIME

CONTROLS, and turn off the SWITCH (MASTER FX)

button.

Use AUDIO IN1 - MFX/REVERB to set the amount of

effect. In REALTIME CONTROLS, use the SELECT

2a 2b

Level Meter [MIC] Gain

Audio IN ON/OFF

5a 5b

Recording and playing audio Playing back an audio song

103

button to select the AUDIO IN 1 row, and use KNOB 2 to

make adjustments.

6. Hold down the EXIT button ( ) and press the

AUDIO REC (play/pause) button ( ) to

open the AUDIO RECORDER SETUP window.

7. Select the audio song that you want to record.

8. Press the MENU (Rec Control ) button to enter

the record-standby condition.

9. When you press the MENU (Rec Control ) button

or the AUDIO REC (play/pause) button,

recording starts.

10.To stop recording, press the PAGE+ (Stop/Reset )

button. When you stop recording, you automatically

return to the time location at which recording started.

Note: For details on the screen indications and operations

during recording, refer to “Recording the performance of the

KROSS”

Direct Send

Direct Send is a parameter that specifies whether the

external audio input sound is mixed with the performance of

the KROSS during recording. For example if you're

rehearsing in the studio, you could record only the band's

performance while you play the KROSS.

Direct Send off: The audio input and the KROSS's

performance are mixed and recorded.

Direct Send on: Only the audio input is recorded. The sound

of the KROSS's performance is not mixed. (In this case, the

audio input sound is not output from audio out.)

If you want to record only the external audio input sound,

turn Direct Send on in step 4 of "Recording an external audio

input."

Playing back an audio song

To play back an audio song, press the AUDIO REC

(play/pause) button. Whether you’re in Program,

Combination, or Sequencer mode, you can play back

regardless of the mode you’re in.

1. Select the audio song that you want to play back.

Hold down the EXIT button ( ) and press the

AUDIO REC (play/pause) button ( ) to

access the AUDIO RECORDER SETUP page.

Move the cursor to the audio song, and use the VALUE

dial etc. to select the song you want.

2. Press the PAGE+ (Stop/Reset ) button to move to

the beginning of the sound.

3. Press the AUDIO REC (play/pause) button to

play back the audio song (green LED lit).

4. Press the AUDIO REC (play/pause) button to

pause (green LED blinking).

5. Press the AUDIO REC (play/pause) button once

again to resume playback (green LED lit).

6. Press the PAGE+ (Stop/Reset ) button to stop

playback and return the location to the beginning

(AUDIO REC (play/pause) button LED unlit).

Moving the playback location

For details on how to move the playback location of an audio

song, please see “Locate” on page 100.

Multi-track recording

SD card usage during multi-track recording

When you perform multi-track recording, the audio recorder

stores additional data on the SD card in proportion to the

recording time (see page 99). If you intend to use the audio

recorder for multi-track recording, you should use an SD

card with plenty of capacity.

Multi-track recording procedure

To perform multi-track recording, select an audio song,

move the time location to the place where you want to start

(whether at the beginning or in the middle of the song),

switch sounds or audio input sources if necessary, and repeat

the steps described in “Recording the performance of the

KROSS” on page 101.

Tip: If you want to change the volume when you’re

repeatedly recording the sound of the KROSS, you can use

the Hold function of Program mode or Combination mode to

adjust the balance. (see pages 32, 48)

In this example, we’ll explain how to record a specific

region starting in the middle of the song.

1. Select the song on which you want to multi-track

record.

Hold down the EXIT button ( ) and press the

AUDIO REC (play/pause) button ( ) to

open the AUDIO RECORDER SETUP window. Use the

cursor buttons ◄►▲▼ to choose Audio Song, and use

the VALUE dial etc. to select a song.

2. Move to the location where you want to begin multi-

track recording.

For details on how to move, please see “Locate” on

page 100.

Tip: It’s a good idea to move to a point where you can

start playback slightly earlier than you begin recording.

3. Press the AUDIO REC (play/pause) button to

start playback. (AUDIO REC (play/pause)

button: lit green)

4. Press the MENU (Rec Control ) button to start

recording. (AUDIO REC (play/pause) button: lit

red)

Direct Send

Audio recorder

104

Play the keyboard of the KROSS or input audio from the

MIC IN or LINE IN jacks.

5. To stop recording, press the PAGE+ (Stop/Reset )

button (AUDIO REC (play/pause) button:

unlit).

If you press the MENU (Rec Control ) button during

recording, recording will end, playback will continue,

and the location will advance. To resume recording, press

the MENU (Rec Control ) button.

To start recording in synchronization with your

performance or input

You can make recording start automatically when you begin

playing the keyboard or when external audio input is

received.

Select the appropriate Auto setting and press the MENU

(Rec Control) button; AUDIO REC (play/pause)

button will blink orange, and the recorder will be in the

record-standby condition. Recording will start automatically

when you play the keyboard or input audio. (see “Specifying

how recording will start”)

Preparing a new audio song

1. Press the FUNCTION (FUNC) button to access the

function list.

2. Use the PAGE– (▲) button to select Create New

Audio Song, and then press the MENU (OK) button.

The Create New Audio Song dialog box will appear.

3. To assign a name to the song, press the ENTER

button, enter a name in the text dialog box, and then

return to this dialog box (see page 124). You can

change the name later.

4. Press the MENU (OK) button to create the new audio

song.

On the upper left side of the display, the Audio Track will

indicate “NEW” to show that this is a new song where

nothing has been recorded.

Convenient functions for

playback and recording

Returning to the state before or after

recording (Undo/Redo)

If you’re not satisfied with your performance and would like

to record it again, you can use the Undo function to return to

the state prior to recording. You can also step back through

multiple takes. If you want to cancel the Undo function, use

Redo.

1. To cancel the recording, press the PAGE– (UNDO)

button.

The UNDO dialog box will appear.

2. Specify the take that you want to use from the

previously-recorded takes, and press the OK button.

When you execute UNDO, the PAGE– (UNDO)

button will be highlighted.

Note: If you record in this state, the Redo data will be lost

and the PAGE– (UNDO) button will return to its original

appearance.

Specifying how recording will start

Use the Auto (Auto Rec Start) setting to specify how

recording will start automatically. You can make recording

start the moment you play a note on the keyboard, or when

the sequencer starts, or when the audio input signal reaches a

specific level.

1. In the audio recorder setup window, set Auto (Auto

Rec Start). For details, please see step 3.

2. Press the MENU (Rec Control ) button to enter

the record-standby condition. (AUDIO REC

(play/pause) button: blinking orange)

3. Off: Press the MENU (Rec Control ) button or the

AUDIO REC (play/pause) button

to start

recording.

Note-On: Recording will start when you play the

keyboard.

SEQ START: Recording will start when you press the

SEQUENCER (start/stop) button.

Input Low: Recording will start when the audio input

level exceeds approximately –18 dB.

Input High: Recording will start when the audio input

level exceeds approximately –6 dB.

Note: It’s convenient to record using the following method if

you want to overdub an external input such as a guitar solo

or chorus onto a portion of the audio song.

1. Set Auto (Auto Rec Start) to Input Low or Input High.

Adjust input settings for Mic In.

Multi-track

recording

start location

Multi-track

recording

end location

Multi-track

recording

start location

Multi-track

recording

end location

Record-pause

Press the REC

Control button

Press the REC

Control button

Record-pause

Press the REC

Control button

Press the Stop/Reset button

Record-pause

Move manually

Stop playback

(return to start location)

Start playback

Continue playback

Play back and record only the multitrack-recorded region

Multi-track record while playing the entire song

Convenient functions for playback and recording Loop playback

105

2. Press the AUDIO REC (play/pause) button to

start playback. (AUDIO REC (play/pause)

button: lit green)

3. Slightly earlier than the point where you want to start

overdubbing, press the MENU (Rec Control )

button to enter the record-standby condition.

(AUDIO REC (play/pause) button: blinking

orange)

4. Sing the chorus part. Recording will start

automatically in response to the input.

When you overdub using this method, the audio input from

0.2 seconds earlier than the moment you started recording

will actually be recorded. This lets you overdub without

losing the beginning of the chorus or guitar phrase.

Tip: This Auto (Auto Rec Start) setting can be stored in the

GLOBAL> PREF 2 page as the default setting.

Loop playback

There’s a loop playback function that lets you repeatedly

play a specified region (A–B) of an audio song.

Note: The loop play on/off setting and the specified time are

saved individually for each audio song.

This setting will be saved to the SD card when you

switch to a different audio song or when you turn off the

power. If you remove the SD card immediately after

select the setting, the setting will not be saved.

Using loop play

If you add a check mark to LOOP to turn it on, the playback

will loop.

To specify the loop region, set the point where looping will

start (point A) and end (point B).

Note: The interval between points A and B will be at least

three seconds.

It’s not possible to record while LOOP has a check

mark. Nor is it possible to add a check mark to LOOP

during recording.

Setting the current time location as a point

There’s a convenient function that lets you directly specify

the current time location as one of the points. Move the cursor

to A or B, and press the ENTER button during playback; the

current time location will be specified as a point.

Note: If you use this method to specify the time location of a

point, the location will be specified with an accuracy of

within one second.

Pad audio play

You can assign a recorded audio song to a pad and play it

back. (→ p.109)

Importing or exporting WAVE files

Importing

You can import a WAVE file into the audio recorder, and

play it or overdub onto it.

The following files can be imported.

• File format: WAVE format uncompressed linear PCM

• Sample bit depth: 16-bit

• Sampling frequency: 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, stereo files

Number of characters in file name: The first eight characters

are shown

Note: Since 44.1 kHz WAVE files will be converted into 48

kHz as they are imported into the KROSS, a small amount of

time may be required.

Import procedure

1. Using your computer, copy the WAVE file that you

want to import into the KORG/KROSS2/DATA folder

of an SD card that was formatted by the KROSS.

2. In the audio recorder setup screen, open the audio

song list.

3. The WAVE file that you saved on the SD card in step 1

is shown at the bottom; select the WAVE file that you

want to import, and press ENTER to access the dialog

box.

Note: As an alternative to steps 2 and 3, you can open the

same dialog box by using the MEDIA>FILE page to

select the WAVE file that you want to import, and then

executing the Load Selected function.

4. If you want to rename the song, access the text dialog

box and enter a name.

5. If the volume of the file you’re importing should be

adjusted beforehand, specify Level Adjust.

Note: After importing, you can adjust the playback

volume of the audio recorder, or apply an individual

volume adjustment to each audio song. (see “Adjusting

the volume” on page 106)

6. Press the MENU (OK) button to execute the import

function.

The selected WAVE file will be loaded in KROSS audio

song format. The progress of execution is shown by a

progress bar in the display.

Note: This may take some time depending on the type of

file, etc.

During the import procedure, you can cancel by pressing

the FUNCTION (ABORT) button.

7. In the audio recorder setup window, select the song

that you imported, and play it.

Audio recorder

106

Exporting a WAVE file

A multitrack-recorded audio song can be exported as a

WAVE file to the KORG/KROSS2/DATA folder of the SD

card.

This lets you use your audio player to listen to an audio song

produced on the KROSS, or to load the song into your DAW.

• File format: WAVE format uncompressed linear PCM

• Sample bit depth: 16-bit

• Sampling frequency: 48 kHz

Number of characters in file name: The first eight characters

are shown

Export procedure

1. In the audio recorder setup window, select the audio

song that you want to export.

2. Choose the Export function to access the dialog box.

3. If you want to rename the file, access the text dialog

box and enter a name.

4. If you want to adjust the audio level of the song when

exporting it, specify Level Adjust.

5. Press the MENU (OK) button to execute the export

function.

The selected audio song will be exported as a WAVE file.

The progress of execution is shown by a progress bar in

the display.

The WAVE file will be created in the KORG/KROSS2/

DATA folder of the SD card.

Note: This may take some time, depending on the length

of the song.

During the export procedure, you can cancel by pressing

the FUNCTION (ABORT) button..

Adjusting the volume

You can use the following methods to adjust the volume of

imported data or of an already-recorded audio song.

If the volume of the imported data is too loud so that it

drowns out the performance of the KROSS, or if multi-track

recording has caused the volume to overload so that no more

can be overdubbed, it is helpful to adjust the volume by

using the following functions.

You can make the following adjustments.

• Set Play Level function: Temporarily lowers the

playback volume of audio songs.

Note: This will change the volume of all audio songs.

• Adjust Audio Level function: Applies attenuation

processing to the audio song, creating a new song.

Tip: Use this function if you want to individually adjust

the volume of each audio song.

• Level Adjust: Use the Level Adjust setting during Import

or Export.

About the Set Play Level and Adjust Audio

Level functions

In the Set Play Level function dialog box, setting the Level

to anything other than 0 dB will cause the audio song to play

back at a volume that is lower by the level you specified.

This function is convenient when you want to adjust the

volume balance between the audio song and your keyboard

performance.

Note: The Set Play Level setting applies to all audio songs.

At this time, the following message will appear. Please note

this if you’re overdubbing with the audio song playback

level lowered.

NOTICE: Overdubbing with this Level setting will

attenuate the sections of previous takes by the same

amount. Use ADJ. LVL to adjust the Audio Song and

avoid uneven audio level.

With this Level setting, if you overdub a region of the song

while playing back the previous take, the volume of the

previous take will be lowered only for the recorded region.

To avoid this problem of lowered volume, use ADJ. LVL to

adjust the audio song level.

Convenient functions for playback and recording SD card-related messages

107

Select the Set Play Level function, and adjust the level as

follows.

1. Set the Level as desired.

Adjust the volume balance of the keyboard performance

or external input (e.g., guitar or vocal) that you will be

overdubbing next while the audio song plays back. For

example, set this to –3 dB.

2. Press the PAGE+ (ADJ. LVL) button. The ADJUST

AUDIO LEVEL dialog box will appear.

3. Use Level Adjust to specify the level adjustment. The

Level value you specified in step 1 will automatically

be set as the default, so usually you can just press the

MENU (OK) button. (You can specify the song name

as you wish.)

You will return to the AUDIO RECORDER SETUP

screen. The audio song whose level you adjusted will

automatically be selected. At this time, Set Play Level

will be reset to 0 dB, so the volume balance you adjusted

in step 1 will be reproduced.

4. Overdub-record additional material.

(see the illustration below)

SD card-related messages

In addition to the Song Name, the following messages

related to the SD card may appear in the Song Name area of

the audio recorder.

Note: If the SD card is locked (Media write protected), a

different error message “Write protected” will appear if you

perform an operation that writes to the SD card, such as

recording.

Previous take (drums & bass)

SET PLAY LEVEL: –3dB

Start overdub-recording Stop

Drums & bass

–3dB

Guitar solo

Stop

Drums & bass

Guitar solo

If you overdub-record the guitar solo with

SET PLAY LEVEL left at –3 dB. The volume

of the previous take (drums & bass) will be

3 dB lower for a portion of the recording,

causing an unnatural result.

If you overdub-record the guitar solo after

using ADJUST AUDIO LEVEL to lower the

volume of the previous take by 3 dB.

Unnatural volume changes will not occur

in the previous take (drums & bass).

Start overdub-recording

ADJUST AUDIO LEVEL: –3dB

“NO MEDIA” No SD card is inserted.

“UNFORMATTED”

The format of the SD card could not be

recognized.

“NO AUDIO SONG” There are no audio songs.

Audio recorder

108

109

Pad audio play

Performing with the pad audio

play function

Pad audio play is a function that lets you use the front panel

buttons and 16 pads to switch instantly between audio songs

recorded by the KROSS's audio recorder or existing audio

files.

Note: One song (one file) can be assigned to each of the 16

pads. A maximum of one audio song can play back

simultaneously.

Note: In order to use this function, there must be an SD card

formatted by the KROSS which contains audio songs

recorded by the KROSS or audio files that meet the

requirements listed in “Data that can be played back,”

below. If the SD card contains no data, this function cannot

be used.

Data that can be played back

• File format: WAVE format uncompressed linear PCM

• Bit depth: 16-bit

• Sampling frequency: 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, stereo files

Specifying an audio song and

assigning the song to a pad

Note: The settings here are also reflected in the AUDIO

RECORDER SETUP window.

Note: When audio song settings are changed, data is loaded

from the SD card. Never remove the SD card while this

operation is being performed.

1. While holding down the EXIT button ( ),

press the AUDIO PLAY ACTIVE button ( )

to open the AUDIO PLAY SETUP window.

2. Select the audio play bank. Use the BANK SELECT

button and the indication of the BANK LEDs to

switch banks.

3. Press the pad to which you want to assign an audio

song or whose settings you want to change, or use the

cursor keys to select it.

4. Press the MENU (EDIT) button to open the AUDIO

SONG SETUP window.

5. Select the audio song that you want to assign.

Note: Following the audio songs, the audio song list also

shows a list of the WAV files that have been placed in the

specified location of the SD card. When you select one of

these, the Import WAV dialog box appears.

When you execute Import WAV, the file is imported as a

new audio song. (“Importing or exporting WAVE files”

on page 105)

6. Select the take of the selected audio song recorded by

the KROSS. Use the PAGE- (UNDO) button to open

the dialog box, and use the cursor keys to select the

take.

7. Adjust settings for loop playback. If you turn on

LOOP by adding a check mark,the song loops when it

is played back. Specify the loop region by setting the

loop start location (point A) and end location (point

B).

Note: Point A and point B will be at least three seconds

apart.

8. You can use the MENU (Start) button and PAGE+

(Stop/Reset) button to play back the audio song and

check the above settings.

Note: If you move the cursor to A or B, and press the

ENTER button during playback, the current time is

specified as the playback point.

9. When you've finished making settings, press the EXIT

button to close the AUDIO SONG SETUP window.

Using the pads to play back audio

songs

1. Make sure that the AUDIO PLAY ACTIVE button is

lit. To turn on the pad audio play function, press

AUDIO PLAY ACTIVE button.

2. Pads to which an audio song is assigned are lit. When

you press a lit pad, the assigned audio song plays.

During playback, the pad is lit more brightly.

3. When you once again press the currently-playing pad,

playback is paused and the pad blinks. Pressing the

pad once again in this state starts playback from the

paused location.

Tip: You can also stop the currently playing or paused audio

song by pressing the AUDIO PLAY ACTIVE button.

4. When there is a pad whose audio song is playing, you

can press a different lit pad to stop the currently-

Pad audio play

110

playing audio song and instantly switch to playing a

different audio song.

5. To switch between banks of assigned audio songs, use

the BANK SELECT button and the BANK LEDs.

Press the BANK SELECT button to make the BANK

LEDs indicate the bank that you want to select; the

BANK LED blinks. When 1 second has elapsed with the

LED blinking, the switch to that bank is confirmed.

Note: While the BANK LED of the selected bank is still

blinking, the bank switch has not yet been confirmed.

Blinking stops if you select the bank in which you're

currently working.

Note: Data is read when you switch banks. Never remove

the SD card while this is occurring.

111

Using Drum Kits

Drum Kit Overview

What’s a Drum Kit?

A drum kit is a collection of drumsamples (drum set sounds

such as bass drum, snare, or cymbals, as well as a wide

variety of other percussion sounds), with each sample

assigned to a note of the keyboard.

• Each key can play a different sound

• On each key, you can use up to four Drumsamples, with

velocity crossfades

• Each key has separate settings for the most important

sound parameters, including volume, filter cutoff and

resonance, envelope attack and decay, and pitch.

• Each note can be routed to different Insert Effects, or

have separate FX Send amounts. For instance, you can

send a snare sound through a dedicated compressor.

You can use Drum Kits only in Programs whose Oscillator

Mode is set to Drums.

Drum Kit memory structure

The KROSS has 67 Drum Kits, divided into Internal, User,

and GM (General MIDI) groups as shown below. You can

edit or write into any of the locations except for the GM

bank, which cannot be erased.

Drum Kit contents

The 9 Drum Kits in the GM bank are compatible with the

GM2 sound map. The other Drum Kits may use different

mappings, where appropriate.

Using a drum kit in a program (Oscillator

Mode)

In Program mode page P-BASIC>VOICE, set Oscillator

Mode to Drums, and then select the drum kit that will be

used by the oscillator.

Before you start editing…

Selecting a drum program

Drum Kits are edited in Global/Media mode. While you’re

in Global/Media mode, you’ll play the kit that you’re editing

as if you were playing it from within the Program, Combi, or

Song which was selected before you entered Global/Media

mode.

So, before you enter Global/Media mode, it’s best to select a

Program which is already set up for drums, with the

appropriate EG settings, effects, and so on.

In Program mode, you should select a drum program from

the DRUM/SFX category.

Matching the key of the keyboard with the

Drum Kit

In order for the note mappings to match the keyboard, the

Oscillator’s Octave setting needs to be +0 [8']. All Drum Kit

Programs should have this setting already. If you’re unsure,

you can check this yourself:

1. Go to the OSC1 Setup tab of the P-OSC> DKit page.

With a setting other than +0 [8'], the relationship between

the keys and the Drum Kit sound map will be incorrect.

2. Set the GLOBAL> BASIC parameter “Key

Transpose” to +00.

Make sure that Memory Protect is disabled

Before you start editing, go to the GLOBAL> SYSTEM

page, and look in the Memory Protect section. Make sure

that Drum Kit is not checked–if so, you won’t be able to

make any edits.

Drum Kits may be used by more than one

Program

When you edit a Drum Kit, all Programs that use that Drum

Kit will be affected. To avoid changing the factory voicing,

you may wish to copy Drum Kits to empty locations in the

USER banks before editing.

Bank No. Contents

INT 00...41 Preload Drum Kits

User 42...57 User Drum Kits

GM 58...66 GM2 Drum Kits

Using Drum Kits

112

Editing a Drum Kit

Basic Editing

1. Select the Program that you wish to use while editing

the Drum Kit.

2. Access the DRUM KIT> DS 1 page.

Press the EXIT button ( ) and the SEQ button

( ). Press the MENU button to access the menu,

use the PAGE– (▲) or PAGE+ (▼) buttons to select

DRUM KIT, then press the MENU (OK) button. (If a

different page is shown, use the PAGE– (▲) button to

select the appropriate page.)

3. On the top line of the display, use “Drum Kit Select”

to select the drum kit that you want to edit.

GM drum kits 58 (GM)–66 (GM) cannot be selected

here. (It is not possible to edit or write a GM drum kit.)

If you wish to modify the settings of one of the drum

kits 58 (GM)–66 (GM), you can use Copy Drum Kit

function to copy it to 00 (INT)–57 (USER), and then

edit the copy.

4. Use the Key parameter to select the note that you wish

to edit.

To select a key, you can use any of the standard VALUE

dial etc.

If you select KEY and press the ENTER button, you’ll be

able to use the keyboard to specify the note number. Press

the ENTER button once again to confirm.

5. Use the Assign check box to specify whether the key

will have its own settings, or use the same settings as

the next higher note.

If Assign is checked, the key will have its own settings.

This is the default.

If Assign is not checked, the key won’t have its own

settings. Instead, it will use the same settings as the next

higher note–except that the drumsamples will be played

at a lower pitch. The amount of pitch change depends on

the Pitch Slope parameter, on the P-PITCH> BASIC

page.

Use this setting when you want only to change the pitch,

such as with tom or cymbal sounds.

Tip: If you want to copy the settings of one key to a different

drum sample, use the Copy Key Setup function.

Velocity crossfade settings

For this key, let’s create a simple velocity crossfade between

two stereo drumsamples.

1. In the DRUM KIT> DS 1 and DS 2 pages, turn

Drumsample 1 and 2 on.

If it is off, select the button and press the ENTER button

to turn it on.

2. In the same way, make sure that Drumsamples 3–4

are Off.

3. Select Stereo as the Bank for Drumsample1 and

Drumsample2.

Drumsamples come in several types: RomM (ROM

Mono) or RomS (ROM Stereo).

RomM (ROM Mono) are mono drumsamples, and RomS

(ROM Stereo)are stereo drumsamples. Stereo

drumsamples use twice as many voices as mono

drumsamples.

4. Select a drum sample. Select Drumsample 1, and

press the ENTER button.

A list of drum samples organized by category will appear.

Use the cursor buttons ◄► to view the list for other

categories.

5. Use the cursor buttons to select a drum sample name

from the list in the display.

6. Press the ENTER button to change the setting.

7. Switch to the DRUM KIT> DS 2 page, and specify

Drumsample 2 in the same way.

Now that you’ve assigned Drumsamples to Drumsample1

and Drumsample2, let’s set up the velocity ranges and

crossfades.

8. For Drumsample 2, set Bottom Vel. to 1.

Turn Xfade Off.

Use the cursor button ▼ to scroll the page.

KEY AssignDrum Kit Select

Editing a Drum Kit Before you start editing…

113

9. In the DRUM KIT> DS 1 page, set the Drumsample 1

Bottom Vel. to 80.

Now, Drumsample2 will sound when you play softly, at

velocities of 79 or less–and Drumsample1 will sound

when you play harder, with velocities of 80 or more.

The meter to the left side of the Velocity Zone graphic

indicates the note-on velocity value. This lets you verify

the drumsample that will be sounded by a given velocity.

10.Next, set Drumsample1’s Xfade to 20, and its Curve to

Linear.

Notice that the graphic now shows the two ranges

tapering into one another. Between 80 and 100,

Drumsample2 will fade out, and Drumsample1 will fade

in, creating a gradual velocity transition instead of a hard

split.

Fine-tuning the sound of each sample

1. If you like, adjust the Levels for the two

Drumsamples.

This can be very useful in creating a smooth velocity split

or crossfade.

2. As necessary, specify the tuning, EG parameters, and

filter.

For each drumsample, adjust the Tune, Attack (Amp EG

Attack), Decay (Amp EG Decay), Cutoff, and

Resonance.

To link sounds such as hi-hat open and close

1. Access the DRUM KIT> VOICE page.

2. Use Excl (Exclusive) Group to assign the

drumsamples to groups.

For example, by creating a group containing keys to

which related drum samples such as hi-hat close and open

are assigned, you can prevent an unnatural situation in

which multiple types of hi-hat sound are heard

simultaneously.

If closed hi-hat and open hi-hat are assigned to the same

group, and you play the closed hi-hat while the

previously played open hi-hat is still sounding, the open

hi-hat sound stops, just as it would on an actual hi-hat.

Sustaining the sound even after the key is

released (Hold)

Use the Hold function for instruments that should continue

sustaining even after the key is released, such as a crash

cymbal. The way this works will depend on the settings of

the program and drum kit.

Set the Hold function as follows.

1. Access the Program mode P-BASIC>NOTE-ON page.

2. Make sure that the Key Zone setting Hold is on.

Once you’ve turned on Hold for the Program, the

function is controlled on a note-by-note basis according

to settings within the Drum Kit.

3. Access the Global/Media mode DRUM KIT>VOICE

page.

4. For each key, set the Note-Off (Enable Note-Off

Receive) parameter as desired.

If this check box is not selected, notes will be held, and

the sound will continue even after the key is released.

If it is checked, the key will not be held.

If you turn off Hold in the Program, no keys will be held

- regardless of their Note-Off (Enable Note-Off

Receive) setting.

Controlling effects for each key

Drum Kits have their own, built-in mixers. For each key, you

can control the Insert Effects bussing, Master Effects sends,

and pan.

Bus settings for each key

For example, you can change settings so that the snare is sent

to IFX1, the kick to IFX2, and the other sounds to L/R.

1. Access the Program mode P-FX ROUTING> BUS

page.

2. Make sure that the DKIT-SET check-box is checked.

When Use DKit Setting is on, the Program will use the

Bus Select and Effects Send settings for each key of the

Drum Kit.

When Use DKit Setting is off, the Program will ignore

the Drum Kit’s Bus Select and Effects Send settings.

3. Access the Global/Media mode DRUM KIT> VOICE

page.

4. Use the Bus Select parameter to send drum sounds

through their own Insert effects, or to the L/R

outputs.

If you like, you can send each note to its own Insert

effect, or to the individual audio outputs, in addition to

the L/R outputs.

Tip: In most preloaded drum kits, the drum instruments

have the same Bus (IFX/Output) Select settings

according to their type, as follows.

Snares → IFX1

Kicks → IFX2

Cymbals → IFX3

Toms, Percussions, other → IFX4

5. Use Send1 and Send2 to set the send levels to the

master effects.

Using Drum Kits

114

Controlling pan for each key

To use separate pan settings for each key:

1. Access the Program mode P-AMP> BASIC page.

2. Make sure that the DKIT-SET check-box is checked.

When DKIT-SET is on, the Program will use the pan

settings for each key of the Drum Kit.

3. Access the Global/Media mode DRUM KIT> VOICE

page.

4. Use “Pan” to specify the panning for each key.

Saving Drum Kits

Once you’ve spent some time editing, you’ll want to save

your work.

The contents of your editing in Global/Media mode are

preserved as long as the power is on, but will be lost

when you turn off the power. If you want to keep your

edits, you must execute the Write Drum Kits function.

This will save all drum kits.

115

Overall settings for the KROSS, and saving/loading data

How Global/Media mode is

organized

By pressing the EXIT button ( ) and the SEQ

button( ), selects Global/Media mode.

In Global/Media mode, you can access the following settings

and operations.

• Master tune

• Key transpose

• Effect global button

• Global MIDI channel

• Creating scales

• Damper pedal, assignable foot switch/pedal

• Creating user drum kits

• Creating user arpeggio patterns

• Save, load, and format an SD card

• Functions for managing additional PCM data

For details on how to access each page, please see “Basic

operations” on page 12.

The settings that you edit in the GLOBAL–DRUM KIT

pages of Global/Media mode are preserved until you

turn off the power, but will return to their previous

settings when you turn off the power. If you want to

keep these settings, you must write them into memory.

You can also save them on an SD card. (see pages 124,

125)

The Compare function that lets you return to the state

prior to your editing (or undo edits) is not available in

Global/Media mode.

Global setting

For details on global setting, see Parameter Guide.(“Global/

Media mode” on page 155 of the Parameter Guide)

Basic settings for the KROSS

BASIC page

In the GLOBAL>BASIC page you can access settings for

the KROSS's own keyboard.

Tuning to another instrument

To adjust the tuning in fine increments, in order to match

other instruments or recorded music:

• The GLOBAL> BASIC page Master Tune setting

adjusts the pitch of the KROSS.

The Master Tune function is adjustable over a range of ±50

cents (one semitone= 100 cents). When Master Tune is at 0,

middle A is tuned to 440 Hz.

Transposing the keyboard

The pitch of the KROSS can be transposed in semitone

steps. This is convenient when you want to change the key of

the song without changing your fingering on the keyboard.

When playing the KROSS by itself

• Adjust the GLOBAL> BASIC page Key Transpose setting.

The transposition range is up or down one octave in

semitone steps.

When playing via MIDI

In addition to the Key Transpose setting described above, you

can also change the G–MIDI>BASIC page Convert Position

setting. By switching the Convert Position, you can specify

whether the Key Transpose setting and the velocity curve

setting (described below) will be applied to MIDI IN or to

MIDI OUT.

If you’re using an external MIDI keyboard to play the sound

generator of the KROSS, and want to transpose the pitch, set

this to Post MIDI. The velocity curve will also apply to

MIDI IN.

If you’re using the keyboard of the KROSS to play an

external MIDI sound module, and want to transpose the

pitch, set this to Pre MIDI. The velocity curve will also

apply to MIDI OUT.

Tuning and transpose settings Velocity curve settings

Overall settings for the KROSS, and saving/loading data

116

Changing how velocity will affect the volume

and tone

Velocity curves let you adjust the way the KROSS responds

to your playing dynamics on the keyboard. The default

setting should work for most players, but there are many

other choices to let you customize the response to match

your own style.

• The GLOBAL> BASIC page Velocity Curve setting

specifies how velocity will affect the volume and tone.

Velocity Curve 4 is the default, and should work for most

players.

Curve 9 is designed specifically for playing piano sounds

from the weighted NH keyboards in the 88-note models.

(see “Velocity Curve” on page 156 of the Parameter

Guide)

• Specify the position where the velocity curve will be

applied. For more about “Convert Position,” please see

“Transposing the keyboard,” above.

Velocity curves

SYSTM (SYSTEM) page

In the GLOBAL>SYSTM (SYSTEM) page you can access

settings for the KROSS's effects and arpeggiator, and protect

the memory.

Bypassing the effects

You can bypass the KROSS’s insert effects, and master

effects. These settings will bypass the effects in all modes. If

you’re using effects such as reverb or chorus provided by an

external effect processor, mixer, or DAW, you can bypass the

KROSS’s own effects so that they will not be used.

• The GLOBAL> SYSTM (SYSTEM) page Effect SW

setting bypasses the effects. If the check box is cleared,

the effects will be bypassed.

Clearing the IFX box: Bypasses the insert effects

Clearing the MFX box: Bypasses the master effects

MFX can also be controlled using the front panel

REALTIME CONTROLS. Press the SELECT button to

select EFFECT, and use the SWITCH (MASTER FX) button

to turn it on/off. This is a convenient way to temporarily turn

off effects such as reverb while you perform.

Note: These parameters will always be turned on when the

KROSS starts up.

Arpeggiator recall settings (Linking the

arpeggiator with programs or combinations)

You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings written into

each program or combination will also be selected when you

select that program or combination, or whether the

arpeggiator will stay in its current state without changing

settings.

With the factory settings, the former will occur. You can

choose the latter behavior if you want to play phrases and

patterns with certain arpeggiator settings while you switch

only the sound between different programs or combinations.

• If the GLOBAL> SYSTM (SYSTEM) page LOAD ARP

WHEN CHANGING check boxes are selected for

Program and Combination, the arpeggiator settings that

are written will be recalled when you switch programs

and combinations respectively.

Disabling the arpeggiator, Step sequencer,

and drum track

• If the GLOBAL> SYSTM (SYSTEM) page ARP/SS/DT

check box is selected, the arpeggiators, the step

sequencer, and the Drum Track will be turned off.

Even if the ARP, RUN or DRUM TRACK buttons are

on, the arpeggiator, Step Sequencer, and Drum Track will

not function.

Protecting the memory

The KROSS provides a memory protect setting that

prohibits internal memory from being overwritten; this

prevents the program, combination, song, drum kit, and user

arpeggio pattern data from being modified unintentionally.

• To protect the contents of memory, you can select the

various Memory Protect check boxes in the GLOBAL>

SYSTM (SYSTEM) page to prohibit data from being

written or loaded, or songs from being recorded.

PREF 1 (Preferences 1) page

In the GLOBAL>PREF 1 (Preferences 1) page you can

access settings for the KROSS's power.

Auto power-off

• The GLOBAL>PREF 1 (Preferences 1) page Auto

Power-Off setting specifies the length of time after

which the power will automatically turn off when there

has been no user input on the KROSS for a specified

amount of time. (see page 18)

Battery type setting

In order for the remaining battery capacity to be correctly

indicated, the type of battery in use should be specified.

MAX

127

Soft

127

Strong

Velocity (MIDI In to sound engines)

Velocity (Keyboard to MIDI Out)

Convert Position = PostMIDIConvert Position = PreMIDI

Velocity

eect

Stop the arpeggiator, Step sequencer, and drum track

Eect bypass settings Memory protect settings

Auto power-oDisplay contrastBattery type

Auto Save

KORG Logo Light - Brightness

Global setting MIDI settings

117

• In the GLOBAL>PREF 1 (Preferences 1) page, use

Battery Type to select the type of batteries you’re using.

Select Battery Type, and press the ENTER button to

switch the setting.

Alkaline: Select when using alkaline batteries

Ni-MH: Select when using nickel-metal hydride batteries

Auto-save setting

• In the GLOBAL>PREF 1 page, use the Auto Save check

box to specify the power-conservation setting for when

operating on batteries.

If this is On (checked), the brightness of the rear panel

KORG logo illumination is decreased to save power only

when operating on batteries. The default setting is On.

Adjusting the display contrast

You can adjust the contrast of the display.

• Adjust the GLOBAL>PREF 1 (Preferences 1) page LCD

Contrast setting.

Tip: In any mode, you can adjust the contrast by holding

down the EXIT button ( ) and turning the VALUE

dial.

KORG Logo Light - Brightness

This specifies the brightness of the rear panel KORG logo

illumination. If this is Off, the logo is unlit.

• In the GLOBAL>PREF 1 page, set KORG Logo Light -

Brightness to specify the setting.

MIDI settings

In the G-MIDI> BASIC, OUT, and FILTER pages you can

adjust overall MIDI settings that apply to the entire KROSS.

Global MIDI channel

The global MIDI channel is the basic MIDI channel of the

KROSS; keyboard and controller information is transmitted

on this channel. The sound generator will produce sound

mainly in response to receiving messages on this channel.

• This setting is specified by the G-MIDI> BASIC page

MIDI Channel parameter.

Local control

Local control specifies whether the keyboard and controllers

will directly play and control the sound generator of the

KROSS.

Turn local control on if you’re playing the KROSS by itself,

or if you’re playing and controlling an external MIDI device

unidirectionally while you play the KROSS.

If you have made connections and settings so that the

performance data from the KROSS is being sent through an

external MIDI device and returned back to the KROSS, such

as when the KROSS is connected to a computer, turn local

control off to prevent notes from being triggered in

duplicate.

• This setting is specified by the G-MIDI> BASIC page

Local Control On parameter.

MIDI Clock synchronization

The KROSS can use its own internal tempo, or synchronize

to external clocks from either MIDI or USB.

The best general-purpose setting is Auto. This combine the

functionality of Internal and External MIDI/USB, so that

you don’t have to manually switch between the two:

If external clocks are being received, they control the

KROSS tempo.

If external clocks are not being received, the KROSS uses its

internal tempo instead.

• This setting is made by the G-MIDI> BASIC page MIDI

Clock parameter.

If this is set to Ext-MIDI or Ext-USB, or is set to Auto

and MIDI clock is being received, the PROG> MAIN

page and similar pages will show  =EXT, and the tempo

of the KROSS will be synchronized with the external

MIDI device. In this case, you won’t be able to change

the tempo from the KROSS.

Pedal and other controller settings

In the G-INPUT/CTRL> FOOT page you can assign foot

controller functions and specify the polarity. (see

“Connecting foot controllers” on page 23)

Creating and selecting scales

You can create an original scale in the G-USER SCALES>

OCTAVE and ALL pages. You can create sixteen User

Octave Scales which allow you to specify the pitch of each

note in an octave (which will then be applied across all

octaves), and you can create one User All Note Scale which

allows you to individually specify the pitch for every one of

the 128 notes.

By adjusting the pitch of each key in the range of ±99 cents,

you can raise or lower it by approximately one semitone

relative to the normal pitch.

Local Control on/o

Global MIDI channel

MIDI clock settings

Assignable button and Assignable Pedal settings

Damper pedal and assignable switch polarity settings

Overall settings for the KROSS, and saving/loading data

118

The user scales you create here can be used by specifying the

scale for a program, for each timbre of a combination, or for

each track of a song.

You can choose these scales from the following pages.

Here is how to set the scale type for each timbre in

Sequencer mode.

1. Create a user octave scale or a user all notes scale.

Select a key, and use the VALUE dial to adjust the pitch.

The range of ±99 raises or lowers the pitch approximately

one semitone above or below the standard pitch.

Note: You can also select the key by holding down the

ENTER button and playing a note on the keyboard.

Note: You can copy one of the preset scales and edit it to

create an original scale. To do so, use the Copy Scale

function.

2. Access the Sequencer mode S-TRACK> SCALE page.

3. Set “Scale Type (Song’s Scale)” to select the scale for

the currently selected song.

4. If you want the Track to use the scale saved with its

individual Program, check the track’s “Use

Program’s Scale” check box.

Tracks that are not checked will use the scale specified by

Scale “Scale Type (Song’s Scale).”

Mode Page

Program P-BASIC> SCALE: Scale Type

Combination C-TIMBRE> SCALE: Scale Type, Use Program’s Scale

Sequencer S-TRACK> SCALE: Scale Type, Use Program’s Scale

Data used by the KROSS Creating and selecting scales

119

Data used by the KROSS

The KROSS accesses the following folders and files on the SD card.

1. DATA folder

This is the folder that the KROSS uses to save/load data. Use

the MEDIA> FILE page and UTIL page to work with these

files.

You cannot create folders below the DATA folder.

Folders created by a computer or other device will be

ignored.

2. .PCG files

These files contain KROSS programs, combinations, drum

kits, global settings, favorites data, and user arpeggio pattern

data.

3. .SNG files

These files contain song data for the Sequencer mode of the

KROSS.

4. .MID files

These files contain Sequencer mode songs that have been

saved as Standard MIDI Files (SMF). Existing SMF data can

also be loaded.

5. Export WAVE files

These files contain audio data that was recorded by the audio

recorder or sampled by the pad sampler, and has been

exported as WAVE files.

6. Import WAVE files

Existing WAVE files can be imported for use with the audio

recorder or pad sampler.

Files of the following format can be exported and imported.

Export

File format: WAVE file

File bit depth: 16-bit

Sampling frequency: 48 kHz

Number of characters in file name: The first eight characters

are shown (this can be renamed)

File name extension: .WAV

Import

File format: WAVE file

File bit depth: 16-bit

Sampling frequency: 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, stereo files

Number of characters in file name: The first eight characters

are shown

File name extension: .WAV

Note: Since 44.1 kHz WAVE files will be converted into

48 kHz as they are imported into the KROSS, a small

amount of time may be required.

7. .KSC files, .KMP files, .KSF files

.KSC files are Korg Script files or Korg Sample Collection

files; they manage Korg format PCM data. (Because of

differences in the specifications of supported models, the

name of these files may differ, but their basic functionality is

the same.)

In the same way, .KMP (Korg Multisample Parameter) files

support loading of multisamples, and .KSF (Korg Sample

Parameter) files support loading of drum samples.

Sample data created by sampling-capable models such as the

KRONOS, OASYS, M3, and TRITON can be loaded subject

to the amount of available memory, and played. Data that

was sampled by the pad sampler function can also be

exported and loaded into a different sampling-capable

model, and played.

KROSS2KORG

EXTWAV01.WAV

EXTWAV02.WAV

DATA

NEWFILE.PCG

NEWFILE.SNG

(Programs, combinations, etc.)

(songs)

NEWFILE.MID

(Standard MIDI Files)

(Data folder)

(Export WAVE les)

IMPORT.WAV

(Import WAVE les)

PCM.KSC, PCM.KMP, PCM.KSF

(Korg format PCM les)

IMPORT.WAV

(Expansion PCM/Sound les

(The format only for KROSS))

Folder and le structure (DOS les)

AUDIO

SAMPLER

Overall settings for the KROSS, and saving/loading data

120

8. .KEP files

.KEP (Korg EX PCM) files are files that manage option

expansion PCM and sound data. These files include PCM

data and sound data such as parameters and programs.

9. AUDIO folder

This folder contains system data and recording data for the

audio recorder.

Do not use your computer to modify this folder. The

files and folders below this folder are only for the use of

the audio recorder. Do not rename or modify them.

Doing so will prevent the system from operating

correctly.

10. SAMPLER folder

System data and recorded data for the pad sampler is saved

here.

Do not use your computer to modify this folder. The

files and folders below this folder are only for the use of

the pad sampler. Do not rename or modify them. Doing

so will prevent the system from operating correctly.

Files and data structures that the KROSS can recognize

The KROSS can load and save the following data.

Inside a file, .PCG data and .SNG data have the structure

that’s shown in the following illustration. When loading

data, you can also select and load data individually.

.PCG le

All programs

1 program

bank A...F, UA...UD

1 program

All combinations

1 combination

bank A, B, C, UA...UD

1 combination

All drum kits

User

1 drum kit

bank INT, USER

1 drum kit

All user

arpeggio patterns

1 user

arpeggiopattern

bank INT, USER

1 user

arpeggiopattern

Global settings

.SNG le

Undened DOS le

DOS les

1 song

(000-199)

All track

Favorites data

.MID le

.WAV le

.KEP le

.KSC le

.KMP le

.KSF le

DOS les

Saving data Saving data on the KROSS

121

Saving data

Saving data on the KROSS

The KROSS can save .PCG, .SNG., or .MID files as follows.

Note: The explanation here applies to data in the DATA

folder.

• Writing to internal memory

• Saving to an SD card (commercially available)

• MIDI data dump

Writing to internal memory

The following types of data can be written into the internal

memory.

• Program

Programs 000–127 in banks A–F,

User Programs 000–511 in banks UA-UD

• Combination

Combinations 000–127 in banks A, B, C,

User Programs 000–511 in banks UA-UD

• Global settings

(GLOBAL> BASIC–G-USER SCALE> ALL)

• Favorites data

banks A-H

• User arpeggio patterns

0000–1279

• User drum kits

00(INT)–57(USER)

• User template songs U00–U15

Song settings such as the song name and tempo, track

settings (see page 100 of the Parameter Guide),

arpeggiator, and effect settings can be saved (written) to

internal memory. However, the musical data for song

tracks and patterns are not saved to internal memory.

Furthermore, settings that govern how the musical data is

played back such as Time Sig (Time Signature),

Metronome, PLAY/MUTE, and Track Play Loop

(including Start/End) settings will not be saved either.

Use the Sequencer mode function Save Template Song

to write this data; for details, please see page 140 of the

Parameter Guide.

The musical data and setup data of a song you create in

Sequencer mode cannot be saved in the KROSS’s

internal memory. You’ll need to save this data to a

commercially available SD card.

About preloaded data and preset data

“Preloaded data” refers to the data that is loaded in the

KROSS when it is shipped from the factory. You are free to

rewrite this data, and with the exception of the demo songs,

the data will be written to the location as described in

“Writing to internal memory.”

You can reload the factory preload data into internal memory

by using the Global/Media mode Load Preload/Demo Data

function.

Preset data, on the other hand, is data that cannot be

overwritten by the Write operation. This includes the

following data.

• GM program banks GM, g(1)–g(9), g(d)

• GM drum kits 58(GM)–66(GM)

• Preset template songs P00–P15

• Preset Drum Track patterns/Preset patterns 001–772

Bank numbers and conditions for saving

The bank and number indications show the numbers used for

MIDI transmission and reception. Since the conditions for

saving will differ depending on the bank as shown in the

following table, this will provide a helpful guide.

With the factory settings, the program banks have the

following contents.

Programs

Combinations

Saving to SD card

The following data can be saved to an SD card

(commercially available) inserted in the KROSS’s SD card

slot.

Please see “Files and data structures that the KROSS can

recognize” on page 120.

• .PCG file:

Programs, Combinations, Drum kits, Global settings, and

user arpeggio patterns

• .SNG file:

Song

• .MID file:

Saves a Sequencer mode song in Standard MIDI File

(SMF) format.

•.WAV file:

Exports an audio song or the pad sampler function's

sample data in 48 kHz 16-bit format. (Execute the Export

Bank Prog No. Use

Explanation and conditions for

saving

000...127

Preload

programs

You can overwrite a bank/

number that contains a sound

of the same category. You can

change the category if saving a

new sound; it will be saved in

user bank

G 001...128

GM2 capital

programs

256 programs and 9 drum

programs complying with the

GM2 sound map. Programs of

these banks are read-only. They

cannot be written.

g1...g9 001...128

GM2 variation

programs

gd 001...128

GM2 drum

programs

UA-

000...511

User/initial

programs

User programs and initialized

programs.

Bank Prog No. Use

Explanation and conditions for

saving

000...127

Preload

combinations

You can overwrite a bank/

number that contains a sound

of the same category. You can

change the category if saving a

new sound; it will be saved in

user bank.

UA-

000...511

User/initial

combinations

User combinations and

initialized combinations.

Overall settings for the KROSS, and saving/loading data

122

function in the AUDIO RECORDER SETUP window or

the SAMPLER SETUP window.)

• .KSC file:

Exports the pad sampler function's sample data as a

Korg-format PCM data file. (Execute the Export to KSC

function in the SAMPLER SETUP window.)

MIDI data dump

The KROSS can transmit the following types of data as a

MIDI data dump; you can save this data on an external data

filer or other device.

• Programs, combinations, drum kits, favorites data and

global settings

• Song (Sequencer)

• User arpeggio pattern

For details, please see “Dump:” on page 178 of the

Parameter Guide.

Writing to internal memory

Writing a Program or Combination

Writing (saving) procedure

The Program and Combination settings you’ve made in the

various editing pages can be saved to internal memory. This

action is referred to as “writing a program” or “writing a

Combination.” If you want your edited data to be preserved

after the power is turned off, you must perform a Write

operation.

In order to write, you must first disable memory protect

in Global/Media mode.(→ p.116)

If you access the MEDIA page while audio data is being

loaded at start-up or while the audio recorder is being

used, the message “SD card busy” is displayed, and the

functionality of that page will be unavailable. Either

wait for the SD card access indicator to stop blinking, or

stop the audio recorder.

A combination does not contain the actual program data

for each timbre, but simply references the number of the

program used by each timbre. If you edit a program that

is used by a combination, or exchange it with a different

program number, the sound of the combination will also

change, reflecting the altered program.

1. Verify that the program or combination you want to

save is selected.

2. Select the Write Program or Write Combination

function. If you selected a user bank program or

combination, the function will be Write/Initialize

Program or Write/Initialize Combination.

Press the FUNCTION button. Use the PAGE– (▲) button

to select the above function, and then press the MENU

(OK) button. A dialog box will appear.

Note: The conditions for saving will depend on the bank.

(see “Bank numbers and conditions for saving” on

page 121)

3. The conditions for saving will differ depending on the

bank of the program or combination you selected in

step 1.

If you selected program bank A–F or combination

bank A or B:

If you specified Write, you can save the sound to the

same category within bank A–F. The category is fixed.

If you specified New, you can specify any category and

save the sound in bank UA-UD 000–511.

Saving data Writing to internal memory

123

If you selected program bank UA-UD or combination

bank UA-UD:

If you specified New, you can specify any category and

save the sound in bank UA-UD 000–511.

Note: For more about Initialize, please see page 131.

4. Use Category to specify the category of the program/

combination. For the banks that you can specify,

please see step 3.

5. Select the save-destination in WRITE To. For

limitations on the save-destination, please see step 3.

6. If you want to rename the program/combination,

press the text edit button.

The text edit dialog box will appear. Enter the program/

combination name. (see “Editing names” on page 124)

When you’ve finished entering the name, press the OK

button to return to the Write Program/Write Combination

dialog box.

7. To execute the Write operation, press the MENU

(OK) button.

If you decide not to execute, press the FUNCTION

(CANCEL) button or the EXIT button.

About the Tone Adjust settings that are saved

• Tone Adjust parameter controls two or more program

parameters simultaneously. For example, “Filter/Amp

EG Attack Time” controls a total of six program

parameters. The value of a Tone Adjust parameter

indicates the amount of change that is applied to the

value of each program parameter it’s affecting.

When a Tone Adjust parameter is at zero, the program

parameters it controls will function according to their

original settings. Raising or lowering the value of a

relative parameter will indirectly raise or lower the value

of these program parameters.

Program mode:

• The settings of Tone Adjust parameters are automatically

applied directly to the program parameters when you

write the program. The Tone Adjust values will be reset

to zero.

For details, please see page 3 of the Parameter Guide.

Combination mode:

• The settings of Tone Adjust parameters are written and

preserved as the Tone Adjust settings for each timbre.

For details, please see page 75 of the Parameter Guide.

About the Program and Combination edit buffer

When you select a program in PROG> MAIN or a

combination in COMBI> MAIN, the program or

combination data is called into the KROSS’s edit buffer.

When you then use the various Program or Combination

pages to edit the parameters, your changes will affect the

data in the edit buffer.

If you wish to save this modified data into internal memory,

you must perform the Write operation.

When you perform the Write operation, the data in the edit

buffer is written to the specified program or combination

number of the specified bank.

If you select another program or combination without

writing your edits, the data of the newly selected program or

combination will overwrite the edited data in the edit buffer,

and your changes will be lost.

Note: When you execute the COMPARE function in

Program or Combination mode, the data from internal

memory (the written content) will be temporarily called into

the edit buffer. This allows you to compare the settings you

are editing with the original un-edited settings.

Edit Buer

Write

Select

Internal Memory

Edit

When you write, the

program or combination

settings will be saved in

internal memory.

When you select a program

or combination, its data is

called from internal memory

into the edit buer.

Editing applies to the data in the edit

buer. Programs or combinations will

play according to the data in the edit

buer.

Program

A 0...127

Combination

A 0...127

Overall settings for the KROSS, and saving/loading data

124

Writing Global settings, User Drum Kits and

User Arpeggio Patterns

Memory in Global/Media mode

When the power is turned on, the Global/Media mode data is

called from internal memory into the Global/Media mode

memory area. Then when you modify the parameters in

Global/Media mode, the data in the memory area will be

modified. If you wish to save this modified data into internal

memory, you must Write it.

When you write this data, the data in the memory area is

written into internal memory.

If you turn off the power without writing, the modified data

in the memory area will be lost.

Writing (saving) procedure

The following three types of Global/Media mode data can be

saved by writing it into the KROSS’s memory.

• Global settings (the settings in GLOBAL> BASIC -

G-USER SCALE> ALL)

• Drum kits (the settings in ARP PATTERN> SETUP -

ARP PATTERN> MODE)

• Arpeggio patterns (the settings in DRUM KIT> DS1 -

DRUM KIT> VOICE)

Changes you make to this data will be remembered as long

as the power remains on, but will be lost when you turn off

the power. If you want to keep your changes even after

turning the power off, you must write them into memory.

The following are exceptions.

Parameters that are not saved even if you Write

•Effect SW

1. Access the page that contains the parameters or

settings that you want to save.

Choose one of the GLOBAL–G-USER SCALE pages if

you want to write global settings, choose DRUM KIT

pages if you want to write drum kits, or choose ARP

PATTERN pages if you want to write arpeggio patterns.

2. Press the FUNCTION button located at the lower left

of the display, and select Write Global Setting, Write

Arpeggio Patterns, or Write Drum Kits. The

respective dialog box will appear.

3. In the Write dialog box, press the MENU (OK)

button.

If you decide not to execute, press the FUNCTION

(CANCEL) button or the EXIT button.

Editing names

You can modify the name of an edited program,

combination, song, drum kit, or user arpeggio patterns etc.

These renaming procedures can be performed in the

following pages.

1. Select a function from the pages above, use the cursor

buttons ◄►▲▼ to select the text edit button ,

and press the ENTER button.

The text edit window will appear.

2. Use the cursor buttons PAGE– (◄) and PAGE+ (►)

to move the cursor.

3. Use the cursor buttons ◄►▲▼ or the VALUE dial to

select a character, and press the ENTER button to

input that character.

4. Press the FUNCTION (SHIFT) button to switch

characters.

5. If you hold down the FUNCTION (SHIFT) button,

the three functions at the bottom of the display will

become INSERT, DELETE, and SPACE (insert a

space).

If you hold down the FUNCTION (SHIFT) button and

press the ENTER button, a character will be inserted at

the left of the cursor. Similarly, you can hold down the

FUNCTION (SHIFT) button and press PAGE–

(DELETE) to delete the character at the cursor location,

or press PAGE+ (SPACE) to insert a space at the cursor

location.

6. Press the MENU (OK) button to confirm. If you

decide to discard the changes, press the EXIT button.

Memory Area

Write

Power On

Internal Memory

Edit

Global Setting

(GLOBAL...

G-USER SCALE)

ARP PATTERN DRUM KIT

Editing will aect the data that has

been called into the memory area.

When you Write, the

various Global mode

settings will be saved in

internal memory.

When the power is

turned on, the settings

are called into the

memory area.

Item Page

Program PROG...P-MFX function: Write Program

Combination

COMBI...C-MFX function:

Write Combination

Song

SEQ...S-MFX (except for S-TRACK EDIT)

function: Rename Song

S-TRACK EDIT function: Rename Track

Arpeggio Pattern

ARP PATTERN function:

Rename Arpeggio Pattern

Drum Kit DRUM KIT function: Rename Drum Kit

File

MEDIA> FILE function:

Save All…Save to Std MIDI File

MEDIA> UTIL function:

Rename, Format

Audio song

AUDIO RECORDER SETUP function:

Create New Audio Song, Rename Audio

Song, Export

Pad Sampler EDIT SAMPLE function: Rename Sample

Saving data Saving to SD card

125

Saving to SD card

For details on the data that can be saved on SD card, please

see “Data used by the KROSS” on page 119.

The musical data of a song that you create in Sequencer

mode cannot be saved in the KROSS’s internal memory.

You must save this data on a commercially available SD

card, or save it using MIDI data dump. When you’ve

come up with settings you like, it’s a good idea to save

them, so that even if you subsequently edit those

settings, you’ll always be able to reload the previous

settings if desired.

For details on the SD cards that can be used, and on how to

insert or remove the SD card in the card slot, please see

“Using an SD card” on page 25.

How to save data

Access the MEDIA> FILE page, and use a function

command to select the data that will be saved on the SD

card.

As an example here, we’ll execute Save All to save the .PCG

and .SNG files.

“Save All” saves all internal memory Programs,

Combinations, Favorites data, Global settings, Drum Kits,

and User Arpeggio Patterns to media as a .PCG file. It also

saves songs as a .SNG file.

This method is available only if the current directory is

a DOS directory. Press the cursor button ◄ to move

between levels.

If you access the MEDIA page while audio data is being

loaded at start-up or while the audio recorder is being

used, the message “SD card busy” is displayed, and the

functionality of that page will be unavailable. Either

wait for the SD card access indicator to stop blinking, or

stop the audio recorder.

1. Make sure that the SD card is in a state that allows

saving. (see “Inserting/removing an SD card” on

page 25)

2. Access the MEDIA> FILE page.

Hold down the EXIT button ( ) and press the

SEQ button ( ). Use the PAGE+ and PAGE-

buttons to access the MEDIA>FILE page.

Note: If the contents of another file are shown, press the

cursor button ◄.

3. Press the FUNCTION button to access the menu, use

the PAGE– (▲) or PAGE+ (▼) buttons to select Save

All, and then press the MENU (OK) button.

A dialog box will appear.

4. Press the text edit button and input a filename for the

file you want to save. (see “Editing names”)

5. Press the MENU (OK) button to execute the save

function.

The data will be saved on the SD card, and you will

return to the Save page.

Cursor Characters

SHIFT button

Switch

between

uppercase,

lowercase,

numerals, and

symbols

Hold down the SHIFT button

Move the cursor

left/right

SPACE button

Insert a space at the

cursor position

DELETE button

Delete the

character at the

cursor position

INSERT button

Press the ENTER button

to insert a character at

the left of the cursor

Tex t

OK button

Press the OK button to

conrm the text you

entered, or press the EXIT

button to discard your

changes and quit editing

Target

Overall settings for the KROSS, and saving/loading data

126

The display will show the file that was saved.

The various types of data are saved as the following files.

•.PCG file

•.SNG file

Cautions when saving

If an identically named file exists on the SD cared

If a file with the same name already exists on the SD card,

you will be asked whether you want to overwrite that data. If

you wish to overwrite, press the MENU (OK) button. If you

want to save without overwriting, press the FUNCTION

(CANCEL) button and rename the file before you save it.

For details, please see page 124.

Loading data

Data that can be loaded

Loading from SD card

You can load the following data from SD card.

• .PCG files:

Programs, combinations, drum kits, global settings,

favorites data, user arpeggio patterns

• .SNG file:

Song

• .MID file:

Standard MIDI file (SMF) format

• .WAV files:

Import into the audio recorder or pad sampler (44.1 kHz/

48 kHz, 16-bit, stereo files)

• Loading of .KSC and multisample data is supported

Note: For details on the SD cards that can be used, please

see page 25.

Loading the preloaded data and demo songs

You can load the factory settings and demo songs back into

the KROSS’s internal memory. For the procedure, please see

“Loading the preloaded data” on page 131.

Loading data from SD card

Loading all Programs, Combinations, Drum

Kits and Arpeggio patterns

Here we’ll explain how to load all data from a .PCG file

containing Programs, Combinations, Drum kits, Global

settings, and User Arpeggio patterns in a single operation.

Before loading this data, make sure that the Global/

Media mode Memory Protect check box is cleared. (see

“Protecting the memory” on page 116)

1. Make sure that the SD card is in a state that allows

loading. (see “Inserting/removing an SD card” on

page 25, “Automatic SD card loading at start-up” on

page 25,“Saving to SD card” on page 121)

2. Access the MEDIA> FILE page.

Hold down the EXIT button ( ) and press the

SEQ button ( ). Use the PAGE+ and PAGE-

buttons to access the MEDIA>FILE page.

3. Use the cursor buttons ▲▼ to select the .PCG file

that contains the program or combination data that

you want to load.

Note: The .PCG files and .SNG files are at the top level.

If you don’t see them, press the cursor button ◄ to

change levels. (see “Files and data structures that the

KROSS can recognize” on page 120)

Loading data Loading data from SD card

127

4. Choose the Load selected function.

Press the FUNCTION button. Use the PAGE– (▲) button

to choose Load selected, and then press the MENU (OK)

button. A dialog box will appear.

5. Press the MENU (OK) button. All data from the .PCG

file will be loaded into the KROSS.

Never remove the media while data is being loaded.

Loading individual data from a .PCG file

The KROSS lets you load Programs, Combinations, Drum

kits, User Arpeggio patterns individually or by individual

banks.

Be aware that if you change the order of Programs, the

sounds played by Combinations may also be affected.

As an example here, we will explain how a combination

(A012) saved in bank A can be loaded into UA000.

1. Select the combination that you want to load.

Use the cursor buttons ▲▼ to select a file, and press the

cursor button ► to move to the next level.

[PCG] .PCG→[Cmb] Combinations→[Cmb] Bank

A→[Cmb] 012

2. Choose the Load selected function.

Press the FUNCTION button. Use the PAGE– (▲) button

to choose Load selected, and then press the MENU (OK)

button. A dialog box will appear.

3. Specify the load-source combination in the From

section; and specify the load-destination combination

(UA000) in the To section.

Note: The load-destination will be user bank.

4. Press the MENU (OK) button to execute loading; the

loaded combination will be assigned to UA000.

Loading songs for use in Sequencer mode

(.SNG)

As an example here, we will explain how to load a song.

Tip: If you want to use edited programs, drum kits, or user

arpeggio patterns in a song, load those programs (i.e., .PCG

file) after (or before) you load the song.

1. Perform steps 1–3 under “Loading all Programs,

Combinations, Drum Kits and Arpeggio patterns” on

page 126. Select the .SNG file containing the data you

want to load (it will be highlighted).

2. Choose the Load selected function.

Press the FUNCTION button. Use the PAGE– (▲) button

to choose Load selected, and then press the MENU (OK)

button. A dialog box will appear.

3. Use “Select .SNG Allocation” to specify the

destination where the song data will be loaded.

“Append” will load the song into the song number that

follows the song(s) that currently exists in internal

memory, without leaving a vacant number.

“Clear” will erase all songs from internal memory, and

load the songs into the numbers from which they were

saved.

4. Press the MENU(OK) button to execute loading.

Never remove the media while data is being loaded.

Overall settings for the KROSS, and saving/loading data

128

Loading a .KEP file

.KEP (Korg EX PCM) files are files that manage option

expansion PCM and sound data.

These files include PCM data and sound data such as

parameters and programs.

When you load a .KEP file, the PCM data is loaded into

expansion sample memory. The parameter data is loaded

into the user area of internal memory. The expansion sample

memory has up to 128 MB of free space. (When calculated

as 48 kHz, 16-bit linear data)

1. Using your computer, copy the .KEP file that you

want to load into the KORG/KROSS2/DATA folder of

an SD card that was formatted by the KROSS.

2. As described in steps 1-3 of "Loading all programs,

combinations, drum kits, and arpeggio patterns" (see

page 126), select the .KEP file that contains the data

you want to load.

3. Choose the Load Selected function.

Press the FUNCTION button. Use the PAGE- (▲) button

to choose Load Selected, and then press the MENU (OK)

button. A dialog box appears.

4. In Sound Data Allocation, specify how the sound data

such as the programs and combinations will be

loaded.

Append: The data will be loaded into vacant locations.

Clear: The data will be loaded starting at the beginning

of each user area.

Manual: The data will be loaded starting at the load

destination that you individually specify.

5. Press the MENU(OK) button if you want to execute,

or press the FUNCTION(CANCEL) button if you

decide not to execute.

Once you load sample data, it remains in memory even

after you turn off the power. If you want to remove

previously loaded data from user sample memory, use the

Unload PCM function in the EX-PCM page.

Note: The PCM data in a .KEP file is loaded into the free

area of expansion memory. Loading will not be possible if

there is not enough free area for the data to be loaded. You'll

need to obtain the necessary amount of free memory by

unloading the PCM data of a previously loaded .KEP file,

and then loading again.

Note: Depending on the size of the PCM data in a .KEP file,

loading might take a long time. Do not touch the switches or

controls of the KROSS while data is being loaded. Never

turn off the power of the KROSS during this time.

Loading a .KSC file

.KSC (Korg Script or Korg Sample Collection) files are

Korg-format PCM data files.

Sample data created by sampling-capable models such as the

KRONOS series, OASYS, M3, and TRITON series can be

loaded subject to the amount of available memory, and

played.

.KSC files contain links to sample data, including

multisamples, samples, and drum samples. When you load a

.KSC file, the sample data, including the .KMP files and

.KSF file linked to that file, are loaded.

Note: The Sampling mode data, .KMP file, and .KSF file

listed in the .KSC file are saved in the directory of the same

file name that is automatically created together with the

.KSC file when saving. When you load a .KSC file, place the

directory of the same file name in the same level as the .KSC

file on the SD card.

When you load a .KSC file, the PCM data is loaded into

expansion sample memory. The expansion sample memory

has up to 128 MB of free space. (When calculated as 48 kHz,

16-bit linear data)?

Note: You can load a .KMP (Korg Multisample Parameter)

file or .KSF (Korg Sample File) file into the KROSS, and

play it. (See Load KSC, Load KMP, and Load KSF on

Parameter Guide page 186.)

1. As described in steps 1-3 of "Loading all programs,

combinations, drum kits, and arpeggio patterns" (see

page 126), select the .KSC file that contains the data

you want to load.

2. Choose the Load Selected function.

Press the FUNCTION button. Use the PAGE- (▲) button

to choose Load Selected, and then press the MENU (OK)

button. A dialog box appears.

3. Press the MENU(OK) button if you want to load, or

press the FUNCTION(CANCEL) button if you decide

not to load.

The data is loaded after the last-existing multisample and

sample number. The multisamples and samples that are

loaded at this time are packed so that only the actually-

used samples are loaded (Append load).

Once you load sample data, it remains in memory even

after you turn off the power. If you want to remove

previously loaded data from user sample memory, use the

Unload PCM function in the EX-PCM page.

Note: The PCM data in a .KSC file is loaded into the free

area of expansion memory. Loading will not be possible if

there is not enough free area for the data to be loaded. You'll

need to obtain the necessary amount of free memory by

unloading the PCM data of a previously loaded .KEP file,

and then loading again.

Note: Depending on the size of the PCM data in a .KSC file,

loading might take a long time. Do not touch the switches or

controls of the KROSS while data is being loaded. Never

turn off the power of the KROSS during this time.

Media utility Formatting SD card

129

Media utility

Formatting SD card

Newly purchased media or media that has been used by

another device cannot be used “as is;” you must format the

SD card before you can use it with the KROSS.

When you format the SD card, all data that had been

saved on that media will be erased. Be sure to double-

check the SD card for data before you format.

You must use the KROSS to format the media. The

KROSS will not correctly recognize media that has

been formatted by another device.

1. Correctly insert the SD card to be formatted into the

SD card slot. (see “Inserting/removing an SD card” on

page 25)

2. Access the MEDIA> UTIL page.

Hold down the EXIT button ( ) and press the

SEQ button ( ). Use the PAGE+ and PAGE-

buttons to access the MEDIA> UTIL page.

3. Select the Format function.

Press the FUNCTION button. Use the PAGE+ (▼)

button to select Format, and then press the MENU (OK)

button. A dialog box will appear.

4. Press the MENU (OK) button to format, or press the

FUNCTION (CANCEL) button if you decide to cancel.

When you press the MENU (OK) button, a message will

ask you for confirmation. Press the MENU (OK) button

once again to execute the Format operation.

Never remove an SD card from the slot while

formatting is in progress.

Setting the current time

Specify the date and time; this is used to record the correct

date and time when you save data.

Since the KROSS does not contain a calendar or clock,

you should use the Set Date/Time function to specify

the date and time before saving, if necessary.

1. Select the MEDIA> UTIL page Set Date/Time

function. (see steps 2 and 3 of “Formatting SD card”)

A dialog box will appear.

2. Use the VALUE dial to set the correct year, month,

day, hour, minute, and second.

3. Press the MENU (OK) button.

Overall settings for the KROSS, and saving/loading data

130

131

Appendices

Restoring the factory settings

Loading the preloaded data

The original preload data is backed up in the KROSS, so you

can restore any or all of the Programs, Combinations, Drum

Kits, User Arpeggio Patterns, and Global settings to their

original factory settings.

Note: The original demo songs can be re-loaded at any time.

For details, please see “About the data loaded by All Preload

PCG”.

User banks and user patterns where preload data has not

been loaded will remain unchanged. If you want to erase

user banks or user patterns, initialize the KROSS and then

load the preload data. For more details, please see

“Initializing the system” on page 132.

Never turn off the power while the data is being loaded.

Before you load the preload data, go to the GLOBAL>

SYSTM page, and uncheck the “Memory Protect”

settings for the data that you want to load. If you

execute this procedure with these settings checked, the

data will not be loaded.

Loading the preloaded data will overwrite the contents

of the internal memory. If you want to keep the existing

data that is stored in internal memory, use “Save All

(PCG&SNG)” or “Save PCG” to save your data to the

SD card before you continue.

This cannot be used while the SD card's Automatic

loading at start-up is in progress, nor while the audio

recorder is recording or playing back.

1. Access the GLOBAL> BASIC page.

Hold down the EXIT button ( ) and press the

SEQ button ( ) to enter Global/Media mode.

If the GLOBAL> BASIC page is not shown, press the

EXIT button.

2. Select the Load Preload/Demo Data function.

Press the FUNCTION button. Use the PAGE– (▲) and

PAGE + (▼) buttons to select Load Preload/Demo Data,

and press the MENU (OK) button. A dialog box will

appear.

3. As the Kind, use the VALUE dial etc. to choose All

(Preload PCG and Demo Songs).

4. Press the MENU (OK) button to load the preload

data. If you decide not to load the preload data, press

the FUNCTION (CANCEL) button.

When you press the MENU (OK) button, a dialog box

will ask you for confirmation. Press the MENU (OK)

button to execute loading.

About the data loaded by All Preload PCG

When you execute All Preload PCG, the following data will

be loaded:

• Program: Bank A, B, C, D, E, F

• Combination: Bank A, B, C

• Favorite bank: A, B, C, D

• Drum Kit: 00(INT)–51(INT)

• User Arpeggio Pattern: 0000–1023

• Global Setting

If you execute All (Preload PCG and Demo Songs), the

demo songs will be loaded as well as the data above.

• Demo Song: S000–002

Note: As with the other user songs, the Demo Song data will

not remain in Sequencer mode when you turn off the power.

You’ll need to load it again if necessary.

Initializing the user bank

Here’s how to initialize a program or combination in the user

bank.

1. Select the user bank program or combination that you

want to initialize.

Use the CATEGORY dial to select the USER category,

and use the VALUE dial to select the program or

combination; then press the MENU button.

2. Select the Write/Initialize Program or Write/Initialize

Combination function.

Press the FUNCTION button. Use the PAGE– (▲) button

to select the function above, and then press the MENU

(OK) button. A dialog box will appear.

3. Use the cursor buttons ◄►▲▼ to select Initialize,

and press the ENTER button.

4. Use the cursor buttons ▼ to choose This/Bank/All,

and press the ENTER button to select it.

This: Only the selected program or combination will be

initialized.

Bank(UA...UD): Initializes the programs or combinations

of the selected bank.

All: All programs or combinations in USER bank will be

initialized.

Appendices

132

5. To execute initialization, press the MENU (OK)

button; if you decide not to execute, press the

FUNCTION (CANCEL) button.

When you press the MENU (OK) button, a confirmation

dialog box will appear; press the MENU (OK) button to

execute initialization.

Initializing the system

If operation becomes unstable, initializing the system may

stabilize it.

1. Turn off the power of the KROSS.

2. Initialize the KROSS. While holding down the EXIT

button ( ) and FUNCTION button, turn on

the power of the KROSS.

The KROSS will be initialized, and data will be written

into internal memory. While the data is being processed,

the display will indicate “Now writing into internal

memory.” After initialization, you’ll need to load the

preload data.

In Global/Media mode, execute the “Load Preload/Demo

Data” function to load the data. (see page 131)

Updating the system

You can update the KROSS’s system software by loading the

most recent system file, which you can download to your

computer from the Korg website (http://www.korg.com).

• Copy the system file onto an SD card, insert the SD card

into the KROSS, go to the GLOBAL> BASIC page, and

execute the Update System Software function.

For details on the procedure, please see the Korg website and

“Update System Software” on page 177 of the Parameter

Guide.

This cannot be used while the SD card's Automatic

loading at start-up is in progress, nor while the audio

recorder is recording or playing back.

Troubleshooting

If you experience problems, please see the relevant item and

take the appropriate measures.

Power supply

Power does not turn on

□ Is the AC adapter connected to an outlet? → p.17

□ Did you hold down the power button for several seconds?

→ p.17

□ Is there remaining capacity in the batteries? → p.19

Power won’t turn off

□ Did you hold down the power button for several seconds?

→ p.18

Power turns off

□ Could the Auto Power-Off function be enabled? → p.18

Problems at start-up

After you turn the power on, nothing appears on the

display, or the display is very dim or dark. The KROSS

works correctly when you play the keyboard or perform

other operations.

□ Adjust the display contrast by holding down the EXIT

button ( ) and turning the VALUE dial.

You can also make adjustments using the GLOBAL>

SYSTM (SYSTEM) page LCD Contrast setting. → p.117

After you turn the power on, the contents of the display

remain unchanged for a long time, and the KROSS does

not work correctly when you play the keyboard or perform

other operations.

□ It may be that the data on the SD card is damaged.

Remove the SD card from the KROSS and start it up. If

the KROSS starts up normally, don’t use that SD card.

□ It may be that the internal data of the KROSS is damaged.

(Such a state can occur if writing to internal memory did

not end successfully, for example if you powered-off the

KROSS while a program or other data was being written

to internal memory.)

Initialize the KROSS system. →“Initializing the system”

The message “SD card busy Please wait.” appears when

you operate the AUDIO REC, SAMPLER ACTIVE/HOLD, or

AUDIO PLAY ACTIVE button

□ The SD card's Automatic loading at start-up" is being

executed as a background process. Wait until the SD card

access indicator stops blinking.

The MEDIA page shows the message "SD card busy Please

wait."

□ The SD card's Automatic loading at start-up is being

executed as a background process. Wait until the SD card

access indicator stops blinking.

Troubleshooting Basic operation (screen and functions)

133

Basic operation (screen and

functions)

Can’t change modes or pages

□ Could the sequencer be recording, playing, paused, or in

the record-ready state?

□ Could the function dialog box be displayed? You can’t

change modes while a function dialog box such as

WRITE PROGRAM is open.

Can’t turn on the LAYER/SPLIT button

□ Is Program mode selected? These functions can’t be used

outside of Program mode.

In Combination, or Sequencer mode, you can’t edit the

value of Timbre/Track parameters such as MIDI Channel or

Status

□ Some parameters can’t be edited while notes are playing,

either locally or from MIDI. If the damper pedal is held

down, or if its calibration is incorrect, notes may be

sustaining even if they aren’t audible.

• Are you using a damper pedal with a polarity that does

not match the Damper Polarity setting (G-INPUT/

CTRL> FOOT page)? → p.23

• In some cases, this problem can be solved be executing

the Half Damper Calibration function (GLOBAL>

BASIC page). → PG p.177

Audio output

No sound

□ Are connections made correctly to your amp, mixer, or

headphones? → p.21

□ Is the connected amp or mixer powered-on, and is its

volume raised?

□ Is Local Control turned on?

• In G-MIDI> BASIC, check the Local Control On check

box. → p.117

□ Could the VOLUME knob be turned all the way to the

left? → p.2

□ Is the Master Volume assigned to Foot Pedal, and is that

pedal volume lowered? → p.24

□ Could the program be muted? → p.32

□ If a specific timbre does not sound in Combination mode,

is the Sound setting set to Play? → p.48

Are all of the Solo settings turned off? → p.48

□ If a specific track does not sound in Sequencer mode, is

the Sound setting set to Play? Are all of the Sound

settings turned off? → p.57

□ Make sure that the Status is INT or BTH. → p.51, 59

□ Are the Key Zone and Velocity Zone set so that sound

will be produced when you play? → PG p.8, 79, 118

□ Are the Oscillator, Drum Track, Timbre, or Track levels

lowered in the control surface mixer? → p.32, 48, 57

□ Could the total polyphony be exceeding the maximum

polyphony of 120 voices? → p.36

Notes do not stop

□ Is Hold (P-BASIC> NOTE-ON page) turned off?

→ PG p.9

□ In G-INPUT/CTRL> FOOT, make sure that Damper

Polarity or Foot SW Polarity is set correctly. → p.23

□ If the DRUM TRACK or ARP buttons are turned on, try

turning them off.

Notes are sounded in duplicate

□ Is Local Control turned Off?

• Clear the Local Control On checkbox

(G-MIDI> BASIC). → p.117

Noise or oscillation is heard

□ When you’re applying an effect to an external audio input

signal from the MIC IN jack or LINE in jack, unwanted

oscillation (feedback) may occur depending on the type

of effect or the parameter settings. If this occurs, adjust

the external audio signal’s input level, output level, or

effect parameters. Take care especially when using high-

gain effects.

□ When using the MIDI/Tempo Sync function to control

the delay time of an effect, noise may occur in the delay

sound. This noise is due to discontinuities in the delay

sound, and is not a malfunction.

□ Some effects, such as S19: St. Analog Record, generate

noise intentionally. It is also possible to create oscillation

using a filter with resonance. These are not malfunctions.

□ Note that if you use the following effects with the routing

described below, a feedback loop will be created,

possibly producing a loud noise. Please use caution.

If the signal from an oscillator or timbre/track output, or

the signal after an insert effect, is sent to the FX Control

bus and that signal is output directly, with this output sent

to the FX Control bus, a loud noise may be output. (It is

also possible that a DC component will be output at the

maximum level, producing silence.)

• When using the S03: Stereo Limiter or S06: Stereo Gate,

and the Env Src (Envelope Source) of these effects is set

as either FX Control 1 or FX Control 2, and Trigger

Monitor is On.

• When using D09: Vocoder, with the Mod. Src

(Modulator Source) set to FX Control 1 or FX Control 2,

and the Mod. Hi Mix (Modulator High Mix) set to other

than 0.

Can’t play chords

□ Could the program’s Voice Assign Mode be set to Mono?

→ p.36

Pitch is incorrect

• In the GLOBAL> BASIC page, are the Master Tune

and Key Transpose settings correct? → p.115

• In the P-PITCH> BASIC page, is the Pitch Slope set to

+1.0? → PG p.15

• In the combination or song, are the Transpose and

Detune settings of each timbre/track set appropriately?

→ p.52 and PG p.117

• In the timbre/track settings of each program,

combination, or song, could you have selected a non-

standard scale type other than Equal Temperament?

→ p.52 and PG p.10, 78, 118

Appendices

134

Audio input

Can’t input audio

□ Is the input source connected to the MIC IN jack or the

LINE IN jack? → p.21

□ In REALTIME CONTROLS, is the AUDIO IN 1 setting

AUDIO IN turned on? → p.15

□ Is the Line or Mic input selection correct?

• Line and Mic cannot both be input simultaneously. In the

AUDIO IN - QUICK SETTING dialog box, use the

Select setting to choose either Line or Mic. → p.22

□ Are the audio input parameters such as Level, Gain, Play/

Mute, and Bus set appropriately?

• In the AUDIO IN - QUICK SETTING dialog box, select

Line or Mic and check the parameter settings. → p.22

The principal parameters have the following default

values.

Level: 127

Play/Mute: Play

Gain: 00 (Line), 37 (Gain)

Bus: L/R

Too much noise or distortion in the audio input or in the

recorded sound

□ Is the Gain set correctly?

• In the AUDIO IN - QUICK SETTING dialog box, if the

[LINE] or [MIC] indication in the middle of the level

meter is highlighted, the Gain setting is too high, and an

overload is occurring in the input stage. Lower the Gain

value until this indication is not highlighted. → p.22

• Conversely if the Gain setting is too low, the meter will

not move very much. Adjust the Gain value upward.

→ p.22

Programs and Combinations

Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed

□ Make sure that the OSC (Oscillator Mode) (P-BASIC>

BASIC) parameter is set to Double or Double Drums.

→ p.36

Program does not sound

□ Could the oscillator or amp level be lowered?

→ p.32, 37, 43

□ Could the program be muted?

• Switch the Sound in the PROG> MIXER page for a

program, or in the COMBI> MIXER page for a

combination.

A combination does not play correctly after you load data

□ Are the bank/numbers of the programs used by the

combination the same as when the combination was

created?

Can’t write a Program

□ Is the Memory Protect Program or Combination

checkbox (GLOBAL> SYSTM) cleared? → p.116

□ Banks A–F and bank UA...UD have restrictions on the

categories and banks that allow saving. → p.121

A program selected for a timbre in a combination sounds

different than when played in Program mode

□ When you select a program for a timbre in Combination

mode, the arpeggiator and effect settings from Program

mode are not automatically applied.

• You can use the Copy From Program, Copy Insert

Effect, or Copy Master Effect functions to copy these

settings from Program mode. → PG p.95, 96, 96

Sequencer

A program selected for a track sounds different than when

played in Program mode

□ When you select a program for a track in Sequencer

mode, the arpeggiator and effect settings from Program

mode are not automatically applied.

• You can use the Copy From Program, Copy Insert

Effect, or Copy Master Effect functions to copy these

settings from Program mode. → PG p.139, 151, 151

Song does not play correctly after being loaded

□ Are the programs used by the song the same as when the

song was created?

• When saving the song, it is best to use Save All

(PCG&SNG) so that the programs are saved together

with the song. Then when loading, load both the .PCG

and the .SEQ data. → p.127

Playback does not start when you press the SEQUENCER

(start/stop) button in Sequencer mode

□ Is the MIDI Clock (G-MIDI> BASIC) set to Internal or

Auto? → p.117

Can’t record in Sequencer mode

□ Did you use Track Select to select the MIDI track that

you want to record? → p.61

□ Is the Memory Protect Song check box (GLOBAL>

SYSTM) unchecked? → p.116

□ Is the MIDI Clock (G-MIDI> BASIC) set to Internal or

Auto? → p.117

A combination copied using “Copy From Combination”

doesn’t record via arpeggiator as it did when you were

playing it in Combination mode

□ Is Multi REC (SEQ> MAIN) checked? → p.61 and

PG p.108

□ Are the settings in the Copy from Combination dialog

box correct? → PG p.138

• In the Copy from Combination dialog box, check the

Auto adjust Arp setting for Multi REC option before

you execute the copy. This will cause the settings to be

adjusted automatically.

Can’t record Tone Adjust data

□ Changes you make using Tone Adjust are recorded as

system exclusive data. Did you check the G-MIDI>

FILTER Enable Exclusive check box? → PG p.163

SMF you loaded in Media mode won’t play correctly

□ Execute the GM Initialize function to restore the

settings. → PG p.141

□ Set Bank Map to GM(2) and load the data again.

→ PG p.158

Troubleshooting Arpeggiator

135

Arpeggiator

The Arpeggiator does not start

□ Is the ARP button turned on (lit)? → p.73

□ If the arpeggiator does not start for a combination or

song, make sure that Run is checked, and that an

arpeggiator is selected for Assign. → p.76

□ If the arpeggiator does not run in the ARP PATTERN>

SETUP–MODE pages, could you have moved from

Combination or Sequencer mode with settings that keep

the arpeggiator from starting?

□ Is the MIDI Clock (G-MIDI> BASIC) parameter set to

Internal? → p.117

□ In the GLOBAL> SYSTM page, is ARP/SS/DT All Off

checked? → p.116

Drum Track function

The Drum Track does not start

□ Is the DRUM TRACK button turned on (lit)? → p.83

□ You pressed the DRUM TRACK button but the drum

track pattern did not start.

• Is the DRUM TRACK button blinking?

Trigger Mode is set to Wait KBD Trigger. The drum

track pattern will start when you play the keyboard or

receive a note-on. → p.85

• Did you select a pattern that does not contain data?

• Could 000: Off be selected as the pattern? → p.83, 84

□ If the drum track pattern fails to start in Combination

mode, is the Output setting appropriate?

If the drum track pattern fails to start in Sequencer mode,

are the Input and Output settings appropriate?

→ p.84, 86

□ Is MIDI Clock (G-MIDI> BASIC) set to Internal or

Auto? → p.117

□ In the GLOBAL> SYSTM page, is ARP/SS/DT All Off

checked? → p.116

Drum Kits

The drumsample’s pitch does not change

□ You have left the Assign check box unchecked, and want

to play the drumsample at the adjacent right a semitone

lower, but the pitch does not change.

• If you’ve selected a drum program in Program mode, and

then want to use the Global/Media mode DRUM KIT

page to edit the drum kit, you should use the P-PITCH>

BASIC page to set Pitch Slope to +1.0 before you enter

the DRUM KIT page. → p.15

Effects

Effects are not audible

□ Have you selected effect program 000: No Effect ?

• Select an effect other than 000: No Effect for “IFX1–5,”

or “MFX 1, 2.”

□ Are the Effect SW IFX and MFX check boxes

(GLOBAL> SYSTM page) selected? → p.116

□ If you are in Combination and Sequencer mode, and

master effects are not audible when you raise the Send1

or Send2 of the timbre/track, does Return 1 or Return 2

from the master effect need to be raised? → PG p.93, 135

Alternatively, has Send 1 or Send 2 for each oscillator of

the program used by the timbre/track been lowered?

→ PG p.91, 132

Note: The actual send level is determined by multiplying

the send setting of each oscillator in the program with the

send setting of the timbre/track.

□ Have you routed the output to an insert effect?

→ p.68, 70 and PG p.216

The program selected for a timbre/track in Combination or

Sequencer mode sounds different than when played in

Program mode

□ When you select a program for a timbre/track in

Combination or Sequencer mode, the arpeggiator and

effect settings from Program mode are not automatically

applied.

• You can use the Copy From Program, Copy Insert

Effect, or Copy Master Effect functions to copy these

settings from Program mode.→ PG p.95, 96, 96,

→ PG p.139, 151, 151

Step sequencer

When a favorite is selected, you can’t save step sequencer

settings

□ This is normal. Access and save these settings in Program

or Combination mode.

Pad sampler

Pressing a sampled pad produces no sound.

□ Have you inserted the SD card that you used when

sampling?

□ Have you selected the bank A–H that you used when

sampling?

In Sequencer mode, the pad sampler performance is not

recorded or played back.

□ In the MAIN or PROG page, is the SMP(PAD

SAMPLER On/Off) turned on? If this is on, the pad

sampler performance can be recorded on track 15 as

MIDI note-on/off messages, and played back.

Appendices

136

When you press the SAMPLER ACTIVE button, the message

"SD card busy Please wait." appears

□ The SD card's "Automatic loading at start-up" is being

executed as a background process. Wait until the SD card

access indicator stops blinking.

Audio recorder

Can’t record

□ Is the SD card inserted correctly? → p.25

□ Could LOOP be turned on? You can’t record if LOOP is

on.

The volume of imported data is too loud compared to the

sound played by the KROSS or the external audio input

□ If the data is very loud, there may be a substantial volume

difference. To temporarily adjust the playback volume of

the audio recorder, use the Set Play Level function. If you

want to overdub onto the imported audio, use the Adjust

Audio Level function (instead of Set Play Level) to lower

the volume of the entire audio song beforehand. → p.106

When you overdub, the previous take becomes too quiet

□ Could Set Play Level be set to something other than

0 dB? Use the Adjust Audio Level function to adjust the

volume of the entire audio song. → p.106

□ Could Master Volume be assigned to Foot Pedal, and

could that pedal be lowered? If you want to adjust the

volume of the performance while you record, use

Expression or Volume. → p.24

When you press the AUDIO REC button or the AUDIO PLAY

ACTIVE button, the message "SD card busy Please wait."

appears

□ The SD card's "Automatic loading at start-up" is being

executed as a background process. Wait until the SD card

access indicator stops blinking.

When you press the AUDIO REC button or press a pad when

using the audio play function, the message "In MEDIA

pages, the audio recorder is not available." appears

□ You can't operate the audio recorder while in the MEDIA

page. Move to a different page.

MIDI

The KROSS does not respond to incoming MIDI data

□ Are all MIDI cables or USB cables connected correctly?

→ p.26

□ Are the KROSS’s receive settings (such as the global

MIDI channel and the timbre/track’s receive channel) set

to match the channels of the transmitting device?

→ PG p.315

The KROSS does not respond correctly to incoming MIDI

data

□ Are the G-MIDI> FILTER settings MIDI Filter Enable

Program Change, Enable Bank Change, Enable

Control Change, Enable AfterTouch, and Enable

Exclusive each checked? → PG p.163

□ Does the KROSS support the types of messages that are

being sent to it? → PG p.315

Can’t recall programs of the desired bank

□ Is the Bank Map setting correct? → PG p.158

Damper pedal

Damper response is wrong

□ Execute the Half Damper Calibration function

(GLOBAL> BASIC) to correctly calibrate the half-

damper pedal sensitivity. → PG p.177

Media

The message "SD card busy Please wait." appears

□ If the SD card access indicator is blinking, "Automatic

loading at start-up" is being executed as a background

process. Wait until the blinking stops.

If the audio recorder indicator is blinking, the audio

recorder is accessing the SD card. Stop the audio

recorder.

Can’t format the SD card

□ Does the SD card meet the requirements for use on the

KROSS? → p.25

□ Is the SD card inserted correctly? → p.25

□ Could the SD card’s Lock (write protect) switch be on?

Can’t save/load data on the SD card

□ Is the SD card inserted correctly? → p.25

□ Has the SD card been formatted? → p.129

□ Could the SD card’s Lock (write protect) switch be on?

SD card is not recognized

□ The date of the saved file is incorrect.

• Remove the SD card and check whether the card’s

contacts are dirty. If they are dirty, clean them gently

with a dry cloth or a cotton swab.

* Do not use liquids. Take care not to touch the contacts

directly with your hands or with a metal object.

The date of the data is wrong

□ The files you saved have the incorrect date.

• The KROSS does not contain an internal calendar. Use

the Set Date/Time function (MEDIA> UTIL page) to

specify the current time and date before you save the

data. → p.129

Data that you saved from your computer to an SD card

does not appear in MEDIA mode.

• Copy the data to the KORG/KROSS2/DATA folder.

This folder will be created when you use the KROSS to

format the card. → p.119

• Is the file name extension format appropriate? → p.119

Connections with a computer

The KROSS does not respond to MIDI data sent from

Messages Error and confirmation messages

137

outside

□ Is the USB cable connected correctly? → p.26

The computer does not detect the KROSS

□ Are the USB cables connected correctly?

An error occurs when you disconnect from the computer

□ Never disconnect the KROSS from the computer while

your host application is in use.

While connected, you are asked to install software or a

device driver

□ Does the operating system or version of your computer

support the KROSS?

When using USB, sound processing is slow, or the tempo is

unstable

□ Is the KORG USB-MIDI driver installed correctly?

• You must install the dedicated Korg driver in order to

use the KROSS via USB MIDI.

If your computer’s operating system is Windows, you’ll

need to install the driver for each USB port where you

connect the KROSS.

If you connect the KROSS to a different USB port than

the one you used when installing the KORG USB-MIDI

Driver for Windows, you’ll need to reinstall the KORG

USB MIDI driver.

Your computer does not recognize an SD card that was

formatted by the KROSS

• Does the SD card reader support SDHC cards?

Messages

Error and confirmation messages

Aborted

Meaning: Execution of the function was cancelled.

Are you sure ?

Meaning: This message asks you to confirm execution. To

execute press the OK button. To cancel, press the CANCEL

button.

Audio recorder data error

Meaning: An error occurred while managing the audio song

recording data.

• No further recording is possible. Execute the Adjust

Audio Level function with “Level:00dB” on the recorded

data, and you’ll switch to a new audio song so that you

can continue recording.

Audio song full

Meaning: Another audio song cannot be created because

there are already 200 audio songs.

• Switch to a different SD card.

Auto Power-Off is enabled.

The system will automatically shut down after being idle

for 30 minutes/1 hour/4 hours.

Meaning: The auto power-off function is enabled. If the

KROSS has not been played or operated for a specified

length of time, the power will turn off automatically.

• If you want to disable this function or change the time

setting, go to the GLOBAL> PREF 1 page and set the

Auto Power-Off parameter. Use the Write Global Setting

function to save the setting.

Can’t calibrate

Meaning: Calibration could not be performed correctly.

•Try again.

Can’t update system

Meaning: Execution of the Update System Software

operation did not end successfully.

• Try the operation again.

Completed

Meaning: The processing executed by the command has

been completed.

Completed. Please turn the power off, and then on again.

Meaning: Execution of Update System Software has been

completed successfully. Turn the power switch off, and then

on again to complete the update.

Appendices

138

Destination and source are identical

Meaning: When copying or bouncing, the same song, or

track was selected for both the source and destination. To

solve this problem:

• Select a different song, or track for the source and

destination.

Destination from-measure within the limits of source

Meaning: When executing the Move Measure command for

all tracks or within the same track, the specified destination

measure is within the source range. To solve this problem:

• Set a destination measure that is outside of the source

range.

Destination is empty

Meaning: When editing, the track that was specified as the

destination contains no musical data. To solve this problem:

• Select a track that contains musical data.

Destination measure is empty

Meaning: The measure that was specified as the destination

contains no data.

• Specify a destination measure that contains data.

Destination sample already exists. Overwrite?

Meaning: In the pad sampler function when using the Copy,

Paste, or Import operations, a sample already exists at the

destination (Paste or Import destination).

• Press the MENU (OK) button to overwrite. Press

FUNCTION (CANCEL) button to cancel the operation.

Destination song is empty

Meaning: The song that was specified as the copy

destination or bounce destination does not exist.

• Execute the Create New Song command in the dialog

box that appears when a new song is selected before

copying or bouncing. (see page 60)

Effect size mismatch

Meaning: When copying or swapping effects, you

attempted to place a double-size effect at IFX5 (insert effect

5) or MFX2 (master effect 2).

• Don’t specify a double-size effect for IFX5 or MFX2

when executing the command.

Effect type mismatch

Meaning: This message will appear when copying or

swapping effects if the copy-destination or swap-destination

IFX (insert effect), or MFX (master effect) has an effect that

cannot be selected.

• For each IFX, and MFX, some effects can be selected

and other effects cannot be selected. Verify that the

effect is one that can be selected for the copy-destination

or swap-destination IFX, or MFX.

Error in formatting media

Meaning: An error occurred while formatting the media.

• Use other media.

Error in reading from media

Meaning: An error occurred while reading data from media.

This error may also appear when data is being written to

media by a Save or Copy operation. To solve this problem:

• Execute the reading procedure once again. If the same

error occurs, it is possible that the data on the media has

been damaged.

Error in writing to media

Meaning: A verification error occurred while writing data to

a media. To solve this problem:

• It is possible that the media has been physically

damaged. Try another media. Avoid using the media that

produced the error.

File already exists

Meaning: When executing a File Rename procedure, a file

of the same name already exists on the media.

• Either delete the existing file, or specify a different

name.

File contains unsupported data

Meaning: The WAVE, .KSF, or .KEP file that you are

attempting to load is a format that is not supported by the

KROSS.

• If possible, use a computer to convert the file to a format

that the KROSS supports, and then load it.

File is read-only protected

Meaning: You attempted to write or delete a file, but the file

has a read-only attribute.

Meaning: You attempted to save a file with the same name

as a read-only file that already exists on the media.

• Save the file with a different name.

Meaning: After using a computer etc. to lock the KORG

folder, KROSS2 folder, or DATA folder, you then attempted

to save using the Media mode of the KROSS.

• Use your computer etc. to unlock these folders.

File unavailable

Meaning: The data from .KEP file is invalid. It is possible

that the .KEP file from SD card has been damaged.

Meaning: You attempted to load or open a file whose file

format is incorrect.

File/path not found

Meaning: When operating the audio recorder, or when

executing the Delete utility function of Media mode, the

specified file did not exist.

Meaning: When loading a sample file in Media mode, the

specified file does not exist; alternatively, the desired file

name does not exist in the location that you choose in a

dialog box that selects a different directory level or different

media.

Meaning: In Media mode etc. when you used the Open

button to open a directory, the path length including the

name of the selected directory exceeded 76 characters.

• Check the file or directory.

Messages Error and confirmation messages

139

Illegal file description

Meaning: You used an invalid file name when attempting to

save or export a file.

• Change the filename you are specifying. Filenames not

permitted by MS-DOS cannot be used as a filename.

Illegal SMF data

Meaning: You attempted to load a file that was not a

Standard MIDI File.

Illegal SMF division

Meaning: You attempted to load a Standard MIDI File that

was timecode-based.

Illegal SMF format

Meaning: You attempted to load a Standard MIDI File of a

format other than 0 or 1.

In MEDIA pages, the audio recorder is not available.

Meaning: You can't operate the audio recorder while in the

MEDIA page.

• Response: Move to a different page.

Measure number over limit

Meaning: The attempted edit procedure would cause the

track length to exceed 999 measures.

• Delete unnecessary measures.

Measure size over limit

Meaning: When loading a Standard MIDI File, the number

of events in a measure exceeded the maximum

(approximately 65,535 events).

Meaning: The attempted edit procedure would cause the

maximum number of events in a measure (approximately

65,535) to be exceeded.

To solve either of these problems:

• Use event editing etc. to delete unwanted data.

Media busy

Meaning: SD card access was not fast enough to keep up

with recording or playback.

• As you repeatedly delete and write files, the file access

efficiency may decline. In this case, you may be able to

improve the situation by copying the KORG folder from

the SD card to your computer, then formatting the SD

card on the KROSS, and finally writing the KORG

folder from your computer back to its original location.

If this does not improve the situation, switch to a

different SD card.

Media not formatted

Meaning: The media is unformatted.

• In the Media mode Utility page, execute the Format

function on the media.

Media unavailable

Meaning: You selected a media source that does not allow

writing.

Media write protected

Meaning: The audio recorder or Media mode is attempting

to write data to media that is write-protected.

• Disable the write protect setting of the media, and

execute the audio recorder operation or the command

once again.

Memory full

Meaning: When editing a song, or track in Sequencer mode,

the total data of all songs has used up all of the sequence data

memory, and further editing is not possible. To solve this

problem:

• Delete other song data etc. to regain free memory.

Meaning: While realtime recording in Sequencer mode,

there is no more free memory to accommodate the recorded

data, so recording has been forcibly halted. To solve this

problem:

• Delete other song data etc. to regain the amount of free

memory.

Memory Protected

Meaning: The internal program, combination, song, drum

kit, user arpeggio pattern is protected.

• In Global/Media mode, turn off write-protect, and

execute the write or load procedure once again.

MIDI data receiving error

Meaning: While receiving MIDI System Exclusive data, the

format of the received data was invalid, for example,

because the size of the data was incorrect.

No data

Meaning: When loading a Standard MIDI File, the file

contained no events.

No media

Meaning: When using the audio recorder or when executing

a Global/Media mode command, the target SD card was not

inserted.

• Insert SD card, and navigate to an appropriate directory

that the KROSS will recognize.

No recording track specified

Meaning: When performing realtime multi-track recording,

you attempted to begin recording with no tracks set to REC.

To solve this problem:

• Set the desired tracks for recording to REC.

No space available on media

Meaning: When saving or exporting a file, there was

insufficient space on the media.

• Either delete an existing file, or replace the media with

another that contains sufficient free space.

No updating was required at this time. The KROSS already

has the latest version of the system files.

Meaning: When executing the Global/Media mode Update

System Software function, the update was not necessary

because the system is already the most recent version.

Not enough memory

Meaning: When starting realtime recording in Sequencer

mode, the minimum amount of free memory (such as

memory for the BAR events up to the recording start

location) could not be allocated. To solve this problem:

• Delete other song data etc. to regain free memory.

Appendices

140

Not enough memory to load

Meaning: When you attempted to load a .SNG file or a

standard MIDI file in Media mode, there was insufficient

free memory in the sequence memory. To solve this

problem:

• Delete other song data etc. to regain free memory.

Not enough sample memory

Meaning: There is insufficient sample memory (for the

sample parameters or sample waveform data).

• Delete some samples to increase the amount of free

memory.

• In the Media mode EX-PCM page, uninstall installed

option titles or user sample data.

Not enough session locations available

Meaning: When executing Create New Session, there is

insufficient session memory. (The number of sessions has

exceeded the maximum of 200.)

• Execute the function in a way that overwrites an

unneeded session.

Not enough song locations available

Meaning: When loading a .SNG file with Append

specified, you attempted to load more songs than can be

loaded.

• In Sequencer mode, execute Delete Song to increase the

number of songs that can be used, and then load the song

again.

NOTICE: Overdubbing with this Level setting will

attenuate the sections of previous takes by the same

amount. Use ADJ.LVL to adjust the Audio Song and avoid

uneven audio levels.

Meaning: This message is shown if the audio recorder Set

Play Level function is set to a value other than 0 dB.

• With this Level setting, if you overdub a region of the

song while playing back the previous take, the volume of

the previous take will be lowered only for the recorded

region. To avoid this problem of lowered volume, use

ADJ. LVL to adjust the audio song level.

Now writing into internal memory

Meaning: Now writing to internal memory. Never turn off

the power while this message is shown. Doing so may cause

internal data to be damaged.

Root directory is full

Meaning: When attempting to create a file or directory at

the root level of the media, you exceeded the maximum

number of files or folder that could be created in the root

directory of that media.

• Delete unneeded files from the root level of the media.

Sample length is shorter than minimum

Meaning: When using the pad sampler function, you

attempted to execute an edit that would have caused the

sample data length to be shorter than 8 samples.

• Specify the edit region etc. so that the sample data length

is 8 samples or longer.

Scanning media

Meaning: Now checking the contents of the SD card. Do not

remove the card while this message is shown.

SD card busy

Please stop the audio recorder.

Meaning: The audio recorder is accessing the SD card.

• If the audio recorder is operating, stop the audio

recorder.

SD card busy

Please wait.

Meaning:The SD card's “Automatic loading at start-up”

function or some other function is accessing the SD card or

the internal memory.

• If the SD card access indicator is blinking, wait until it

stops blinking.

Selected file/path is not correct.

Meaning: When loading a .KSF file that was saved in

divided form across multiple sets of media, the order in

which you attempted to load the files was incorrect.

• Load the .KSF files in the correct order.

Source audio song setting is empty

Meaning: When using the pad audio play function, and

executing Insert or Paste, the copy-source audio song

settings were empty.

• Execute the Copy command before you execute Insert or

Paste.

Source is empty

Meaning: No data exists in the track that you specified as

the source.

• Specify a track that contains musical data.

Meaning: The export-source audio song does not contain

data.

• Specify an audio song that has been recorded.

Source sample is empty

Meaning: When using the pad sampler function, and

executing Insert or Paste, the source sample was empty.

• Execute the Copy command before you execute Insert or

Paste.

Meaning: When using Export to KSC / Export to WAV to

export, the export-source sample does not exist.

• Select a valid sample.

Source timbre is not available

Meaning: When executing the Copy Step Seq function, the

selected copy-source is a combination or song whose

“STEP” check box is not selected. In this case, the step

sequencer’s pattern settings etc. will be copied, but the

program settings of timbre 16/track 16 will not be copied.

• Select the “STEP” check box of the copy-source

combination or song.

System warning

The internal memory has been corrupted, likely due to an

interruption of power while the system was writing/

saving data. This has been repaired and the affected Bank

has been initialized.

Meaning: A memory write procedure did not end normally,

perhaps because the power was turned off while processing

Messages Error and confirmation messages

141

was still underway after you wrote a program or other data

into internal memory.

• The KROSS will automatically initialize itself in order to

repair the internal memory. This message will appear at

this time; press MENU(OK) button to close the dialog

box. In some cases, the preload bank data may be

temporarily initialized. As necessary, use the Global/

Media mode Load Preload/Demo Data command to load

the preload data into internal memory, or if you have

your own backup PCG, load it using Media mode.

There is no readable data

Meaning: Either the file size is 0 or the file does not contain

data that can be accessed by the load or open procedure.

Alternatively, the data is damaged etc., and cannot be loaded

or accessed.

The SD card is busy. Please stop the audio recorder and try

again.

Meaning: The audio recorder is accessing the SD card.

• If the audio recorder is operating, stop the audio

recorder.

The SD card is busy. Please wait until the current

operation is complete.

Meaning:The SD card's “Automatic loading at start-up”

function or some other function is accessing the SD card or

the internal memory.

• If the SD card access indicator is blinking, wait until it

stops blinking.

The song exists, and will be initialized

Meaning: When executing the Sequencer mode Create New

Song function, you attempted to create a new song for a song

number that already exists. If you execute, the song will be

initialized, and a new song will be created and overwritten

onto it.

• If you don’t want to initialize the currently-existing song,

specify a new song number.

The system has been idle for more than **** and will shut

down in:

You can change the Auto Power-Off setting on the

following page: GLOBAL - PREF 1

Meaning: If there has been no operation for the specified

length of time of time, the Auto Power Off function will

display a message informing you that the power will turn off

soon. The power will turn off when the countdown time

indication reaches zero.

• If you want to continue using the KROSS, press a key or

switch. Auto Power Off will be reset, and the same

message will appear when the specified length of time

has once again elapsed without any operation.

• If you want to disable this function or change the time

setting, go to the GLOBAL> PREF 1 page and set the

Auto Power-Off parameter. Use the Write Global Setting

function to save the setting.

This title is already loaded

• You attempted to load a EX-PCM option title that had

already been loaded.

Unable to save file.

Meaning: In Media mode when you save a file, the path

length including the name of the selected directory exceeded

76 characters.

You can’t undo last operation. Are you sure?

Meaning: Once you enter event editing (even if you leave

event editing without actually editing an event), it will no

longer be possible to execute Compare to listen to the

previous edit. If you wish to enter event editing, press the

MENU (OK) button. To cancel, press the FUNCTION

(CANCEL) button.

You can’t undo this operation. Are you sure?

Meaning: When you exit recording or event editing in

Sequencer mode, the memory area for Undo (Compare

function) is not allocated. If you wish to keep the data that

was just recorded or edited, press the MENU (OK) button. If

you wish to return to the previous data (i.e., to delete the data

that was just recorded or edited), press the FUNCTION

(CANCEL) button.

Meaning: When editing in Sequencer mode, memory area

for Undo (Compare function) cannot be allocated. If you

wish to execute the edit, press the MENU (OK) button (It

will not be possible to undo your edit). If you decide not to

execute the edit, press the FUNCTION (CANCEL) button.

• In order to allocate memory area for Undo (Compare

function), delete unneeded data such as songs, or tracks.

We recommend that you data to media before you

execute the edit procedure.

You can use “Quick Setting” with [EXIT]+[ENTER]

Meaning: In the Audio In page of Program, Combination, or

Sequencer modes, this is shown at the bottom of the screen

when the G-SET check box On setting is selected. At this

time, the Audio In settings use the settings of the Global/

Media mode G-INPUT/CTRL>AUDIO IN page. To apply

these settings easily, hold down the EXIT button and press

the ENTER button to open the Audio In - Quick Setting

dialog box for G-SET.

Appendices

142

Specifications

Operating temperature +10 – +40 °C

Keyboard

KROSS2-61

61 keys (velocity sensitive; aftertouch not supported)

Normally C2–C7 (adjustable in the range [C1...C6]–[C3...C8])

KROSS2-88

88 keys NH (Natural weighted hammer action) keyboard (no aftertouch)

Normally A0–C8 (adjustable in the range [A-1...C7]–[A1...C9])

* The NH keyboard delivers a playing feel similar to that of an acoustic piano, with

low notes being heavier and high notes being lighter.

System EDS-i (Enhanced Definition Synthesis - integrated)

Sound Engine

Maximum Polyphony

120 voices (120 oscillators), single mode

60 voices (60 oscillators), single mode

* The actual maximum polyphony will vary depending on oscillator settings such as

stereo multisamples and velocity crossfading.

Preset PCM memory

Approximately 112 MB (calculated as 48 kHz / 16-bit linear PCM data equivalent)

496 multisamples (including seven stereo), 1014 drumsamples (including 49 stereo)

Expansion PCM memory

Approximately 128MB (*when converted to 48 kHz 16-bit linear PCM)

* Used to load option PCM (file name extension .KEP) or Korg-format PCM data files

(file name extension .KSC), etc.

Programs

Oscillator

OSC1 (Single), OSC1+2 (Double): Stereo multisamples are supported

4 velocity zones per oscillator, with switching, crossfades and layers.

Filters

Four types of filter routing (single, serial, parallel, 24 dB)

Two multi-mode filters per voice (low pass, high pass, band pass, band reject)

Modulation

For each voice, two envelope generators (Filter & Amp), two LFOs, two key tracking

generators (Filter & Amp), and two AMS mixers

In addition, pitch EG, common LFO, and two common key tracking generators

Combinations

Timbres

Up to 16 timbres, switchable via key zone or velocity zone, layer and crossfade

supported, Tone Adjust function allows program settings to be offset

Master Keyboard

functionality

These allow you to control external MIDI devices

Drum Kits

Stereo and mono drumsamples.

4-way velocity switches with crossfades and adjustable crossfade shapes (Linear, Power, Layer).

The number of

…

-Combinations

-Programs

-Drum Kits

User Combinations 896 Combinations (384 Preload)

User Programs 1280 Programs (768 Preload)

User Drum Kits 58 Drum Kits (42 Preload)

Preset Programs 265 Programs (256 GM2 Programs + 9 GM2 Drum Programs)

Favorites Number of memories 128 (16 favorites × 8 banks)

Effects

5 Insert Effects In-line processing; stereo in - stereo out.

2 Master Effects Two effects sends; stereo in - stereo out.

Effects types

Total of 134 types (select from 74 types for insert effects, 101 types of master

effect 1, and 120 types for master effect 2)

Modulation Dynamic Modulation

Effects Control Bus Stereo side-chaining for limiter, gates, vocoders, etc.

Polyphonic arpeggiators

Program mode: one arpeggiator available. Combination and Sequencer modes: two arpeggiators available.

5 preset arpeggio patterns (UP, DOWN, ALT1, ALT2, RANDOM)

1280 user arpeggio patterns (1024 preload)

Number of tones: 12 tones, Number of steps: up to 64 steps

Step sequencer

Program mode

Combination mode

Sequencer mode

One unit, Number of tones: 12 tones + 1 accent tone, Number of steps: up to 64

steps

* Can be created for each program, combination, and song

Drum Track

Preset patterns 772 patterns (Held in common with sequencer patterns.)

Trigger Mode / Sync / Zone settings can be specified

Sequencer

16 MIDI Tracks

128 Songs

Resolution: 480 ppq (parts per  )

Tempo: 40.00–300.00 bpm (1/100 bpm resolution)

Up to 210,000 MIDI events

Counter Measure/Beat/Tick

16 preset/16 user template songs

Preset Patterns 772 patterns (Held in common with Drum Track patterns.)

Format Korg (KROSS) format, SMF (formats 0 and 1) supported

Specifications Error and confirmation messages

143

Pad sampler

16pads x 8banks

Automatically saved to and loaded from SD card

Up to four pads can play simultaneously

Recording format PCM audio format (48 kHz/16-bit)

Recording time Maximum stereo sample is approximately 14 seconds for each pad

Import

WAVE format (file name extension .wav) 44.1 kHz/16-bit, 48 kHz/16-bit, stereo

* 44.1 kHz is automatically converted to 48 kHz

Export

Korg-format PCM data file format (file name extension .KSC)

WAVE format (file name extension .WAV) 48 kHz / 16-bit, stereo

Edit

Waveform display editing functions, settings such as start address and loop, editing

functions such as normalize

Audio recorder

Recording format Audio format: PCM audio format (48 kHz/16-bit)

Import

Export

WAVE format (file name extension .wav) 44.1 kHz/16-bit, 48 kHz/16-bit, stereo

* 44.1 kHz is automatically converted to 48 kHz

WAVE format (file name extension .wav) 48 kHz/16-bit, stereo

Recording time

Continuous recording time: maximum 3 hours

Total recording time: depends on the SD card used (approximately 90 minutes per

1GB)

Number of songs Maximum 200 songs

Number of overdub

recording passes

Depends on the remaining capacity of the SD card

Counter Hour/Min/Sec

Pad audio play

16 pads x 8banks

Direct playback of data from SD card

Multiple pads cannot play simultaneously

Media File, Utility, Information, Functions for managing additional PCM data

Controllers

Pitch bend wheel, Modulation wheel, SW1, 2

REALTIME CONTROLS SELECT button, SWITCH button, KNOB1 knob, KNOB2 knob

Step sequencer /

Favorites / Pad Sampler /

Pad Audio Play

Pads 1–16

STEP SEQ ACTIVE button, RUN buttons,

FAVORITES ACTIVE button,

SAMPLER ACTIVE button, HOLD button,

AUDIO PLAY ACTIVE button,

BANK SELECT button

LED: A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H (also used by STEP SEQ , FAVORITES, SAMPLER and AUDIO

PLAY)

Drum Track Buttons = DRUM TRACK

Arpeggiator Buttons = ARP

Audio recorder PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button (SETUP)

User Interface

Display

240 x 64 pixel LCD (backlit)

Adjustable contrast (EXIT button + VALUE dial)

Category CATEGORY dial, VALUE dial

MODE Buttons = COMBI, PROG, SEQ (GLOBAL/MEDIA)

Value controller

VALUE dial, cursor buttons ◄►▲▼, EXIT, ENTER, FUNCTION, PAGE–, PAGE+, MENU

buttons

SEQUENCER Buttons = (REC), (START/STOP)

Quick layer/split LAYER/SPLIT button

Other VOLUME knob

Control Inputs

DAMPER (Supports piano-style half-damper pedals as well as standard foot switches)

ASSIGNABLE SWITCH, ASSIGNABLE PEDAL

Audio Outputs (Analog)

AUDIO OUTPUT

L/MONO, R

Connectors 1/4" phone jacks (TS unbalanced)

Output Impedance 1.1 [kΩ] stereo; 550 [Ω] mono (L/Mono only)

Maximum Level +10.0 [dBu]

Load Impedance 10 [kΩ] or greater

Controllable by the VOLUME knob

Headphone output

Connectors 1/8" stereo mini-phone jack

Output Impedance 33 [Ω]

Maximum Level 40 + 40 [mW]

Controllable by the VOLUME knob

Audio Inputs (Analog)

LINE IN

Connectors 1/8" stereo mini-phone jack

Input impedance 1.1 [kΩ]

Maximum input level –42 to 0 [dBu]

MIC IN

Connectors 1/4" phone jacks (TS unbalanced)

Input impedance 33 [Ω]

Maximum input level –48 to –6 [dBu]

MIDI IN, OUT

USB 1 USB (TYPE B) USB-MIDI interface, USB Audio interface

SD-Card slot

Capacity recognized: SD memory cards up to 2 Gigabytes (GB). SDHC memory cards up to 32 Gigabytes (GB).

SDXC memory cards are not supported.

Appendices

144

Operating requirements

KORG USB-MIDI Driver

Windows

Operating system: Windows 7 SP1 (32-bit/64-bit)

Windows 8.1 update (32-bit/64-bit)

Windows 10 Anniversary Update (Version 1607)

Computer: USB port required (a USB host controller made by Intel is recommended)

Mac

Operating system: Mac OS X 10.10 or later, macOS 10.12, 10.13

Computer: Apple Macintosh computer with an Intel processor that has a USB port and satisfies the requirements for

running Mac OS.

* Appearance and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Power

AC adapter power supply jack (DC 9V, ), Power On/Off button

AA alkaline batteries × 6, or nickel-metal hydride batteries × 6

Battery life

AA alkaline batteries × 6 Approximately 6 hours

AA nickel-metal hydride

batteries (1900 mAh) × 6

Approximately 7 hours

* Battery life will vary depending on the batteries used and on the conditions of use.

* This is the time with the default factory settings.

Power Consumption 5 W

Dimensions

(W × D × H)

KROSS2-61 935 × 269 × 88 mm / 36.81" × 10.59" × 3.46"

KROSS2-88 1,448 × 383 × 136 mm / 57.01" × 15.08" × 5.35"

Weight

KROSS2-61 3.8 kg/8.38 lbs (excluding batteries)

KROSS2-88 12.3 kg/27.12 lbs (excluding batteries)

Accessories AC adapter, KROSS Quick Start Guide

Options

XVP-10 Expression/Volume Pedal

XVP-20 VOL/EXP PEDAL

EXP-2 Foot Controller

DS-1H Damper Pedal

PS-1, PS-3 Pedal Switch

MIDI Implementation Chart

Date : 2017. 02. 24

Ver.: 1.00

Model: KROSS

*E, *4

Memorized

[SYNTHESIZER WORKSTATION]

Polyphonic aftertouch and Channel aftertouch

*A (receive)

transmitted only as sequence data

*A (receive)

All note numbers 0–127 can be transmitted

by the Arpeggiator or as sequence data

Bank Select (MSB, LSB)

Modulation wheel

Controller, Pedal, Portamento Time

Volume, IFX pan, Pan, Expression

Eect Control 1, 2, Controller

Damper, Portamento Sw., Sostenuto, Soft

Sound controller

Switch 1, 2, Foot Switch, Controller

Send 1, 2, Eect ON/OFF (IFXs, MFXs, TFX)

Arpeggiator Controllers

*C, *2

Data Entry (MSB, LSB), Increment, Decrement

RPN (LSB, MSB)

*C, *3

Seq. Data

(Seq when received)

All Sound O, Reset All Controllers

0, 32

2, 4, 5

7, 8, 10, 11

12, 13, 16

64, 65, 66, 67

70−79

80, 81, 82, 83

93, 91, 92, 94

14, 22–24

6, 38, 96, 97

100, 101

0–119

120, 121

Notes *P, *A, *C, *E:

Transmitted/received when Global G-MIDI FILTER page (Program Change, Aftertouch, Control Change, Exclusive) is Enable, respectively.

*1: When Global G-MIDI BASIC page MIDI Clock is Internal, transmitted but not received. The opposite for Ext-MIDI, Ext-USB.

*2:

Valid if the Global G-MIDI OUT page setting ARP Controllers MIDI Out is set to Control Change. The number shown here is the default setting.

*3: RPN (LSB,MSB)=00,00: Pitch bend range, 01,00: Fine tune, 02,00: Coarse tune

*4:

In addition to Korg exclusive messages, Inquiry, GM System On, Master Volume, Master Balance, Master Fine Tune, and Master Coarse

Tune are supported.

System

Real Time

Clock

Command

Aux

Messages

Local On/O

All Notes O

Active Sense

Reset

Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

Default

Changed

Aftertouch

Pitch Bend

Polyphonic (Key)

Monophonic (Channel)

Program

Change

Variable Range

System Exclusive

System

Common

Song Position

Song Select

Tune

Velocity

Note On

Note O

Note

Number:

True Voice

Mode

Memorized

Messages

Altered

Control

Change

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO : Yes

Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO : No

0 – 127

9n, V=1 – 127

8n, V=64

0 – 127

1 – 16

0 – 127

9n, V=1 – 127

0 – 127

0 – 127 0 – 127

123 – 127

1 – 16

Transmitted only if MIDI Clock is

Ext-MIDI or Ext-USB

Consult your local Korg distributor for more information on MIDI IMPLEMENTATION.

Published 09/2019

www.korg.com

Korg Kross 2 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Andere handleiding(en) van Korg Kross 2

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info